PHYSICS

CLASS-XI
CONTRIBUTORS
S.No. Name Designation School

1. Jile Singh Vice SBV No. 3, Mandawali,

(Group Leader) Principal Delhi-110092

2. Devinder Kumar Lecturer SBV A-Block, Vikas Puri,

Physics New Delhi-110018

3. Deepti Gupta Lecturer SKV, Timarpur,

Physics Delhi-110054

4. Joginder Lecturer RPVV, Pocket-5

Physics Narela, Delhi-110040

5. Krishan Kumar Lecturer RPVV, Phase-II, Sector-21

Physics Rohini, Delhi-110086

xiii
 CONTENTS
Unit Chapter Page

1. Dimensions and Measurement 1 – 31

2. Kinematics 32 – 86

3. Laws of motion 87 – 130

4. Work, Energy and Power 131 – 167

5. Motion of system of particles and Rigid Body 168 – 204

6. Gravitation 205 – 244

7. Properties of Bulk Matter 245 – 306

8. Thermodynamics 307 – 350

9. Behaviour or Perfect Gases and Kinetic Theory of Gases 351 – 372

10. Oscillations and Waves 373 – 428

Practice question paper 429 – 469

xiv
 PHYSICS (Code No. 042)
COURSE STRUCTURE
Class XI, 2023-24 (Theory)
Time: 3 hrs. Max. Marks: 70
No. of Marks
Periods
Unit-I Physical World and Measurement

Chapter-2 : Units and Measurements 08

Unit-II Kinematics 23
Chapter-3: Motion in a Straight Line 24
Chapter-4: Motion in a Plane
Unit-III Laws of Motion
14
Chapter-5: Laws of Motion
Unit-IV Work, Energy and Power
14
Chapter-6: Work, Energy and Power
Unit-V Motion of System of Particles & Rigid Body
18 17
Chapter-7: System of Particles and Rotational Motion
Unit-VI Gravitation
12
Chapter-8: Gravitation
Unit-VII Properties of Bulk Matter
Chapter-9: Mechanical Properties of Solids 24
Chapter-10 : Mechanical Properties of Fluids
Chapter-11 : Thermal Properties of Matter
Unit-VIII Thermodynamics
12 20
Chapter-12: Thermodynamics
Unit-IX Behaviour of Perfect Gases and Kinetic
Theory of Gases
08
Chapter-13: Kinetic Theory
Unit-X Oscillation and Waves
Chapter-14: Oscillations 26 10
Chapter-15: Waves
Total 160 70

xv
 SYLLABUS
CLASS-XI
2022–23
Unit-I : Physical World and Measurement 08 Periods
Chapter-2: Units and Measurements
Need for measurement: Units of measurement; systems of units; SI

of physical quantities, dimensional analysis and its applications.

Unit-II : Kinematics 24 Periods
Chapter-3: Motion in a Straight Line
Frame of reference, Motion in a straight line, Elementary concepts

and non- uniform motion, and instantaneous velocity, uniformly

accelerated motion, velocity - time and position-time graphs.
Relations for uniformly accelerated motion (graphical treatment).
Chapter-4: Motion in a Plane
Scalar and vector quantities; position and displacement vectors,
general vectors and their notations; equality of vectors, multiplication

vector, resolution of a vector in a plane, rectangular components,

Scalar and Vector product of vectors.
Motion in a plane, cases of uniform velocity and uniform acceleration-
projectile motion, uniform circular motion.
Unit-III : Laws of Motion 14 Periods
Chapter-5: Laws of Motion

momentum and Newton's second law of motion; impulse; Newton's

third law of motion. Law of conservation of linear momentum and
its applications.

motion: Centripetal force, examples of circular motion (vehicle on a

xvi
Unit-IV : Work, Energy and Power 14 Periods
Chapter-6: Work, Energy and Power

work- energy theorem, power.

Notion of potential energy, potential energy of a spring, conservative
forces: non-conservative forces, motion in a vertical circle; elastic
and inelastic collisions in one and two dimensions.
Unit-V : Motion of System of Particles and Rigid Body 18 Periods
Chapter-7: System of Particles and Rotational Motion
Centre of mass of a two-particle system, momentum conservation

mass of a uniform rod.

Moment of a force, torque, angular momentum, law of conservation
of angular momentum and its applications.

rotational motion, comparison of linear and rotational motions.

Moment of inertia, radius of gyration, values of moments of inertia

Unit-VI : Gravitation 12 Periods

Chapter-8: Gravitation
Kepler's laws of planetary motion, universal law of gravitation.
Acceleration due to gravity and its variation with altitude and depth.
Gravitational potential energy and gravitational potential, escape

Unit-VII : Properties of Bulk Matter 24 Periods

Chapter-9: Mechanical Properties of Solids
Elasticity, Stress-strain relationship, Hooke's law, Young's modulus,

Poisson's ratio; elastic energy.

Chapter-10: Mechanical Properties of Fluids

pressure. Viscosity, Stokes' law, terminal velocity, streamline and

xvii
 applications.
Surface energy and surface tension, angle of contact, excess of
pressure across a curved surface, application of surface tension ideas

Chapter-11: Thermal Properties of Matter

Heat, temperature, thermal expansion; thermal expansion of solids,

capacity; Cp. Cv - calorimetry; change of state- latent heat capacity.

Heat transfer-conduction, convection and radiation, thermal

displacement Law, Stefan's law.

Unit-VIII :Thermodynamics 12 Periods
Chapter-12: Thermodynamics

of thermodynamics, heat, work and internal energy. First law of

thermodynamics.
Second law of thermodynamics: gaseous state of matter, change
of condition

Unit-IX : Behaviour of Perfect Gases and Kinetic Theory of Gases

08 Periods
Chapter-13: Kinetic Theory
Equation of state of a perfect gas, work done in compressing a gas
Kinetic theory of gases assumptions, concept of pressure. Kinetic
interpretation of temperature; mms speed of gas molecules; degrees
of freedom, law of equi-partition of energy (statement only) and

Unit-X : Oscillations and Waves 26 Periods

Chapter-14: Oscillations
Periodic motion-time period, frequency, displacement as a function
of time, periodic functions and their applications.
Simple harmonic motion (S.H.M) and its equations of motion; phase;
oscillations of a loaded spring- restoring force and force constant,

xviii
energy in S.H.M. Kinetic and potential energies; simple pendulum
derivation of expression for its time period.
Chapter-15: Waves
Wave motion: Transverse and longitudinal waves, speed of travelling
wave. displacement relation for a progressive wave, principle of

and organ pipes. fundamental mode and harmonics, Beats.

xix
 Question Paper Design
Theory (Class: XI/XII)

Max. Marks : 70 Duration : 3 Hours

   
 
   





   


   










  
 
 
Note:
The above template is only a sample. Suitable internal variation may be made for
generating similar templates keeping the overall weightage to different form of
questions and typology of questions same.
For more details kindly refer to Sample Questions paper of class XII for
the year 2023-24 to be published by CBSE at its website.

xx
Practical : 30 Marks

1. Internal Choice : There is no overall choice in the paper. However, there is

an internal choice in one in one question of 2 marks weightage, one question
of 3 marks weightage and one question of 5 marks weightage (Content based
question).

2. The above template is only a sample. Suitable internal variations may be made
for generating similar templates keeping the overall weightage to different
form of questions and typology of questions same.

xxi
1.1 Physical Quantity
A quantity which can be measured and expressed in form of laws is called
a physical quantity. Physical quantity (Q) = Magnitude × Unit = n × u
Where, n represents the numerical value and u represents the unit. as
the unit(u) changes, the magnitude (n) will also change but product ‘nu’
will remain same.
i.e. n u = constant, or n1u1 = n2u2 = constant;
1.2 Fundamental and Derived Units
Any unit of mass, length and time in mechanics is called a fundamental,
absolute or base unit. Other units which can be expressed in terms of
fundamental units, are called derived units
System of units : A complete set of units, both fundamental and derived
for all kinds of physical quantities is called system of units.
(1) CGS system, (2) MKS system, (3) FPS system.
(4) S.I. system : It is known as International system of units. There are
seven fundamental quantities in this system. These quantities and their
units are given in the following table.
Quantity Name of Units Symbol
Length Metre m
Mass Kilogram kg
Time Second s
Electric Current Ampere A
Temperature Kelvin K
Amount of Substance Mole Mol
Luminous Intensity Candela Cd

Dimensions And Measurement 1

 Besides the above seven fundamental units two supplementary units are
rad) for plane angle and Steradian (sr) for solid
angle.

1.3 Dimensions of a Physical Quantity

When a derived quantity is expressed in terms of fundamental quantities,

The powers to which fundamental quantities must be raised in order to

express the given physical quantity are called its dimensions.

1.4 Important Dimensions of Complete Physics

Mechanics
S.N. Quantity Unit Dimension
(1) Velocity or speed (v) m/s [M0L1T–1]
(2) Acceleration (a) m/s2 [M0LT–2]
(3) Momentum (P) kg.m/s [M1L1T–1]
(4) Impulse (I) Newton/sec or [M1L1T–1]
kg. m/s
(5) Force (F) Newton [M1L1T–2]
(6) Pressure (P) Pascal [M1L–1T–2]
(7) Kinetic energy (Ek) Joule [M1L2T–2]
(8) Power (P) Watt or Joule/s [M1L2T–3]
(9) Density (d) kg/m3 [M1L–3T0]
(10) Angular displacement ( 0L0T0]

(11) Angular velocity ( 0L0T–1]

(12) Angular Acceleration ( 2 [M0L0T–2]

(13) Moment of inertia (I) kg.m2 [ML2T0]
(14) Torque ( 2T ]
(15) Angular momentum (L) Joule sec [ML2T–1]
(16) Force constant or spring constant (k) Newton/m [M1L0T–2]
(17) Gravitational constant (G) N–m2/kg2 [M–1L3T–2]

2 Physics Class XI
 g) N/kg [M0L1T–2]
(19) Gravitational potential (Vg) Joule/kg [M0L2T–2]
(20) Surface tension (T) N/m or Joule/m2 [M1L0T–2]
(21) Velocity gradient (Vg) Second–1 [M0L0T–1]
) kg/m s [M1L–1T–1]
(23) Stress N/m2 [M1L–1T–2]
(24) Strain No unit [M0L0T0]
(25) Modulus of elasticity (E) N/m2 [M0L–1T–2]
) No unit [M0L0T0]
(27) Time period (T) Second [M0L0T1]
(28) Frequency (n) Hz [M0L0T–1]

Heat
S.N. Quantity Unit Dimension
(1) Temperature (T) Kelvin M0L0T0K1]
(2) Heat (Q) Joule [ML2T–2]
c) Joule/Kg–K [M0L2T–2K–1]
(4) Thermal capacity Joule/K [M1L2T–2K–1]
(5) Latent heat (L) Joule/kg [M0L2T–2]
1L2T–2mol–1K–1]

(7) Boltzmann constant (k) Joule/K [M1L2T–2K–1]

1L1T–3K–1]

conductivity (K)
(9) Stefan’s constant ( ) Watt/m2–K4 [M1L0T–3K–4]
(10) Wien’s constant (b) Meter K [M0L1T0K1]
(11) Planck’s constant (h) Joule s [M1L2T–1]
–1 [M0L0T0K–1]
Expansion

Dimensions And Measurement 3

 (13) Mechanical eq. of Heat (J) Joule/Calorie [M0L0T0]
(14) Vander wall’s constant (a) Newton m4 [M1L5T–2]
(15) Vander wall’s consatnt (b) m3 [M0L3T0]

1.5 Quantities Having Same Dimensions

S.N. Dimension Quantity
(1) [M0L0T–1] Frequency, angular frequency, angular velocity, velocity
gradient and decay constant
(2) [M1L2T–2] Work, internal energy, potential energy, kinetic energy,
torque, moment of force
(3) [M1L–1T–2] Pressure, stress, Young’s modulus, bulk modulus, modulus
of rigidity, energy density
(4) [M1L1T–1] Momentum, impulse
(5) [M0L1T–2
(6) [M1L1T–2] Thrust, force, weight, energy gradient
(7) [M1L2T–1] Angular momentum and Planck’s constant
(8) [M1L0T–2] Surface tension, Surface energy (energy per unit area)
(9) [M0L0T0] Strain, refractive index, relative density, angle, solid
angle, distance gradient, relative permittivity (dielectric
constant), relative permeability etc.
(10) [M0L2T–2] Latent heat and gravitational potential
(11) [M0L0T–2K–1] Thermal capacity, gas constant, Boltzmann constant and
entropy
(12) [M0L0T1]
g = acceleration due to gravity, m = mass, k = spring
constant
(13) [M0L0T1
C = capacitance

(14) [ML2T–2] I2 Vlt, qV, Ll2, CV2 where I = current,

t = time q = charge, L = inductance, C = capacitance,

4 Physics Class XI
1.6 Application of Dimensional Analysis.

(3) To convert a physical quantity from one system to the other.

(4) To check the dimensional correctness of a given physical relation: This is
based on the ‘principle of homogeneity’. According to this principle the
dimensions of each term on both sides of an equation must be the same.
(5) To derive new relations.

1.7 Limitations of Dimensional Analysis.

(1) If dimensions are given, physical quantity may not be unique.
(2) Numerical constant having no dimensions cannot be deduced by the methods
of dimensions.
(3) The method of dimensions can not be used to derive relations other than
product of power functions. For example,
s = u t + (1/2) at2 or y = a sin t
(4) The method of dimensions cannot be applied to derive formula consist of
more than 3 physical quantities.
1.8 Significant Figures

the measurement. The reverse is also true.

(3) Leading zeros or the zeros placed to the left of the number are never

Example :

Example :

Dimensions And Measurement 5

 Example : 1.32 × 10–2

1.9 Rounding Off

(1) If the digit to be dropped is less than 5, then the preceding digit is left
unchanged.
Example : x x
3.9.
(2) If the digit to be dropped is more than 5, then the preceding digit is raised
by one.
Example : x x
to 12.8.
(3) If the digit to be dropped is 5 followed by digits other than zero, then the
preceding digit is raised by one.
Example : x x = 6.758 is rounded

(4) If digit to be dropped is 5 or 5 followed by zeros, then preceding digit is

left unchanged, if it is even.
Example : x x = 12.650

(5) If digit to be dropped is 5 or 5 followed by zeros, then the preceding digit

is raised by one, if it is odd.
Example : x x = 16.150 is rounded

1.10 Significant Figures in Calculation

The following two rules should be followed to obtain the proper number

precisions should be reported to the same number of decimal places as

are present in the number having the least number of decimal places.

calculation.

6 Physics Class XI
1.11 Order of Magnitude
Order of magnitude of quantity is the power of 10 required to represent the
quantity. For determining this power, the value of the quantity has to be

For example,
(1) Speed of light in vacuum = 3 × 108 ms–1 108 m/s (ignoring 3 < 5)
(2) Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg 10–30 kg (as 9.1 > 5).

1.12 Errors of Measurement.

is called error of measurement.

(1) Absolute error—Absolute error in the measurement of a physical quantity

value of the quantity.

Let a physical quantity be measured n times. Let the measured value be
a1, a2, a3, . . . an. The arithmetic mean of these value is
Usually, am is taken as the true value of the quantity, if the same is unknown
otherwise.

a1 = am – a1
a2 = am – a1
...........
an = am – a2
The absolute errors may be positive in certain cases and negative in certain
other cases.
(2) Mean absolute error—It is the arithmetic mean of the magnitudes of
absolute errors in all the measurements of the quantity. It is represented
by a. Thus

a=
This implies that any measurement of the quantity is likely to lie between

Dimensions And Measurement 7

 (am – ) and (am + ).
(3) Relative error or Fractional error—

= .

(4) Percentage error : Percentage error

1.13 Propagation of Errors

(1) Error in sum of tie quantities : Suppose x = a + b
Let a = absolute error in measurement of a
b = absolute error in measurement of b
x = absolute error in calculation of x i.e. sum of a and b.
The maximum absolute error in x is x = ± ( a + b)
Suppose x = a – b
The maximum absolute error in x is x = ± ( a + b)
(3) Error in product of quantities—Suppose x = a × b

The maximum fractional error in x is

(4) Error in division of quantities—Suppose x =

The maximum fractional error in x is

(5) Error in quantity raised to some power—Suppose x =

The maximum fractional error in x is

The quantity which have maximum power must be measured carefully

because it’s contribution to error is maximum.

UNIT I – UNITS & MEASUREMENT

1. A new unit of length is chosen such that the speed of light in vacuum is
unity. What is the distance between the sun and the earth in terms of the
new unit if light takes 8 min and 20 s to cover this distance.

8 Physics Class XI
 2. If x = a + bt + ct2, where x is in metre and t in seconds, what is the unit
of c ?
3. mN, Nm and nm ?
4. The radius of atom is of the order of 1Aº & radius of Nucleus is of the
order of fermi. How many magnitudes higher is the volume of the atom
as compared to the volume of nucleus ?
5.
6. Name same physical quantities that have same dimension.
7. Name the physical quantities that have dimensional formula [ML–1T–2].
8. Give two examples of dimension less variables.
9.
(i) 0.007 m2 (ii) 2.64 × 1024 kg
(iii) 0.2370 g cm–3 (iv) 0.2300m
(v) 86400 (vi) 86400 m
10. Given relative error in the measurement of length is .02, what is the
percentage error ?
11. A physical quantity P is related to four observables a, b, c and d as
follows :
a3b2
P =
d c
The percentage errors of measurement in a, b, c and d are 1%, 3%, 4%
and 2% respectively. What is the percentage error in the quantity P?
12. A boy recalls the relation for relativistic mass (m) in terms of rest mass
(m0) velocity of particle V, but forgets to put the constant c (velocity
of light). He writes m = correct the equation by putting the
missing ‘c’.
13. Name the technique used in locating.
(a) an under water obstacle
(b) position of an aeroplane in space.
14. Deduce dimensional formulae of—
(i) Boltzmann’s constant
(ii) mechanical equivalent of heat.
15. Give examples of dimensional constants and dimensionless constants.

Dimensions And Measurement 9

 SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
16. The vernier scale of a travelling microscope has 50 divisions which
coincide with 49 main scale divisions. If each main scale division is 0.5
mm. Calculate the minimum inaccuracy in the measurement of distance.
17. If the unit of force is 100N, unit of length is 10m and unit of time is 100s.
What is the unit of Mass in this system of units ?
18.
19. State the principle of homogeneity. Test the dimensional homogeneity of
equations—

(i) s = ut + at2

(ii) Sn = u +

20. In Vander Wall’s gas equation V2 (V–b)

dimensions of a and b.

21. Using dimensions convert (a) 1 newton into dynes (b) 1 erg into joules.

22. Magnitude of force experienced by an object moving with speed v is given

by F = kv2. Find dimensions of k.

23.
Choose the correct formula/formulae

(a) y = a sin (b) y = a sin vt

(c) y=

(d) y =

24. Give limitations of dimensional analysis.

25. For determination of ‘g’ using simple pendulum, measurements of length

and time period are required. Error in the measurement of which quantity
g’ thus obtained. What is done to
minimise this error?

10 Physics Class XI
 SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)
26. Give the name of six Indian Scientists and their discoveries.
27. Name the discoveries made by the following scientists :
(a) Faraday (b) Chadwick
(c) Hubble (d) Maxwell
(e) Newton (f) Bohr.
28. Name the scientific principle on which the following technology is
based.
(i) Steam engine (ii) Laser

29. Describe a method for measuring the molecular size of Oleic acid.
[3 MARKS]
30. Describe the Parallox Method for the determination of the distance of a
nearby star from the earth.
31. Deduce the dimensional formula for the following quantities
(i) Gravitational constant (ii) Young’s modulus

32.
(i) Light year (ii) Parsec
(iii) Astronomical unit (AU)

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

33. Name the four basic forces in nature. Write a brief note of each. Hence
compare their strengths and ranges.
34. Distinguish between the terms precision and accuracy of a measurement.
35. Explain
(i) absolute error (ii) mean absolute error
(iii) relative error (iv) percentage error
(v) random error

Dimensions And Measurement 11

 NUMERICALS

36. Determine the number of light years in one metre.

37. The sides of a rectangle are (10.5 ± 0.2) cm and (5.2 ± 0.1) cm. Calculate
its perimeter with error limits.
38. The mass of a box measured by a grocer’s balance is 2.3 kg. Two gold
pieces 20.15 g and 20.17 g are added to the box.
(i) What is the total mass of the box ?

39. 5.74 g of a substance occupies 1.2 cm3. Express its density to correct

40. If displacement of a body s = (200 ± 5) m and time taken by it t = (20 +

0.2) s
41. If the error in measurement of mass of a body be 3% and in the measurement
of velocity be 2%. What will be maximum possible error in calculation of
kinetic energy.
42. The length of a rod as measured in an experiment was found to be 2.48m,
2.46m, 2.49m, 2.50m and 2.48m. Find the average length, absolute error
and percentage error. Express the result with error limit.
43. A physical quantity is measured as Q = (2.1 ± 0.5) units. Calculate the
percentage error in (1) Q2 (2) 2Q.
44. When the planet Jupiter is at a distance of 824.7 million km from the earth,
its angular diameter is measured to be 35.72 of arc. Calculate diameter
of Jupiter.
45. A laser light beamed at the moon takes 2.56s
at the moon’s surface. What will be the radius of lunar orbit.
46. Convert
(i) 3 ms–2 to km h–2
(ii) G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2 kg–2 to cm3 g–1 s–2
47. A calorie is a unit of heat or energy and it equals 4.2 J where 1J = 1 kg
m2s–2. Suppose we employ a system of units in which unit of mass is kg,
unit of length is m, unit of time s. What will be magnitude of calorie
in terms of this new system.

12 Physics Class XI
48. The escape velocity v of a body depends on–
(i) the acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ of the planet,

the escape velocity.

49. The frequency of vibration of a string depends of on, (i) tension in the
string (ii) mass per unit length of string, (iii) vibrating length of the string.
Establish dimensionally the relation for frequency.
50. One mole of an ideal gas at STP occupies 22.4 L. What is the ratio of
molar volume to atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen? Why is the ratio
so large. Take radius of hydrogen molecule to be 1ºA.
51. Derive an expression for the centripetal force F acting on a particle of
mass m moving with velocity v in a circle of radius r.
52. The error in the measurement of radius of a sphere is 2%. What would be
the error in :
(a) Volume of sphere
(b) Surface area of sphere.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

In the following questions, a statement of Assertion (A) is followed by a

the correct one.

(a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct
explanation for assertion.
(b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct
explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.
(d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.
1. Assertion : The error in the measurement of radius of a sphere is 0.3%.
The permissible error in its surface area is 0.6%.
A r
4 .
A r

2. Assertion : If the units of force and length are doubled, the unit of energy
will become four times.

Dimensions And Measurement 13

 3. Assertion : Parallax method cannot be used for measuring distances of
stars more than 100 light years away.

accurately.
4. Assertion : Distance travelled by a particle in nth second has the dimension
of length.

5. Assertion : Force and pressure cannot be added.

6. Assertion : In the relation f 1 T where symbols have standard

,
2l m
meaning, m represents linear mass density.

7. Assertion : The big G and small g have the same dimensions.

G is a gravitational constant and 'g' is the acceleration due to
gravity.
8. Assertion : In quantum mechanics, angular momentum is measured in
terms of Planck's constant.

9.
three.

10. Assertion : The unit of LC is (second)2, where L is induction and C is the

capacitance.
1
LC and time period (T) is T .
2 LC

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

Q1. The nature of physical quantity is described by its dimension. All the
physical quantities can be expressed in terms of some combination of
seven fundamental units. The dimensions of a physical quantity are thus
the powers to which the base quantities are raised to represent that quantity.

14 Physics Class XI
 If a given physical quantity depends on a th power of mass, bth power
of length, cth power of time etc., then its dimensions are expressed as
[Ma Lb TC].
(i) The dimension of Planck's constant equal to that of
(a) energy (b) momentum
(c) angular momentum (d) power
(ii) If force (F), velocity (v) and time (T) are taken as fundamental units,
then dimension of mass are
(a) [FVT–2] (b) [FV–1T–1]
(c) [FV–1T] (d) [FVT–1]

(a) Pressure and Young's modulus

(c) Heat and work done

(iv) The dimensions of a × b

b x 2 where P is power, x is distance and t is time.
P ,
at
(a) [M–1 L2 T2] (b) [M–1 L0 T2]
(c) [M0 L2 T0] (d) [ML2 T–1]
(v) Find the value of 100 J on a system which has 20 cm, 250 g and half
minute as fundamental units of length, mass and time.
(a) 9 × 10–6 new units (b) 2.16 × 106 new units
(c) 9 × 106 new units (d) 100 new units

Q2. The Vanderwaals equation is

a
P V b RT
v2
Where P is pressure, V is volume, T is absolute temperature of given
sample of a gas, R is called molar gas constant, a and b are Vanderwaal's
constant.

Dimensions And Measurement 15

 Now answer the following
(i) The dimensional formula for b is same as for
(a) V 2 (b) PV 2
(c) RT (d) P
(ii) The dimensional formula for a is same as for
(a) V 2 (b) P
(c) PV 2 (d) RT
ab
(iii) The dimensional formula of is
RT
(a) ML5 T–2 (b) M0 L3 T0
(c) ML–1 T–2 (d) M0 L6 T0
(iv) The dimensional formula for RT is same as for
(a) Energy (b) Force

(v) The dimensional formula for RT is not same as that for

ab b
(a) (b) PV (c) (d) PV
V2 V2

Q3. For the propagation of errors, we have the following conclusions

If a and b are two physical quantities and another physical quantity X is
expressed as
(a) when X = a ± b
then X = ± ( a + b)
where X is error in X

(b) When X = ab, then maximum error is X

X a b
then
X a b

ab
(c) When X
a +b
X a b a+ b
then
X a b a +b

16 Physics Class XI
 (d) When X = am bn

then X a b
m n
X a b
Now answer the following
(i) The maximum possible error in measuring volume of a cube of
side 2.50 cm is (using Vernier Calipers of Vernier constant = 0.01)
(a) ± 0.01 cm3 (b) 0.075 cm3
(c) ± 0.03 cm3 (d) None
(ii) The maximum possible error in find resultant resistances of
parallel combination of two resistance R1
R1
(a) 7 % (b) 10 %
(c) 5 % (d) 2 %
(iii) The percentage error in the measurement of mass and speed are 1%
and 2% respectively. What is the percentage error in Kinetic energy.
(a) 3 % (b) 2.5 %
(c) 5 % (d) 1.5 %
(iv) When copper sphere is heated, maximum percentage change will be
observed in
(a) radius (b) area
(c) volume (d) none of these
(v) The density of a cube is measured by measuring its mass and length
of its sides. If the maximum errors in the measurement of mass
and lengths are 3% and 2% respectively, the maximum error in the
measurement of density would be
(a) 12 % (b) 14 %
(c) 7 % (d) 9 %

Q4. A mathematical calculation can't increase the precision of a physical

product of a group of measurements cannot be greater than minimum

Dimensions And Measurement 17

 Now answer the following
(i) A car runs 1200 m in 22.5 sec. The average speed of car in appropriate

(a) 53.3 m/s (b) 53.33 m/s

(c) 53.333 m/s (d) None of these
(ii) The radius of a uniform wire r = 0.024 cm. Take = 3.142, then

(a) 0.001808 cm2 (b) 0.0018086 cm2

(c) 0.0018 cm2 (d) 18.08 cm2
(iii) The volume of sphere is 2.42 cm3. The volume of 15 spheres taking
into account the significant figures.
(a) 29.0 cm3 (b) 29.04 cm3
(c) 29.1 cm3 (d) 29 cm3
(iv) The length of a rectangular block is 2.5 m, breadth is 1.75 m. The
area of surface of block taking into account of the significant figures.
(a) 4.38 m2 (b) 4.3 m2
(c) 4.4 m2 (d) 4.375 m2

(a) 5 (b) 4
(c) 2 (d) 3

SOLUTIONS
1. Speed of light in vacuum, c = 1 new unit of length s–1
t = 8 min. 20 sec, = 500 s
x = ct = 1 new unit of length s–1 × 500s
x = 500 new unit of length
2. The unit of left hand side is metre so the units of ct2 should also be metre.
Since t2 has unit of s2, so the unit of c is m/s2.
3. mN means milli newton, 1 mN = 10–3 N, Nm means Newton meter, nm
means nano meter.

4.

18 Physics Class XI
 5. 1u = 1.66 × 10–27 kg
6. Work, energy and torque.
7. Stress, pressure, modulus of elasticity.
8. Strain, refractive index.
9. (i)1, (ii) 3, (iii) 4, (iv) 4, (v) 3, (vi) 5 since it comes from a measurement

10. 2%.
11.

So, percentage error

a b 1 c d
= 3 100 2 100 100 100
a b 2 c d

= (3 × 1%) + (2 × 3%) + + (1 × 2%)

= 13%

12. Since quantities of similar nature can only be added or subtracted, v2 cannot
be subtracted from 1 but v2/c2 can be subtracted from 1.

m=

13.

14. (i) Boltzmann Constant :

k= = [M1L2T–2K–1]

(ii) [J] = = [M0L0T0]

15. Dimensional Constants : Gravitational constant, plank’s constant.

Dimensionless Constants : , e.

Dimensions And Measurement 19

16. Minimum inaccuracy = Vernier constant
= 1 MSD – 1 VS.D

= 1 MSD – MSD

= (0.5 mm) = 0.01 mm

17. [F] = [MLT–2]

[M] = = 105kg.

19. (i) Dimension of L.H.S. = [s] = [M0L1T0]

ut] + [at2]
= [LT –1.T] + [M0L1T–2.T2] = [M0L1T0]

The equation to dimensionally homogeneous.

(ii) Sn = Distance travelled in nth sec that is (Sn – Sn–1)

Sn = u × 1 +
[LT–1] = [LT–1] + [LT–2][T]
[LT–1] = [LT–1]

Hence this is dimensionally correct.

20. Since dimensionally similar quantities can only be added

[P] =
[b] = [V] = [L3].

22. [K] =

23. The argument of sine and cosine function must be dimensionless so (a) is
the probable correct formula. Since

(a) y = a sin = [T0] is dimensionless.

(b) y = a sin vt, [vt] = [L] is dimensional so this equation is incorrect.

20 Physics Class XI
 (c) y= is dimensional so this is incorrect.

(d) y = : Though dimensionless does not

have dimensions of displacement so this is also incorrect.

(NUMERICAL)
36. 1 Iy = 9.46 × 1015 m

1m= = 1.057 × 10–16 Iy

37. P = 2 (l + b) ± 2 ( l + b)
= 2(10.5 + 5.2) ± 2(0.2 + 0.1)
= (31.4 ± 0.6) cm.
38. (i) Mass of box = 2.3 kg
Mass of gold pieces = 20.15 + 20.17 = 40.32 g = 0.04032 kg.
Total mass = 2.3 + 0.04032 = 2.34032 kg

be 0.02 g.

39. Density = = 4.783g/cm3

3.

40. Percentage error in measurement of displacement =

Percentage error in measurement of time =

Maximum permissible error = 2.5 + 1 = 3.5%

41. K.E. =

Percentage error in K.E. = 3% + 2 × 2% = 7%

Dimensions And Measurement 21

42. Average length

= = 2.48m
Mean absolute error

= = 0.013m

Percentage error = × 100% = 0.04 × 100%

= 0.40%
Correct length= (2.48 ± 0.01)m
Correct length= (2.48m ± 0.40%)
43. P = Q2

× 100% = 47.6% = 48%

= 0.238

× 100% = 24%

44. = 35.72
1 = 4.85 × 10–6 radian 35.72 = 35.72 × 4.85 ×10–6 rad.
d = DQ = 824.7 × 35.72 × 4.85 × 10–6
= 1.4287 × 105 km
45. t = 2.56 s
t = time taken by laser beam to go to the moon =
distance between earth and moon

=d=c× = 3 × 108 × = 3.84 × 108 m.

22 Physics Class XI
46. (i) 3m s–2 =

= = 3.8880 × 104 km h–2 = 3.9 × 104 km h–2

(ii) G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2 kg–2

= 6.67 × 10–11 (kg m s–2) (m2 kg–2)
= 6.67 × 10–11 kg–1 m3 s–2
= 6.67 × 10–11 (1000 g)–1 (100 cm)3 (s–2)

= 6.67 × 10–11 × × 100 × 100 × 100 g–1 cm3 s–2

= 6.67 × 10–8 g–1 cm3 s–2.

47. n2 = n1

= 4.2

n2 = 4.2 –1 –2 2

48. v ga b v = k ga b, K dimensionless proportionality constant

[v] = [g]a b

[M0L1T–1] = [M0L1T–2]a [M0 L1 T0]b

equating powers

1=a+b

– 1 = – 2a a=

b=1–a=1–
v=k

Dimensions And Measurement 23

49. n Ia Tb mc, [I] = M0L1T0
[T] = M1 L1 T–2 (force)
[M] = M1 L–1 T0
[M0 L0 T–1] = [M0 L1 T0]a [M1 L1 T–2]b [M1 L–1 T0]c
b+c=0
a+b–c=0
–2b = – 1 b=

c=– a=1

n .

50. 1 A0 = 10–10 m
Atomic volume of 1 mole of hydrogen

= Avagadros number × volume of hydrogen molecule

= 6.023 × 1023 × × × (10–10 m)3

= 25.2 × 10–7 m3

Molar volume = 22.4 L = 22.4 × 10–3 m3

= 0.89 × 104 104

This ratio is large because actual size of gas molecule is negligible in

comparison to the inter molecular separation.
51. F ma
vb
rc
F = k mavbrc

[MLT–2] = [M]a [LT–1]b [L]c

[M] [L] [T–2] = [M]a [L]b+c [T]–b

24 Physics Class XI
 Comparing powers of m, L and T
a=1 b+c = 1 –2 = –b
b = –1 b=2
mv 2
F=k
r

4
52. (a) v= R3
3
V R V
3 % 3 2% 6%
V R V

(b) A 4 R2

A R A
2 % 2 2% 4%
A R A

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

A r
1. (c) Assertion : As A = 4 r2, 2 2 2.03 0.6% (True)
A r
A r (False)
4 .
A r

2. (c) Assertion : Energy = force × displacement

When the units of force and length are doubled, the unit of energy
becomes 4 times. (True)

length. (False)
3. (a) Assertion : As distance of star increases, parallax angle decreases,
and great degree of accuracy is required. (True)

a
4. (d) Assertion : As Snth = u + (2n–1), Snth has the dimension of velocity
[LT–1]. (False) 2

Dimensions And Measurement 25

 5.
of 'A'.
6. (b) Assertion : From f 1 T 2 1 T
, f
2l m 2l m

T MLT –2 M mass
or m 2 2 2 –2 L length
4l f LT
Linear mass density. (True)

7. (d) Assertion : lim of G is [M–1L3T–2]

lim of g is [LT–2] (False).

8. (a) Assertion : True.

9. (c) Assertion : Since zeros placed to the left of the number are never

10.
(second)2. (True)
1 1
= (True)
T 2 LC
or T = 2 LC

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. (i) (c) (ii) (c) (iii) (d) (iv) (a) (v) (c)

2. (i) (a) (ii) (c) (iii) (d) (iv) (a) (v) (c)

3. (i) (b) (ii) (a) (iii) (c) (iv) (c) (v) (d)

4. (i) (a) (ii) (c) (iii) (d) (iv) (a) (v) (b)

26 Physics Class XI
 (M.C.Q.) PHYSICAL WORLD & MEASUREMENT
1. Which of the following is not the unit of distance?
(a) Light year (b) Astronomical Unit
(c) Parsec (d) Millisecond
2. The dimensional formula for in the relation y = A Sin t is
(a) [M° L° T] (b) [M° L° T–1]
(c) [ML° T°] (d) [M° L–1 T–1]
3. Dimensional formula for curie is
(a) [M° L T–1] (b) [M° L–1 T°]
(c) [M° L° T–1] (d) [M–1 L° T°]
4. Which of the following pairs of physical quantities does not have same
dimensional formula.
(a) Work and torque
(b) Angular momentum and Planck's constant
(c) Tension and surface tension
(d) Impulse and linear momentum
5. If momentum (p), Area (A) and time (T) are takes as fundamental quantities,
then energy has the dimensional formula :
(a) [ p A½ T–1 ] (b) [ p A–½ T1 ]
(c) [ p2 A T ] (d) [ p A–1 T ]
6. Out of 4.0 and 4.00, which is more accurate?
(a) 4.0 (b) 4.00
(c) Both are equally accurate (d) Nothing can be said
7. The speed (v) of sound in a gas is given by v = k Px y

Where K is dimensionless constant, P is pressure, and is the density,

then
(a) x = ½, y = ½ (b) x = –½, y = –½
(c) x = ½, y = –½ (d) x = –½, y = ½
8. If percentage errors in the measurement of mass and volume of an object
are 2% and 3% respectively, then the percentage error in the measurement
of the density of the object is :
(a) 1% (b) 0.66%
(c) 5% (d) 6%

Dimensions And Measurement 27

9. Given that
dx x-a
= a n sin -1
2ax-x 2 a
Where a is a constant. Using dimensional analysis the value of n is
(a) 1 (b) –1
(c) 0 (d) None of the above
a
10. In the standard equation Snth = u + (2n-1) what dimensions do you
2
view for Snth
(a) [ M° L1 T°] (b) [ M° L–1 T]
(c) [ M° L T–1 ] (d) [ M° L° T1 ]
11. Given force = what are dimensions of ?
density +
(a) ML–2 T , ML–1/3
–2 (b) M2 L4 T–2, M1/3 L–1
(c) M2 L–2 T–2, M1/3 L–1 (d) M2 L–2 T–2, M L–3
12. The dimensions of intensity are
(a) [ L° M T–3 ] (b) [ L1 M2 T–2 ]
(c) [ L2 M T–2 ] (d) [ L2 M2 T–3 ]
13. The dimensions of light year is
(a) T (b) L T–1
(c) L (d) T–1
14. The time dependence of a physical quantity P is given by P = Po exp.(– t2),
where is a constant and t is time, The constant is
(a) dimensionless (b) has dimensions T–2
(c) has dimensions of P (d) has dimensions T2

operation may be physically meaningful.

(a) A /B (b) A+B
(c) A–B (d) A=B
16. Which one of the following pair of quantities has the same dimension?
(a) force and work done (b) momentum and impulse
(c) pressure and force (d) surface tension an force

28 Physics Class XI
17. A cube has a side of length 1.2×10–2 m. Calculate its volume.
(a) 1.7 ×10–6 m3 (b) 1.73 ×10–6 m3
(c) 1.0 ×10–6 m3 (d) 1.732 ×10–6 m3
a
18. The equation of state for a real gas is given by P + (v – b) = RT
v2
the dimensions of constant a are
(a) [ M L5 T–2 ] (b) [ M–1 L5 T2 ]
(c) [ M L–5 T–1 ] (d) [ M L5 T–1 ]

(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4
20. Which of the following measurements is most precise?
(a) 5.00 m (b) 5.00 km
(c) 5.00 cm (d) 5.00 mm

Answer Key :
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (b)
7. (c) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (a)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (b) 17. (a) 18. (a)
19. (d) 20. (d)

HINTS AND EXPLANATIONS :

2. t = Angle = dimensionless
1
so dimension of = = [ M° L° T–1 ]
t
3. curie = unit of radioactivity
dN Number
= =
dt time
= [ T–1] or [M° L° T–1 ]

Dimensions And Measurement 29

 Tension = Force = [MLT–2]
Force
Surface tension = = [M T –2 ]
length
5. Energy = Force × Length
change in momentum
× area [p A½ A –1 ]
time

7. v = k Px y

[M° L T–1] = [M L–1 T–2]x [M L–3]y

0 = x + y , 1 = –x –3y , –1 = –2x
y = –x x=½
=–½
m
8. 100 100 100 2% 3% 5%
m
L
9. = an
L
No dimension 1 = an Possible for n = 0
11. Dimension of 3
= dimension of density
Solve, [ M 1/3 L 1 ]

Force =
density
Force density
[M L T 2 M L 3 ]
[M 2 L 2 T 2 ]

energy
12. Intensity =
area time

M L2 T 2
[M T 3 ] [M L T 3 ]
L2 T

30 Physics Class XI
13. Light year = distance = L
1
14. t2 = constant [T 2 ]
t2

16. Momentum and Impulse have some dimension = [M L T–1]

17. Volume = (side)3 (1.2 10 2 )3 1.728 10 6

1.7 10 6 m 3

2 1 2 6 5 2
18. Dimension of a = PV [M L T L ] [M L T ]

20. 5.00 mm is most precise because it have least count.

*****

Dimensions And Measurement 31

2.1 Motion in One Dimension : Position
Position of any point is completely expressed by two factors : Its distance
from the observer and its direction with respect to observer.
That is why position is characterised by a vector known as position vector.
Let point P is in a xy plane and its coordinates are (x, y). Then position
vector of point will be and if the point P is in a space and
its coordinates are (x, y, z) then position vector can be expressed as

2.2 Rest and Motion

If a body does not change its position as time passes with respect to frame
of reference, it is said to be at rest.
And if a body changes its position as time passes with respect to frame
of reference, it is said to be in motion.
Frame of Reference : It is a system to which a seet of coordinates are
attached and with reference to which observer describes any event.
Rest and motion are relative terms. It depends upon the frame of references.
2.3 Types of Motion
One dimensional Two dimensional Three dimensional
Motion of a body in a straight Motion of body in a plane Motion of body in a space
line is called one dimensional is called two dimensional is called three dimensional
motion. motion. motion.
When only one coordinate of When two coordinates When all three coordinates
the position of a body changes of the position of a body of the position of a body
with time then it is said to be changes with time then it changes with time then it
moving one dimensionally. is said to be moving two is said to be moving three
dimensionally. dimensionally.

32 Physics Class XI
e.g., Motion of car on a e.g., Motion of car on a e.g.

Motion of freely falling body. Motion of billiards ball.

2.4 Distance and Displacement

(1) Distance : It is the actual path length covered by a moving particle in a
given interval of time.
(i) Its a scalar quantity.
(ii) Dimension : [M0 L1 T0]
(iii) Unit : metre (S. I.)
(2) Displacement : Displacement is the change in position vector i.e., A

(i) Displacement is a vector quantity

(ii) Dimension : [M0 L1 T0]
(iii) Unit : metre (S. I.)
(iv) If are the displacements of a body then the total (net)
displacement is the vector sum of the individuals.

(3) Comparison between distance and displacement :

(i) Distance > Displacement.
(ii) For a moving particle distance can never be negative or zero while
displacement can be i.e., Distance > 0 but Displacement > = or < 0.
(iii) For motion between two points displacement is single valued while
distance depends on actual path and so can have many values.
(iv) For a moving particle distance can never decrease with time while
displacement can. Decrease in displacement with time means body
is moving towards the initial position.
(v) In general magnitude of displacement is not equal to distance.
However, it can be so if the motion is along a straight line without
change in direction.

Kinematic 33
2.5 Speed and Velocity
(1) Speed : Rate of distance covered with time is called speed.
(i) It is a scalar quantity having symbol v.
(ii) Dimension : [M0L1T–1]
(iii) Unit : metre/second (S.I.), cm/second (C. G. S.)
(iv) Types of speed :
(a) Uniform speed : When a particle covers equal distances in equal
intervals of time, (no matter how small the intervals are) then it
is said to be moving with uniform speed.
(b) Non-uniform (variable) speed : In non-uniform speed particle
covers unequal distances in equal intervals of time.
(c) Average speed : The average speed of a particle for a given

the time taken.

Average speed = ; Vav =

Time average speed :

uniform speed 1, 2, 3 t1, t2,
t3, ... etc. respectively, its average speed over the total time of
journey is given as

Vav = =

=
Special case : When particle moves with speed v1 upto half time
of its total motion and in rest time it is moving with speed v2 then
V1 V2
Vav = .
2
Distance averaged speed :
distances d1, d2, d3 t1, t2, t3, ....
with speeds v1, v2, v3, .... respectively then the speed of particle
averaged over the total distance can be given as

Vav = =

34 Physics Class XI
 =

(d) Instantaneous speed : It is the speed of a particle at particular

instant. When we say ‘‘speed’’, it usually means instantaneous
speed.

interval (i.e. t 0). Thus

Instantaneous speed v = =

(2) Velocity : Rate of change of position i.e., rate of displacement with time
is called velocity.
(i) It is a vector quantity having symbol v.
(ii) Dimension : [M0 L1T–1]
(iii) Unit : metre/second (S. I.), cm/second (C. G. S.)
(iv) Types
(a) Uniform velocity : A particle is said to have uniform velocity,
if magnitudes as well as direction of its velocity remains same
and this is possible only when the particles moves in same
straight line without reversing its direction.
(b) Non-uniform velocity : A particle is said to have non-uniform
velocity, if either of magnitude or direction of velocity changes
(or both changes).
(c) Average velocity :
time taken by the body

Average velocity = =

(d) Instantaneous velocity :

rate of change of position vector of particles with time at a certain
instant of time.

Instantaneous velocity = =

Kinematic 35
 (v) Comparison between instantaneous speed and instantaneous velocity
(a) Instantaneous velocity is always tangential to the path followed
by the particle.
(b) A particle may have constant instantaneous speed but variable
instantaneous velocity.
(c) The magnitude of instantaneous velocity is equal to the
instantaneous speed.
(d) If a particle is moving with constant velocity then its average
velocity and instantaneous velocity are always equal.
(e) If displacement is given as a function of time, then time derivative
of displacement will give velocity.
(vi) Comparison between average speed and average velocity
(a) Average speed is scalar while average velocity is a vector both
having same units (m/s) and dimensions [LT–1].
(b) Average speed or velocity depends on time interval over which it

(c) For a given time interval average velocity is single valued while
average speed can have many values depending on path followed.

(d) If after motion body comes back to its initial position then =
but vav > s > 0).
(e) For a moving body average speed can never be negative
or zero (unless t ) while average velocity can be i.e.,

> 0 while = or < 0.

2.6 Acceleration
The time rate of change of velocity of an object is called acceleration of
the object.
(1) It is a vector quantity. It’s direction is same as that of change in velocity
(not of the velocity)
(2) There are three possible ways by which change in velocity may occur

36 Physics Class XI
When only direction When only magnitude When both magnitude and
of velocity changes of velocity changes direction of velocity changes
Acceleration Acceleration parallel or Acceleration has two components
perpendicular to velocity anti-parallel to velocity one is perpendicular to velocity
and another parallel or antiparallel
to velocity

e.g. Uniform circular e.g. Motion under e.g. Projectile motion

motion gravity

(3) Dimension : [M0 L1 T–2]

(4) Unit : metre/second2 (S. I.); cm/second2 (C. G. S.)
(5) Types of acceleration :
(i) Uniform acceleration : A body is said to have uniform acceleration
if magnitude and direction of the acceleration remains constant during
particle motion.
If a particle is moving with uniform acceleration, this does not
necessarily imply that particles is moving in straight line, e.g.,
Projectile motion.
(ii) Non-uniform acceleration : A body is said to have non-uniform
acceleration, if magnitude or direction or both, change during motion.

(iii) Average acceleration : = =

The direction of average acceleration vector is the direction of the

change in velocity vector as =

(iv) Instantaneous acceleration = = =

(v) For a moving body there is no relation between the direction of
instantaneous velocity and direction of acceleration.
e.g.(a) In uniform circular motion = 90° always (b) in a projectile
motion is variable for every point of trajectory.

(vi) = =

Kinematic 37
 (vii) If velocity is given as a function of position, then by chain rule

a= = =

(viii) If a particle is accelerated for a time t1 by acceleration

a1 and for time t2 by acceleration a2 then average acceleration is
aav =

(ix) Acceleration can be positive, zero or negative. Positive acceleration

means velocity increasing with time, zero acceleration means velocity
is uniform constant while negative acceleration (retardation) means
velocity is decreasing with time.
(x) For motion of a body under gravity, acceleration will be equal to
‘g’,where g is the acceleration due to gravity. Its normal value is 9.8
m/s2 or 980 cm/s2 or 32 feet/s2.

2.7 Position Time Graph

Various position-time graphs and their interpretation

= 0° so =0
i.e., line parallel to time axis represents that the
particle is at rest.

= 90° so =
i.e., line perpendicular to time axis represents that
particle is changing its position but time does not

velocity.
Practically this is not possible.

= constant so = constant, a = 0
i.e., line with constant slope represents uniform
velocity of the particle.

38 Physics Class XI
 is increasing so v is increasing, a is positive.
Position i.e., line bending towards position axis represents
increasing velocity of particle. It means the particle
possesses acceleration.

is decreasing so v is decreasing, a is negative.

i.e., line bending towards time axis represents
Position

decreasing velocity of the particle. It means the

particle possesses retardation.

constant but > 90° so v will be constant but

negative.
i.e., line with negative slope represent that particle
Position

returns towards the point of reference, (negative

displacement).

that velocity of the body changes after certain

interval of time.
Position

This graph shows that at one instant the particle has

two positions. Which is not possible.
x

The graph shows that particle coming towards origin

initially and after that it is moving away from origin.
x

Kinematic 39
Note :
If the graph is plotted between distance and time then it is always an
increasing curve and it never comes back towards origin because distance.
For two particles having displacement time graph with slope 1 and 2

possesses velocities v1 and v2 respectively then =

2.8 Velocity Time Graph
The graph is plotted by taking time t along x axis and velocity of the
particle on y axis.
Distance and displacement : The area covered between the velocity time
graph and time axis gives the displacement and distance travelled by the
body for a given time interval.

i.e. s=

i.e., r =
Acceleration : It is clear that slope of velocity-time graph represents the
acceleration of the particle.
Various position-time graphs and their interpretation
= 0, a = 0, v = constant
i.e., line parallel to time axis represents that the
particle is moving with constant velocity.

= 90° , a = , v = increasing
i.e., line perpendicular to time axis represents that
particle is increasing its velocity but time does not

acceleration. Practically it is not possible.

= constant, so a = constant and v is increasing

uniformly with time
i.e., line with constant slope represents uniform
acceleration of the particle.

40 Physics Class XI
 is increasing so acceleration increasing
i.e., line bending towards velocity axis represents
the increasing acceleration in the body.

is decreasing so acceleration decreasing




i.e., line bending towards time axis represents the

decreasing acceleration in the body.
    
 

 Positive constant acceleration because is constant

and < 90° but initial velocity of the particle is
 negative.


Positive constant acceleration because is constant
and < 90° but initial velocity of the particle is
 

positive.

Negative constant acceleration because is constant

and > 90° but initial velocity of the particle is
positive


Negative constant acceleration because is constant


and > 90° but initial velocity of the particle is zero.

   


Negative constant acceleration because is constant

and > 90° but initial velocity of the particle is
negative.

Kinematic 41
2.9 Equations of Kinematics
These are the various relations between u, v, a, t and s for the moving
particle where the notations are used as :
u = Initial velocity of the particle at time t = 0 sec
v = Final velocity at time t sec
a = Acceleration of the particle
s = Distance travelled in time t sec
sn = Distance travelled by the body in nth sec
(1) When particle moves with constant acceleration
(i) Acceleration is said to be constant when both the magnitude and
direction of acceleration remain constant.
(ii) There will be one dimensional motion if initial velocity and acceleration
are parallel or anti-parallel to each other.
(iii) Equations of motion in scalar Equation of motion in vector
form form

v = u + at

s=

v2 = v2 + 2 as

s=

sn =
(2) Important points for uniformly accelerated motion
(i) If a body starts from rest and moves with uniform acceleration then
distance covered by the body in t sec is proportional to t2 (i.e., s t2).
So the ratio of distance covered in 1 sec, 2 sec and 3 sec is
12 : 22 : 32 or 1 : 4 : 9.
(ii) If a body starts from rest and moves with uniform acceleration then
distance covered by the body in nth sec is proportional to (2n – 1)
(i.e. sn (2n –1 ).

42 Physics Class XI
 So the ratio of distance covered in I sec, II sec and III sec is
I : 3 : 5.
(iii) A body moving with a velocity u is stopped by application of brakes
after covering a distance s. If the same body moves with velocity
nu and same braking force is applied on it then it will come to rest
after covering a distance of n2 s.

2.10 Motion of Body Under Gravity (Free Fall)

Acceleration produced in the body by the force of gravity, is called
acceleration due to gravity. It is represented by the symbol g.
In the absence of air resistance, it is found that all bodies fall with the same
acceleration near the surface of the earth. This motion of a body falling
towards the earth from a small altitude (h << R) is called free fall.
An ideal one-dimensional motion under gravity in which air resistance and
the small changes in acceleration with height are neglected.

PROJECTILE MOTION
2.11 Introduction
If the force acting on a particle is oblique with initial velocity then the
motion of particle is called projectile motion.

2.12 Projectile

by any fuel is called projectile.

2.13 Assumptions of Projectile Motion

(1) There is no resistance due to air.

(4) For all points of the trajectory, the acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ is constant
in magnitude and direction.

2.14 Principles of Physical Independence of Motions

(1) The motion of a projectile is a two-dimensional motion. So, it can be
discussed in two parts. Horizontal motion and vertical motion. These two
motions take place independent of each other.This is called the principle

Kinematic 43
 of physical independence of motions.
(2) The velocity of the particle can be resolved into two mutually perpendicular
components. Horizontal component and vertical component.

(4) The horizontal motion is a uniform motion and the vertical motion is a
uniformly accelerated retarded motion.

2.15 Types of Projectile Motion

(1) Oblique projectile motion (2) Horizontal projectile motion (3) Projectile
motion on an inclined plane

2. 16 Oblique Projectile
In projectile motion, horizontal component of velocity (u cos ),
acceleration (g) and mechanical energy remains constant while, speed,
velocity, vertical component of velocity (u sin ), momentum kinetic
energy and potential energy all changes. Velocity, and KE are maximum at
the point of projection while minimum (but not zero) at highest point.

(1) Equation of trajectory : A projectile thrown with velocity u at an angle

with the horizontal. The velocity u can be resolved into two rectangular
components u cos component along X-axis and u sin component along
Y-axis.

y =x tan
Note :
Equation of oblique projectile also can be written as

y=
(where R = horizonal range)

(2) Displacement of projectile : Let the particle acquires a position

44 Physics Class XI
 P having the coordinates (x, y) just after time t from the instant of projection.
The corresponding position vector of the particle at time t is shown in

= ...(i)
The horizontal distance covered during time t given as
x =vx t x = u cor t ...(ii)
The vertical velocity of the paticle at time t is given as

y =u sin t– gt2 ...(iii)

and = tan–1 (y/x)

Note :
The angle of elevation of the highest point of the projectile and the
angle of projection are related to each other as tan = tan
(3) Instantaneous velocity v : In projectile motion, vertical component of
velocity changes but horizontal component of velocity remains always
constant.
Let vi be the instantaneous velocity of projectile at time t direction of this
velocity is along the tangent to the trajectory at point P.

= vi =

Direction of instantaneous velocity tan a = =

The total time taken by the projectile to go up and come

For vertical upward motion

Kinematic 45
 0 = u sin – gt t = (u sin /g)

t=
(8) Horizontal range : It is the horizontal distance travelled by a body during

R = u cos × T = u cos × (2u sin /g) =

R=

If angle of projection is changed from to = (90 – ) then range remains

unchanged. These angles are called complementary angle of projection.

(iv) Maximum range : For range to be maximum =0

= 0, a projectile will have maximum range when it is projected at an angle

of 45° to the horizontal and the maximum range will be (u2/g).
When the range is maximum, the height H reached by the projectile

H= = = =

(v) Relation between horizontal range and maximum height :

R= 4H cot
If R = 4H cot = tan–1 (1) or = 45°.
(9) Maximum height : It is the maximum height from the point of projection,
a projectile can reach.
So, by using v2 = u2 + 2as
0 = (u sin )2 – 2gH

H=

(i) Hmax = (when sin2 = max = 1 i.e., = 90°)

i.e., for maximum height body should be projected vertically upward.
(10) Motion of a projectile as observed from another projectile is a straight line.

2. 17 Horizontal Projectile
A body be projected horizontally from a certain height ‘y’ vertically above

46 Physics Class XI
 the ground with initial velocity u. If friction is considered to be absent then

The horizontal velocity therefore remains constant.

If a body is projected horizontally from a height h with
velocity u and time taken by the body to reach the ground is T, then

T=
(5) Horizontal range : Let R is the horizontal distance travelled by the body

R=u
(6) If projectiles A and B are project
velocity from same height and third particle C is dropped from same point
then
(i) All three particles will take equal time to reach the ground.

same vertical component of velocity.

(iii) The trajectory of projectiles A and B will be straight line w.r.t.
particle C.
(7)
direction then

of their initial direction of velocities.

(ii) Time would be least for particles which was thrown vertically
downward.
(iii) Time would be maximum for particle A which was thrown vertically
upward.
CIRCULAR MOTION
Circular motion is another example of motion in two dimensions. To
create circular motion in a body it must be given some initial velocity and
a force must then act on the body which is always directed at right angles
to instantaneous velocity.

and non-uniform circular motion.

Kinematic 47
2. 18 Variables of Circular Motion
(1) Displacement and distance : When particle moves in a circular path
describing an angle during time t
position A to the position B, we see that the magnitude of the position
vector (that is equal to the radius of the circle) remains constant, i.e.,
= r and the direction of the position vector changes from time
to time.
(i) Displacement : The change of position vector or the displacement
of the particle from position A to position B is given by referring the

r= 2r sin
(ii) Distance : The distance covered by the particle during the time t is
given as d = length of the arc AB

(2) Angular displacement ( ) : The angle turned by a body moving on a

circle from some reference line is called angular displacement.

48 Physics Class XI
 (i) Dimension = [M0L0T0] (as = arc/radius).

fraction or multiple of revolution.

(iii) 2 rad = 360° = 1 Revolution
(iv) Angular displacement is a axial vector quantity. Its direction depends
upon the sense of rotation of the object can be given by Right Hand

represents the sense of rotation of the object, then the thumb, held

of angular displacement vector.

(v) Relation between linear displacement and angular displacement

= or s = r
(3) Angular velocity ( ) : Angular velocity of an object in circular motion is

(i) Angular velocity = = =

=
(ii) Dimension : [M0 L0 T–1]
(iii) Units : Radians per second (rad. s–1) or Degree per second.
(iv) Angular velocity is an axial vector. Its direction is the same as that
of

(v) Relation between angular velocity and linear velocity .

(vi) For uniform circular motion co remains constant where as for
non-uniform motion varies with respect to time.
(4) Change in velocity : We want to know the magnitude and direction of the
change in velocity of the particle which is performing uniform circular
motion as it moves from A to B during time t
change in velocity vector is given as

v =2v sin
Relation between linear velocity and angular velocity. In vector
form

Kinematic 49
 .
(5) Time period (T) :
taken by the object to complete one revolution on its circular path.
(6) Frequency (n) :
of revolutions completed by the object on its circular path in a unit time.
(i) Units : s–1 or hertz (Hz).
(ii) Dimension : [M0L0T–1]
Note :
Relation between time period and frequency :
T = 1/n
Relation between angular velocity, frequency and time period :

= =2 n
(7) Angular acceleration ( ) : Angular acceleration of an object in circular

(i) = = =
(ii) Units : rad s–2
(iii) Dimension : [M0 L0 T–2]
(iv) Relation between linear acceleration and angular acceleration

(v) For uniform circular motion since is constant so = = 0.

(vi) For non-uniform circular motion 0.

2. 19 Centripetal Acceleration
(1) Acceleration acting on the object undergoing uniform circular motion is
called centripetal acceleration.
(2) It always acts on the object along the radius towards the centre of the
circular path.

(3) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration = = 2r = 4 n2 r = .

50 Physics Class XI
(4) Direction of centripetal acceleration : It is always the same as that
of

2. 20 Centripetal Force
According t
a straight line with uniform velocity, no force is required to maintain
this velocity. But when a body moves along a circular path with uniform
speed, its direction changes continuously i.e., velocity keeps on changing
on account of a change in direction. According to Newton’s second law of
motion, a change in the direction of motion of the body can take place only
if some external force acts on the body.

Due to inertia, at every point of the circular path; the body tends to move

body has directional inertia, a velocity cannot change by itself and as such
we have to apply a force. But this force should be such that it changes the
direction of velocity and not its magnitude. This is possible only if the
force acts perpendicular to the direction of velocity. Because the velocity
is along the tangent, this force must be along the radius (because the
radius of a circle at any point is perpendicular to the tangent at that point).
Further, as this force is to move the body in a circular path, it must acts
towards the centre. The centre-seeking force is called the centripetal force.
Hence, centripetal force is that force which is required to move a body in
a circular path with uniform speed. The force acts on the body along the
radius and towards centre.
(1) Formulae for centripetal forced :

F= =m 2r = m4 2 n2 r =
(2)

Kinematic 51
 Situation Centripetal Force

A particle tied to a string and whirled Tension in the string.

in a horizontal circle.
Vehicle taking a turn on a level road. Frictional force exerted by the road on the
tyres.
A vehicle on a speed breaker. Weight of the body or a component of
weight.
Revolution of earth around the sun. Gravitational force exerted by the sun.
Electron revolving around the nucleus Coulomb attraction exerted by the protons
in an atom. in the nucleus.
A charged particle describing a Magnetic force exerted by the agent that

2. 21 Centrifugal Force

reference.

2.22 Work done by Centripetal Force

The work done by centripetal force is always zero as it is perpendicular to
velocity and hence instantaneous displacement.
Example :
(i) When an electron revolve around the nucleus in hydrogen atom in a
particular orbit, it neither absorb nor emit any energy means its energy
remains constant.
(ii) When a satellite established once in a orbit around the earth and it starts
revolving with particular speed, then no fuel is required for its circular
motion.

2. 23 Skidding of Vehicle on a Level Road

When a vehicle turns on a circular path it requires centripetal force. If
friction provides this centripetal force then vehicle can move in circular
path safely if Friction force > Required centripetal force

mg >

52 Physics Class XI
 vsafe <
This is the maximum speed by which vehicle can turn in a circular path of
radius r .

2. 24 Skidding of Object on a Rotating Platform

On a rotating platform, to avoid the skidding of an object (mass m) placed
at a distance r from axis of rotation, the centripetal force should be provided
by force of friction.Centripetal force = Force of friction
m 2r = mg

max =

Hence maximum angular velocity of rotation of the platform is

so that object will not skid on it.

2.25 Bending of a Cyclist

A cyclist provides himself the necessary centripetal force by leaning
inward on a horizontal track, while going round a curve. Consider a cyclist
of weight mg taking a turn of radius r wih velocity v. In order to provide
the necessary centripetal force, the cyclist leans through angle inwards

R sin = ...(i)
and R cos = mg ....(ii)

Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we have

tan = ...(iii)
Note :
For the same reasons, an ice skater or an aeroplane has to bend inwards,
while taking a turn.

Kinematic 53
2.26 Banking of a Road
For getting a centripetal force cyclist bend towards the centre of circular
path but it is not possible in case of four wheelers.
Therefore, outer bed of the road is raised so that a vehicle moving on it
gets automatically inclined towards the centre.

tan = ...(iii)
If I = width of the road, h = height of the outer edge from the ground level
then from the

tan = = [As v = r ] ...(iv)

If l = width of the road, h = height of the outer edge from the ground level

tan = = , [since is very small] .... (v)

Maximum safe speed on a banked frictional road

v=

KINEMATICS (1 Mark)
1. Under what condition is the average velocity equal the instantaneous
velocity ?
2. Draw Position time graph of two objects, A & B moving along a straight
line, when their relative velocity is zero.

54 Physics Class XI
 3. Suggest a situation in which an object is accelerated and have constant
speed.
4.
velocity. Maximum heights attained by them are h1 and h2 respectively
what is h1/h2 ?
5. A car moving with velocity of 50 kmh–1 on a straight road is ahead of a
jeep moving with velocity 75 kmh–1 . How would the relative velocity be
altered if jeep is ahead of car ?
6. Which of the two-linear velocity or the linear acceleration gives the
direction of motion of a body ?
7. Will the displacement of a particle change on changing the position of
origin of the coordinate system ?
8. If the instantaneous velocity of a particle is zero, will its instantaneous
acceleration be necessarily zero ?
9.
what is its Kinetic energy, at the highest point ?
10. Write an example of zero vector.
11. State the essential condition for the addition of vectors.
12. When is the magnitude of equal to the magnitude of ?
13. What is the maximum number of component into which a vector can be
resolved ?
14. A body projected horizontally moves with the same horizontal velocity
although it moves under gravity. Why ?
15. What is the angle between velocity and acceleration at the highest point of
a projectile motion ?
16. When does (i) height attained by a projectile maximum ? (ii) horizontal
range is maximum ?
17. What is the angle between velocity vector and acceleration vector in
uniform circular motion ?

Kinematic 55
18. A particle is in clockwise uniform circular motion the direction of
its acceleration is radially inward. If sense of rotation or particle is
anticlockwise then what is the direction of its acceleration ?
19. A train is moving on a straight track with acceleration a. A passenger drops
a stone. What is the acceleration of stone with respect to passenger ?
20. What is the average value of acceleration vector in uniform circular motion
over one cycle ?
21. Does a vector quantity depends upon frame of reference chosen ?
22. What is the angular velocity of the hour hand of a clock ?
23. What is the source of centripetal acceleration for earth to go round the
sun ?

24. What is the unit vector perpendicular to the plane of vectors and ? If

and
of and .

25. What is the angle between and ?

2 Marks
26. What are positive and negative acceleration in straight line motion ?
27. Can a body have zero velocity and still be accelerating ? If yes gives any
situation.
28. The displacement of a body is proportional to t3, where t is time elapsed.
What is the nature of acceleration -time graph of the body ?
29. Suggest a suitable physical situation for the following graph.

30. An object is in uniform motion along a straight line, what will be position
time graph for the motion of object, if

(i) x0 = positive, v = negative is constant.

56 Physics Class XI
 (ii) both x0 and v are negative | v | is constant.

(iii) x0 = negative, v = positive is constant.

(iv) both x0 and v are positive is constant.

where x0 is position at t = 0.

31. A cyclist starts from centre O of a circular park of radius 1 km and moves
along the path OPRQO as shown. If he maintains constant speed of
10 ms–1. What is his acceleration at point R in magnitude & direction ?

32.
velocity is doubled keeping angle of projection same ?
33. The greatest height to which a man can throw a stone is h. What will be the
greatest distance upto which he can throw the stone ?
34. A person sitting in a train moving at constant velocity throws a ball vertically
upwards. How will the ball appear to move to an observer.
(i) Sitting inside the train
(ii) Standing outside the train
35. A gunman always keep his gun slightly tilted above the line of sight while
shooting. Why ?
36. Is the acceleration of a particle in circular motion not always towards the
centre. Explain.

3 Marks
37. Draw (a) acceleration - time (b) velocity - time (c) Position - time graphs
representing motion of an object under free fall. Neglect air resistance.
38.
time graph from it.

Kinematic 57
39. For an object projected upward with a velocity v0 , which comes back to the
same point after some time, draw
(i) Acceleration-time graph
(ii) Position-time graph
(iii) Velocity time graph
40. The acceleration of a particle in ms–2 is given by a = 3t2 + 2t + 2, where
time t is in second.
If the particle starts with a velocity v = 2 ms–1 at t
at the end of 2 s.
41. At what angle do the two forces (P + Q) and (P – Q) act so that the resultant
is
42. Establish the following vector inequalities :

(i)

(ii)
43. A body is projected at an angle with the horizontal. Derive an expression
for its horizontal range. Show that there are two angles 1 and 2 projections
for the same horizontal range, such that 1 + 2 = 90°.
44. Prove that the maximum horizontal range is four times the maximum

maximum range.
45. Show that there are two values of time for which a projectile is at the same
height. Also show that the sum of these two times is equal to the time of

46. A car moving along a straight highway with speed of 126 km h–1 is brought
to a stop within a distance of 200 m. What is the retardation of the car
(assumed uniform) and how long does it take for the car to stop ?

58 Physics Class XI
 5 Marks
47. Derive the following equations of motion for an object moving with
constant acceleration along a straight line using graphical method and
calculas method
(i) velocity time relation (v = u + at)

(ii) Position time relation (s = ut +

(iii) velocity-displacement relation (v2 = u2 + 2as)
where symbols have usual meanings.
48. u. Show that its trajectory
is a parabola. Also obtain expression for

(ii) horizontal range

(iii) velocity at any instant.
49.
acceleration of a particle moving with constant speed v along a circular
path of radius r.
NUMERICALS
50. The V-t graphs of two objects make angle 30° and 60° with the time axis.
Find the ratio of their accelerations.
51. When the angle between two vectors of equal magnitudes is 2 /3, prove
that the magnitude of the resultant is equal to either.

52. If and

magnitude as and parallel to .

53. (a) If and are unit vectors along x & y axis respectively then what is
magnitude and direction of and ?

(b) Find the components of vector along the directors of

vectors and .

Kinematic 59
54. What is the vector sum of n coplanar forces, each of magnitude F, if each
force makes an angle of with the preceding force ?
55. A car is moving along x
seconds and return from P to Q in 6 second. What are the average velocity
and average speed of the car in going from
(i) O to P
(ii) from O to P and back to Q

56.
of 30 kmh–1 . How fast must the bus travel the next 30 km so as to have
average speed of 40 kmh–1 for the entire trip ?
57. The displacement x of a particle varies with time as x = 4t2 – 15t + 25. Find
the position, velocity and acceleration of the particle at t = 0.
58. A driver take 0.20 second to apply the breaks (reaction time). If he is driving
car at a speed of 54 kmh–1 and the breaks cause a deceleration of 6.0 ms–2.
Find the distance travelled by car after he sees the need to put the breaks.
59. From the top of a tower 100 m in height a ball is dropped and at the same
time another ball is projected vertically upwards from the ground with a
velocity of 25 m/s. Find when and where the two balls will meet ? (g = 9.8
m/s)
60. A ball thrown vertically upwards with a speed of 19.6 ms–1 from the
top of a tower returns to the earth in 6s. Find the height of the tower.
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
61. Two town A and B are connected by a regular bus service with a bus leaving
in either direction every T min. A man cycling with a speed of 20 kmh–1
in the direction A to B notices that a bus goes past him every 18 min in the
direction of his motion, and every 6 min in the opposite direction.
What is the period T of the bus service and with what speed do the busses
ply of the road ?
62. A motorboat is racing towards north at 25 kmh–1 and the water current
in that region is 10 kmh–1 in the direction of 60° east of south. Find the
resultant velocity of the boat.
63.
subtended at a ground observation point by the aircraft position 10 second
apart is 30°, what is the speed of the aircraft ?

60 Physics Class XI
64. A boat is moving with a velocity (3iˆ + 4j)
ˆ with respect to ground. The

with respect to ground.

What is the relative velocity of boat with respect to river ?
65. A hiker stands on the edge of a cleft 490 m above the ground and throws
a stone horizontally with an initial speed of 15 ms–1. Neglecting air

speed with which it hits the ground. (g = 9.8 ms–2)

66.
away. By adjusting the angle of projection, can one hope to hit the target

resistance.
67. A stone tied to the end of a string 80 cm long is whirled in a horizontal
circle with a constant speed. If the stone makes 14 revolutions in 25
seconds, what is the magnitude and direction of acceleration of the stone ?
68. A cyclist is riding with a speed of 27 kmh–1 . As he approaches a circular
turn on the road of radius 30 m, he applies brakes and reduces his speed at
the constant rate 0.5 ms–2. What is the magnitude and direction of the net
acceleration of the cyclist on the circular turn ?
69. If the magnitude of two vectors are 3 and 4 and their scalar product is 6,
.

70. Find the value of so that the vector and

are perpendicular to each other.
71.
Fig. obtain the distance travelled by a particle between (a) t = 0 to 10s,
(b) t = 2 to 6 sec.
What is the average speed of the particle over the intervals in (a) and (b) ?

Kinematic 61
72. The velocity time graph of a particle is given by

(i) Calculate distance and displacement of particle from given v-t

graph.
(ii) Specify the time for which particle undergone acceleration, retardation
and moves with constant velocity.
(iii) Calculate acceleration, retardation from given v-t graph.
(iv) Draw acceleration-time graph of given v-t graph.

73. If are represented by three sides of triangle taken in same

order.

P. T. = . [Hint : use law of vector Addition]

74. Prove that for any vector ,

= ,
75. If R is the horizontal range for inclination and h is the maximum height
attained by the projectile, show that the maximum range is given by

+ 2h. [Hint : Put value in relation given & solve]

76. The Resultant of two vectors and is . If the direction of one of the
vector is reversed, then resultant becomes .
Prove that R2 + S2 = 2(P2 + Q2).

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

For each questions, two statements are given - one labelled Assertion
(A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these
questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) & (d) are given below.
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.

62 Physics Class XI
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false and R is also true.
1. Assertion (A) : A body can have acceleration even if its velocity is zero
at a given instant of time.
Reason (R) : A body is momentarily at rest when it reverses it's direction
of motion.
2. Assertion (A) : When a body is dropped or thrown horizontally from the
same height, it would reach the ground at same time.

3. Assertion (A) : A stone and a feather dropped from the same height take

Reason (R) : Force of friction due to the air decreases with the weight of
body.
4.
from the top of tower hit the ground simultaneously.
Reason (R) : Time taken by a body to fall through certain height is
independent of mass of body.
5. Assertion (A) : Minimum number of non-equal vectors in a plane to give
zero resultant is three.
Reason (R) : If A B C O, then they must lie in one plane.
6. Assertion (A) : A B is perpendicular to both A B as well as A – B
Reason (R) : A B as well as A – B lie in the plane containing A and B
but A B lies perpendicular to the plane containing A and B .
7. Assertion (A) : If the speed of a body is constant, the body cannot have
a path other than a circular or straight line path.
Reason (R) : It is not possible for a body to have a constant speed in an
acceleration motion.
8. Assertion (A) : The position time (x – t) graph of a stationary object is a
straight line parallel to time axis.
Reason (R) : For a stationary object the position of object does not change
with time.

Kinematic 63
 9. Assertion (A) : Angle between iˆ + ĵ and iˆ is 45°.
Reason (R) : iˆ + ĵ is equally inclined to both iˆ and ĵ and angle between
iˆ and ĵ is 90°.
10. Assertion (A) : Displacement of a body may be zero, when distance
travelled by it is not zero.
Reason (R) : The displacement is the longer distance between initial and

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

Q1. A ball is projected from the ground level in vertically upward direction
with an initial velocity u. The ball goes upto a maximum height H and
then starts moving downward. Finally the ball falls back on the ground.
It is given that motion of the ball under the action of gravity alone and

(i) What is the value of maximum height (H) up to which the ball goes?
u2 u2 2 u
(a) H = (b) (c) 2u (d)
2g g g 2g

(ii) What time does the ball take to reach the highest point during its
motion?
2u u u u2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
g 2g g g
(iii) What is the acceleration of the body due to gravity
(a) 0 (b) 9.8 m/s2 (c) 4.9 m/s2 (d) 19.6 m/s2
(iv) The motion of ball projected with certain velocity in upward motion
is example of what type of motion?
(a) uniformly acceleration motion
(b) uniformly retarded motion
(c) uniform motion
(d) Non-uniform motion

64 Physics Class XI
 (v) What is the shape of position-time graph for entire motion of
the ball?
(a) straight line parallel to time axis.
(b) straight line inclined at some angle with time axis.
(c) circular
(d) parabolic

Q2. Let two objects A and B moving with velocities V A and V B respectively
at a particular instant of time, then velocity of object A w.r.t. velocity of
object B (i.e. presuming object B to be at rest) is called the relative velocity
of A w.r.t. B and is expressed as V AB , Thus V AB V A V B
Similarly, relative velocity of object B w.r.t. object A
V AB VA VB
Concept of relative velocity is very important in daily life.
(i) If two objects A & B are in motion along a straight path in same
direction, then what is the relative velocity of one object with respect
to another? Take direction of A as +ve.
(a) V AB VB VA (b) V AB VA VB
(c) V AB VA VB (d) V AB –V A – V B
(ii) What will be the relative velocity of object A w.r.t. directions? Take
direction of A as positive direction.
(a) V AB VB VA (b) V AB VA VB
(c) V AB VA VB (d) V AB –V A – V B
(iii) A thief snatches a bag from a person and then moves along a straight
road with a constant velocity of 36 km/h. A police inspector observed
the incident of snatching. He starts his bike with in 10s and accelerates
it so that he is able to hold the thief after 30s. What is the acceleration
of his bike?
(a) a = 1.5 m/s2 (b) 2.5 m/s2 (c) 0.5 m/s2 (d) 3.5 m/s2

(iv) What is the average velocity of police inspector's bike?

(a) 25 m/s (b) 20 m/s (c) 30 m/s (d) 15 m/s

Kinematic 65
 (v) Two trains, each of length 200m, are running an parallel tracks.
One over takes the other in 20 seconds & one crosses the other in
10 seconds. Calculate the velocities of two trains.
(a) 30 m/s, 10 m/s (b) 20 m/s, 20 m/s
(c) 30 m/s, 20 m/s (d) 20 m/s, 10 m/s

Q3. When an object follows a circular path at a constant speed, the motion
of the object is called 'uniform circular motion'. The word uniform refers
to the speed which is uniform throughout the motion. However since the
direction of motion is continuously changing, its velocity is changing
acceleration. For an object moving with a constant speed v along a circle
v2 2
of radius r, the acceleration a r and is directed along the
r
radius towards the centre of the circle. Due to this reason, the acceleration
is known as centripetal acceleration.
(i) What is the direction of velocity vector of a particle in uniform
circular motion?
(a) directed along the tangent vector to the circular path.
(b) directed radially inward towards centre of circle.
(c) directed radially outward away from centre of circle.
(d) None of these.
(ii) What is the direction of centripetal acceleration of a particle in uniform
circular motion?
(a) directed along the tangent vector to the circular path.
(b) directed radially inward towards centre of circle.
(c) directed radially outward away from centre of circle.
(d) None of these.
(iii) An aircraft executes a horizontal loop of radius 1.5 km with a steady
speed of 900 km/h. Compute its centripetal acceleration.
(a) 30.25 m/s2 (b) 37.21 m/s2
(c) 25.27 m/s2 (d) 41.67 m/s2
(iv) A particular goes round a circle of radius 10 cm at 120 revolutions
per minute. Calculate acceleration of the particle.
(a) 160 2 cm/s2 (b) 80 2 cm/s2
(c) 40 2 cm/s2 (d) 320 2 cm/s2

66 Physics Class XI
 (v) What is angle between velocity vector and centripetal acceleration,
if particle have uniform circular motion?
(a) 0° (b) 180° (c) 90° (d) 45°

Q4. A vector quantity is a quantity that has both magnitude & direction and
obeys vector law of addition.
Let A and B be two vectors in a plane, then their vector sum A+B is

The vector sum of two vector is also known as their resultant vector R.
Since in the procedure of vector addition shown, vectors are arranged
head to tail method. Since the two vectors and their resultant form three
sides of a triangle, this method is also known as triangle method of vector
addition.

(i) What is the expression for magnitude of resultant of the two vectors
A & B in terms of their magnitude and angle between them?
(a) R A 2 B2 2ABsin (b) R A 2 B2 – 2ABsin

(c) R A 2 B2 2ABcos (d) R A 2 B2 – 2ABcos

(ii) Under what condition the magnitude of sum of two vector is equal
to sum of magnitudes of these vectors?
(a) When two vectors are in same direction.
(b) When two vectors are acting in opposite direction.
(c) When two vectors are perpendicular to each other.
(d) When two vectors are inclined in any direction, i.e. does not
depend upon direction.
(iii) W h a t i s t h e a n g l e b e t w e e n t w o v e c t o r s A & B w h e n
A B A–B?

(a) = 90° (b) = 0°

(c) = 120° (d) = 180°

Kinematic 67
 (iv) If three vectors a, b, c are represented by three sides of a triangle
taken in the same order, then which of the following is correct?
(a) a b = c (b) a c b
(c) a b + c = 0 (d) None of these.
(v) Two vectors, both equal in magnitude have their resultant equal in
magnitude of either. Find the angle between these vector.
(a) 30° (b) 90° (c) 60° (d) 120°

Q5. A projectile is projected from a point O on the ground with an

initial velocity u at an elevation angle from the horizontal
direction as shown in the figure. It just crosses two walls A and B
of same height h situated symmetrically at times t 1 = 2s and t 2 =
6s respectively. The horizontal distance between the two walls is
d = 120 m. (Take g = 10 m/s2)

(i) The projectile motion is an example of -

(a) one dimensional motion (b) two dimensional motion
(c) three dimensional motion (d) cannot say, precisely.
(ii) The total time of flight of the projectile -
(a) 8s (b) 10s (c) 4s (d) 12s
(iii) The value of angle of projection of the projectile is -
3 –1 4 4
(a) tan –1 (b) tan (c) tan –1 (d) tan –1
4 5 3

68 Physics Class XI
 (iv) The projectile velocity u of the projectile is -
(a) 30 m/s (b) 40 m/s (c) 50 m/s (d) 20 3 m/s
(v) The height h of either of two walls is -
(a) 120 m (b) 30 m (c) 15 m (d) 60 m

SOLUTIONS
1. When the body is moving with uniform velocity. [1 Mark Solutions]
2.

3. Uniform Circular Motion

4. Same height, h1/h2 = 1

5. No change

6. Linear velocity

7. will not change.

8. No. (highest point of vertical upward motion under gravity)

9. Here = 45°

At the highest Point, K. E. = = =

10. The velocity vectors of a stationary object is a zero vectors.

11. They must represent the physical quantities of same nature.

12. When is perpendicular to .

13.

Kinematic 69
14. Because horizontal component of gravity is zero along horizontal direction.

15. 90°.
16. height is maximum at = 90
Range is maximum at = 45.
17. 90°
18. Radial inward.

19. where g = acceleration due to gravity.

20. Null vector

21. No.

22. = = rad h–1.

23. Gravitation force of sun.

24.

25. 90°

[2 Marks]
26. If speed of an object increases with time, its acceleration is positive.
(Acceleration is in the direction of motion) and if speed of an object
decreases with time its acceleration is negative (Acceleration is opposite
to the direction of motion).
27. Yes, at the highest point of vertical upward motion under gravity.
28. as s t3 s = kt3

velocity, V = = 3kt2

acceleration, a = = 6kt
i.e., a t.
motion is uniform, accelerated motion, a – t graph is straight-line.
29.
reduced speed after each hit.

70 Physics Class XI
30.

31. Centripetal acceleration, ac = = = 0.1 m/s2 along RO.

32. R = R u2
Range becomes four times.

33. Maximum height ; H=

Hmax = = h(at = 90°)

Max. Range Rmax = = 2h.

34. (i) Vertical straight line motion
(ii) Parabolic path.
35. Because bullet follow Parabolic trajectory under constant downward
acceleration.
36. No acceleration is towards the centre only in case of uniform circular
motion.
37. The object falls with uniform acceleration equal to ‘g’

Kinematic 71
38.

39.

40. a = = 3t2 + 2t + 2) dt
dv = (3t2 + 2t + 2)dt
=
v= t3 + t2 + 2t + c
c =2 m/s, v = 18 m/s at t = 2s.

41. Use R=

R= A = P + Q,
B= P–Q
solve, = 60°

72 Physics Class XI
46. Initial velocity of car,

u = 126 kmh–1 = ms–1 = 35 ms–1 ...(i)

v=0
Distance covered, s = 200 m, a = ?, t = ?
v2 = u2 – 2as

or a= ...(ii)
Substituting the values from eq. (i) in eq. (ii), we get

a= =–

= – ms–2

= – 3.06 ms–2
Negative sign shows that acceleration in negative which is called
retardation, i.e., car is uniformly retarded at – a = 3.06 ms–2.
t, let us use the relation
v= u + at

t=
Use a = – 3.06 ms–2, v = 0, u = 35 ms–1.

t= = = 11.44 s
t = 11.44 sec.

NUMERICALS

50. = = = 1:3

51. R = (P2 + Q2 + 2PQ cos )1/2

= =P

Kinematic 73
52. = =5

also = = 25

desired vector =

= .

54. Resultant force is zero.

55. (i) O to P, Average velocity = 20 ms–1

(ii) O to P and back to Q
Average velocity =10 ms–1
Average speed =20 ms–1

56. Vavg = = =

or 40 = V2 = 60 kmh–1
57. position, x = 25 m

velocity = = 8t – 15,
t =0, v = 0 – 15 = – 15 m/s

acceleration, a = = 8 ms–2.

58. (distance covered during 0.20 s) + (distance covered until rest)

=(15 × 0.25) + [18.75] = 21.75 m

59. For the ball chapped from the top

x= 4.9t2 ...(i)
For the ball thrown upwards
100 – x = 25t – 4.9t2 ...(ii)
From eq. (i) & (ii),
t =4s; x = 78.4 m

74 Physics Class XI
60. using s =

–h=
h = 58.8 m.
61. V = 40 kmh–1 and T = 9 min.
62. V = 21.8 kmh–1
angle with north, = 23.4
63. Speed = 182.2 ms–1

64. VBW VB VW
VBW 6i 8j.
65. time = 10 seconds

V= = = 99.1 m/s–1.
66. Maximum Range = 3.46 km
So it is not possible.

67. = , =
a = 991.2 cms–2

68. ac = = 0.7 ms–2

aT = 0.5 ms–2
a 22 C a 2 T = 0.86 ms–2

If is the angle between the net acceleration and the velocity of the cyclist,
then

69. =AB cos AB sin

or 6 = (3 × 4) cos = 3 × 4 × sin 60°

or = 60° =3 × 4 × =

Kinematic 75
70. = 0 8–2 +2=0

= 5.
71. Refer NCERT.

72. (i) distance = area of OAB + area of trapezium BCDE

= 12 + 28 = 40 m
(ii) displacement = area of OAB – area of trapezium BCDE
=12 – 28 = – 16 m
(iii) time acc. (0 < t < 4) and (12 < t < 16)
retardation (4 < t < 8)
constant velocity (8 < t < 12)
(iv)

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (b)

6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (c)

Hints and Explanation :-

5. (b) For giving a zero resultant it should be possible to represent the given
vectors along the sides of a closed polygon and minimum number of
sides of a polygon is three.
6. (a) Cross product of two vectors is perpendicular to the plane containing
both the vectors.
7. (d) If the speed of any body is constant all curved path are possible. In
uniform circular motion, a body has a constant speed, but its direction
keeps on changing due to which it has non-zero acceleration.

76 Physics Class XI
 iˆ ˆj .iˆ 1
9. (a) cos , = 45°
iˆ ˆj iˆ 2

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (a) Consider upward to be positive direction of motion and consider
motion upto maximum height.
v2 = u2 + 2as u = initial velocity
2
O = u + 2(–g)H a = –g
H=u /g2 S=H
V=O
ii. 2
(b) v = u + at
O = u + (–g)t
u
t
g
iii. (b)
iv. (b)
v. (d)

2. i. (b) V AB = V A – V B
ii. (c) V AB = V A – –V B = V A + V B

iii. (a) Velocity of thief VT = 36 Km/h = 10 m/s , t = 30 s

distance covered by thief = S = VT t = 10 × 30 = 300 m
initial velocity of inspector's bike = uI = 0,
actual time taken by inspector = t = 30' – 10 = 20 s
distance covered by inspector = S = 300 m
1
300 = 0 × 20 + × a × (20)2 = 200 a
2
a = 1.5 m/s2.

Kinematic 77
 300
iv. (d) Average velocity of inspector = = 15 m/s
20
v. (a) Let velocity of A & B be u & v
400 400
20 10
u v u v
u – v = 20 ..... (i) u + v = 40 ..... (ii)
Solve (i) & (ii)
u = 30 m/s, v = 10 m/s
3. i. (a)
ii. (b)

iii. (d) r = 1.5 km = 1500 m and speed v = 900 km/h = 250 m/s
V 2 250 250
centripetal acceleration ac 41.67 m/s 2
r 1500
120
iv. (a) v = 120 rpm = = 2 rps
60
v2 2r 2 v2r
ac = = =4
r
ac = 4 2(2)2(10) = 160 2 cm/s2
v. (c)

4. i. (c)
ii. (a) when they are in same direction,
= 0°
R A2 B2 2 AB cos 0
( A B) A B

iii. (a) A B A B
It is possible only when A and B are in mutually perpendicular
directions.

iv. (c) a b c
a b c 0

78 Physics Class XI
 v. (d) R P 2 Q 2 2 PQ cos
R=P=Q given
P P 2 P 2 2 P 2 cos
cos = –1/2, = 120°

5. i. (b)
ii. (a) If a projectile passes a certain height h at two times t1 & t2 then
t1 + t2 T
T = t1 + t2 = 2 + 6 = 8 sec.
2u sin gT 10 8 4
iii. (c) T u sin 40
g 2 2
horizontal distance between the wall d
d = (ucos ) (t1 – t2)
d 120
ucos = = 30
t2 t1 6 2

Now, u sin 40 4
tan
u cos 30 3
4
tan –1
3
4 4 4
iv. (c) tan , sin
3 42 32 5
u sin = 40
4 10
u 40 u 50 m/s
5
1
v. (d) h (u sin )t1 g t12
2
1
h 40 2 10(2) 2 60 m
2

Kinematic 79
 KINEMATICS (M.C.Q.)
1. If BA
the cos
angle
BA cosbetween
BA sin
BA sinthesin
BA BAvectors
cos A and
sin cos is(B ,A)the value of the product
B A(BB A)
BA BA
sin cosBA BA
sin sin A Bsin (BcosA) . A B
cos BA is equal
(B A)to

(a) BA 2 cos BA 2 sin BA 2 sinBA 2

cos(b) B 2(B
cos A BA sin A) BA 2 sin cos A B (B A)

BA 2 cos BA 2(c)
sin BA 2 sin cos A B (B A) (d) Zero

2. For an object thrown at 45° to the horizontal, the maximum height (H) and
horizontal range (R) are related as

(a) R = 16 H (b) R=8H

(c) R=4H (d) R=2H

3. The circular motion of a particle wth constant speed is
(a) Simple harmonic but not periodic
(b) Periodic an simple harmonic
(c) Neither periodic nor simple harmonic
(d) Periodic but not simple harmonic

4. At the upper most of a projectile, its velocity and acceleration at an

angle of

(a) 0° (b) 45°

(c) 90° (d) 180°

5.
If for any two vectors A B A B in a plane, then what is angle between
A cos
BA cos
BA sin
BA sin
BA sin
BA cos A and
sin cos B A(BB A)
(B A)

(a) (b) 45°

(c) 90° (d) 180°

6. The x and y coordinates of a particle at any time t is given by x = 7t + 4t2
and y = 5t, where x and y are in metre and t in seconds. The acceleration
of particle at t = 5s is
(a) Zero (b) 8 m/s2
(c) 20 m/s2 (d) 40 m/s2

80 Physics Class XI
 the kinetic energy at the highest point.
K K K K
(a) (b)
4 2 4 2
(c) K (d) 2K
8. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5 m/s. In 10s, the velocity
changes to 5 m/s north words. The average acceleration in this time is
1
(a) Zero (b) m/s2 towards north-west
2
1 1
(c) 2
m/s2 towards north (d) m/s2 towards north-east
2
9. A body dropped from top of tower falls through 60 m during the last
2 seconds of its fall. The height of tower is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 95 m (b) 80 m
(c) 90 m (d) 60 m
10. The angular velocity of seconds hand of a watch is
(a) 60 rad/s (b) rad/s
60 30
(c) 40 rad/s (d) rad/s
60 30
11. The angle between the vectors (iˆ ˆj) and (ˆj k)
ˆ is
(a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 90°
12. If the scalar and vector
BAproducts
BA cos cos BAofsin
BA sin twosin
BA BAvectors
cos A and
sin cos are
(B equal
B A(BB A) A) in
magnitude, then the angle between the two vectors is
(a) 45° (b) 90°
(c) 180° (d) 120°
13. An object, moving with a speed of 6.25 m/s, is decelerated at a rate given
by
d
– 2.5
dt
Where V is the instantaneous speed. The time taken by the object, to come
to rest would be
(a) 1s (b) 2s
(c) 4s (d) 8 (s)

Kinematic 81
 14. The velocity-time graph for the vertical
component of the velocity of a body thrown 

upwards from the ground and landing on the roof 


the building is
    
(a) 50 m (b) 40 m  

(c) 20 m (d) 30 m
15. In 1 s, a particle goes from point A to point B moving in a semicircle as


(a) Zero (b) 1 m/s


(c) 2 m/s (d) 3.14 m/s

16. A boat which has speed of 5 km/h in still water crosses a river of width
1 km along the shortest possible path in 15 minutes. The velocity of rive
water in km/hr is
(a) 1 (b) 3

(c) 4 (d) 41

17. A body projected at an angle with the horizontal has a range 300 m. I the

(a) 30 m/s (b) 50 m/s

(c) 40 m/s (d) 45 m/s

cos cosBA18.
BA BA sin sinProjection
BA BA BA cosof
sin sin cosA on B is
BA (B (B
A) A)

(a) A B A B A B A A(b)
BB A B A B A B

A B A (c)B A B A
A B A B A (d)
B A B

V1 and second half with velocity V2. The mean velocity V is given by
2 1 1 V1
(a) (b) V 2
V 1 2 2
(c) V 1 . 2
(d) 1 V2

82 Physics Class XI
 20. A projectile rises to a height of 10 m and then falls at a distance of 30 m
away from the projection. Its vertical displacement is
(a) 0m (b) 5m

(c) 6m (d) 7m
Answer Key :
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (c) 6. (b)
7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (a)
13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (b)
19. (b) 20. (a)

HINTS AND EXPLANATIONS :

BA cos 1.BAcos
BA sin BA Angle
cosbetween
sin BA and A Bis 90°
sinA BBA(BsinA) cos (B A)  


BA BA
sin cos
BA sin
BA cos
sin A Bsin(B cos
BA B A)
A) . A B= (B A A cos 90 

=0 

2. U 2 sin 2 45 U2
H ,
2g 4g
U 2 sin 90 U2
R
g g

R = 4H

4. At highest pt, only horizontal component of velocity exists, while acceleration

is directed downward, So = 90°.

5.
A B A B
S. B. S.
2 2
A B A B

A B A B A B A B
90

Kinematic 83
6. V1 5 m / s (East)
x 7t 4t 2
V2 5 m / s (North)
dx
Vx 7 8t Change in velocity Vt Vi
dt
dv x 5 j 5 i m/s
ax 8 Magnitude ofchange in velocity
dt
y 5t (5) 2 (5) 2 5 2 m/s
dy
Vy 5
dt 9. U = O, velocity attained by ball
dv y at t = 2 second
ay 0 m / s2
dt v = u + a t = 0 + g (t – 2)
2 2 2
a ax ay 8 0
distance traveled by ball in last 2s
8 m / s2
is given by

1 h1 t
1 2
at
7. k mv 2 2
2 1
60 g(t 2) 2 g(4) 20(t 2) 20
At highest pt., v = v cos 45° 2
2
1 v v at 4S, Height of tower
K.E m
2 2 2
1 2 1
1 mv 2 K gt 10 42 80 m
2 2
2 2 2
2 2
8.  10. w rod/s
T 60 30
V2
= 5 m/s

 
 V 1
= 5 m/s
A B
11. cos
A B
acc.
t (i
j) ( j k) 0 1 0
5 2 1 1 1 1 1 2
m / s2
10 2 1
cos cos 60
2
60

84 Physics Class XI
12. A B A B –30
a –10 m / s 2
AB cos AB sin 3
1 tan V2 u 2 2a S
tan 1 O (30) 2 2( 10) h
tan tan 45 (30) 2 20 h
45 30 30
h 45m
20
From Max. height to roof of
13. d building
– 2.5
dt 2
102
h 5m
0 t 2g 2 10
1/2
d 2.5 dt
height of building = H – h = 45 – 5
6.25 0
0
½ = 40 m
2.5 [t]0 t
½ 6.25

2 0 6.25 – 2.5 (t 0)
15. Magnitude of average
2 2.5 – 2.5 t
Magnitude of displacement
t 2s velocity
Time taken
2m 1
2ms
14. u = 30 m/s 1s

v = 0 m/s
16. 
t = 3s S=h=?

v=u+at 
 

0 = 30 + a (3)

Kinematic 85
 cos cosBA18.
BA BA sin sinProjection
BA BA BA cosof
sin sin cosA on
BA (B
B (B
A) A)
V br Vb Vr
Vbr2 Vb2 Vr2 =
A B
A
B
AB
V 2 2
25 V –––––––(1)
1 B B
b r

dis tan ce
t 19. Ar. Velocity
Vb V1t V2 t
1 1 S1 S2 2 2
hr V
t t
4 25 Vr2 S1 S2
V1 , V2
Vr 3 km / h t/2 t/2
V1 V2
17. R = (U cos )T 2
R 300
U cos 50 m / s
T 6 20. Since the projectile returns to the
plane of projection therefore the
net displacement is zero.

****

86 Physics Class XI
3.1 Inertia
(1) Inherent property of all the bodies by virtue of which they cannot
change their state of rest or uniform motion along a straight line by
their own is called inertia.
(2) Two bodies of equal mass possess same inertia because it is a factor
of mass only.

3.2 Linear Momentum

(1) Linear momentum of a body is the quantity of motion contained in
the body.
(2) It is measured as the product of the mass of the body and its velocity
i.e., Momentum = mass × velocity.

If a body of mass m is moving with velocity then its linear

momentum is given by
(3) It is a vector quantity and it’s direction is the same as the direction
of velocity of the body.
(4) Units : kg-m/sec [S.I.], g cm/sec [C.G.S.]
(5) Dimension : [MLT–1]

3.3 Newton’s First Law

A body continue to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion along a
straight line, unless it is acted upon by some external force to change
the state.
(1) If no net force acts on a body, then the velocity of the body cannot
change i.e., the body cannot accelerate.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 87

 (2)
inertia. Inertia are of three types :
Inertia of rest, Inertia of motion, Inertia of direction.

3.4 Newton’s Second Law

(1) The rate of change of linear momentum of a body is directly proportional
to the external force applied on the body and this change takes place
always in the direction of the applied force.

(2) If a body of mass m, moves with velocity then its linear momentum
can be given by and if force is applied on a body, then

or (K = 1 in C. G. S. and S. I. units)

(Force = mass × acceleration)

3.5 Force
(1) Force is an ext
(i) Produces or tries to produce motion in a body at rest.
(ii) Stops or tries to stop a moving body.
(iii) Changes or tries to change the direction of motion of the body.
(2) Dimension : Force = mass × acceleration
[F] = [M][LT–2] = [MLT–2]
(3) Units : Absolute units : (i) Newton (S.I.) (ii) Dyne (C.G.S.)
Gravitational units : (i) Kilogram-force (M.K.S.) (ii) Gram-force
(C.G.S.)

(4) formula is valid only if force is changing the state of rest

(5) if m is not constant

(6) No force is required to move a body uniformly along a straight line.

= ma, = 0 (As a = 0)
(7) When force is written without direction then positive force means
repulsive while negative force means attractive.

88 Physics Class XI
 (8) Out of so many natural forces nuclear force is strongest while
gravitational force weakest.
(9) Central force : If a position dependent force is always directed

non-central.
(10) Conservative or non-conservative force : If under the action of
a force the work done in a round trip is zero or the work is path
independent, the force is said to be conservative otherwise non-
conservative.
Example : Conservative force : Gravitational force, electric force, elastic
force.
Non-conservative force : Frictional force, viscous force.
(11) Common forces in mechanics :
(i) Weight : Weight of an object is the force with which earth
attracts it. (W = mg)
(ii) Reaction or Normal force : When a body is placed on a rigid
surface, the body experience a force which is perpendicular to
the surfaces in contact. Then force is called ‘Normal force’ or
‘Reaction’.
(iii) Tension : The force exerted by the end of taut string, rope or
chain against pulling (applied) force is called the tension. The
direction of tension is so as to pull the body.
(iv) Spring force : Every spring resists any attempt to change its
length. This resistive force increases with changes in length.
Spring force is given by F = –Kx; where x is the change in
length and K is the spring constant (unit N/m).

3.6 Equilibrium of Concurrent Force

(1) If all the force working on a body are acting on the same point, then
they are said to be concurrent.
(2) A body, under the action of concurrent forces, is said to be in
equilibrium, when there is no change in the state of rest or of uniform
motion along a straight line.
(3) The condition for the equilibrium of a body is that the vector sum
of all the forces acting on the body must be zero.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 89

3.7 Newton’s Third Law
To every action, there is always an equal (in magnitude) and opposite (in
direction) reaction.

If = force exerted on body A by body B (Action) and = force

exerted on body B by body A (Reaction)

Then according to Newton’s third law of motion = –

Example :
(i) A book lying on a table exerts a force on the table which is equal to
the weight of the book. This is the force of action.
(ii) Swimming is possible due to third law of motion.

recoils backward (reaction).

3.8 Frame of Reference

(1) A frame in which an observer is situated and makes his observations
is known as his ‘Frame of reference’.
It is associated with a co-ordinate system.
(2) Frame of reference are of two types : (i) Inertial frame of reference
(ii) Non-inertial frame of reference.
(i) Inertial frame of reference :
(a) A frame of reference which is at rest or which is moving with
a uniform velocity along a straight line is called an inertial
frame of reference.
(b) In inertial frame of reference Newton’s laws of motion holds
good.
(c) Ideally no inertial frame exist in universe. For practical
purpose a frame of reference may be considered as inertial it
it’s acceleration is negligible with respect to the acceleration
of the object to be observed.
Example : The lift at rest, lift moving (up or down) with constant velocity.
(ii) Non inertial frame of reference :
(a) Accelerated frame of references are called non-inertial frame
of reference.
(b) Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable in non-inertial
frame of reference.

90 Physics Class XI
 Example : Car moving in uniform circular motion, lift which
is moving upward or downward with some acceleration, plane

3.9 Impulse
(1) When a large force works on a body for very small time interval, it
is called impulsive force.

zero to maximum and then from maximum to zero. In such case we

(2)

(3)

(4) Impulse is a vector quantity and its direction is same as that of force.
(5) Dimension : [MLT–1]
(6) Units : Newton second or Kg-ms –1 (S.I.) and Dyne second or
gm cm s–1 (C.G.S.)
(7) Force-time graph- Impulse is equal to the area under F-t curve.

I = Area between curve and time axis = Ft

(8) If Fav is the average magnitude of the force, then

I= = = Fav t

(9) From Newton’s second law, =

or = = =
i.e., The impulse of a force is equal to the change in momentum.
This statement is known as Impulse momentum theorem.
Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 91
 (10) Examples. Hitting, kicking, catching, jumping, diving, collision etc.
In all these cases an impulse acts, I = = Fav. t = p = constant
So if time of contact A t is increased, average force is decreased (or
diluted) and vice-versa.
(i) In catching a ball a player by drawing his hands backwards
increases the time of contact and so, lesser force acts on his
hands and his hands are saved from getting hurt.
(ii) China wares are wrapped in straw or paper before packing.

3.10 Law of Conservation of Linear Momentum

If no external force acts on a system (called isolated) of constant mass,
the total momentum of the system remains constant with time.

(1) According to this law for a system of particles

In the absence of external force = 0 then = constant.

i.e., = = constant.

(2) Law of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of

reference though linear momentum depends on frame of reference.

(3) Practical applications of the law of conservation of linear momentum

(i) When a man jumps out of a boat on the shore, the boat is pushed
slightly away from the shore,
(ii) A person left on a frictionless surface can get away from it by
blowing air out of his mouth or by throwing some object in a
direction opposite to the direction in which he wants to move,
(iii) Recoiling of a gun-Tor bullet and gun system, the force exerted by
trigger will be internal so the momentum of the system remains

3.11 Free Body Diagram

In this diagram the object of interest is isolated from its surroundings and
the interactions between the object and the surroundings are represented
in terms of forces.

92 Physics Class XI
3.12 Apparent Weight of a Body in a Lift
When a body of mass m is placed on a weighing machine which is placed
in a lift, then actual weight of the body is mg.

reading of weighing machine. The reaction exerted by the surface of

contact on the body is the apparent weight of the body.

Condition Figure velocity Acceleration Reaction Conclusion

Lift is at rest v=0 a=0 R – mg = 0 Apparent weight
R = mg = Actual weight

Lift moving v = constant a = 0 R – mg = 0 Apparent weight

upward or R = mg = Actual weight
downward
with constant
velocity

Lift accelerating v = variable a < g R – mg = ma Apparent weight

upward at the R = m(g+a) > Actual weight
rate of ‘a’

Lift accelerating V = variable a = g R – mg = mg Apparent weight

upward at the R = 2mg = 2 Actual weight
rate of ‘g’

Lift accelerating V = variable a < g mg – R = ma Apparent weight

downward at R = m (g – a) < Actual weight
the rate of ‘a’

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 93

Lift accelerating V = variable a = g mg – R = mg Apparent weight
downward at R=0 = Zero
the rate of ‘g’ (weightlessness)

Lift accelerating V = variable a > g mg – R = ma Apparent weight

downward at R = mg – ma negative means the
the rate of R = – ve body will rise from
a( > g

3.13 Acceleration of Block on Horizontal Smooth Source

(1) When a pull is acting at an angle ( ) to the horizontal (upward)
R + F sin = mg
R = mg – F sin
and F cos = ma

a=

3.14 Acceleration of Block on Smooth Inclined Plane

(1) When inclined plane is at rest.
Normal reaction R = mg cos
Force along a inclined plane F = mg sin
ma = mg sin
a = g sin

94 Physics Class XI
 (2) When a inclined plane given a horizontal acceleration ‘b’. Since
the body lies in an accelerating frame, an inertial acts on it in the
opposite direction.
Normal reaction R = mg cos + mb sin
and ma = mg sin – mb cos
a = g sin – b cos

3.15 Motion of Block in Contact

Condition Free body diagram Equation Force and acceleration

F – f = m1a a=

f = m2a f=

f = m1a a=

F – f = m2a f=

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 95

 F – f1 = m1a a=

f1 – f2 = m2a f1 =

f2 = m3a f2 =

f1 = m1a a=

f2 – f1 = m2a f1 =

F – f2 = m2a f2 =

3.16 Motion of Blocks Connected by Mass Less String

Condition Free body diagram Equation Tension and acceleration

T = m1a a=

F – T = m2a T=

F – T = m1a a=

T = m2a T=

96 Physics Class XI
 
 T1 = m1a a=



 T2 – T1 = m2a T1 =




F – T2 = m3a T2 =

F – T1 = m1a a=

T1 – T2 = m2a T1 =

T2 = m3a T2 =

3.17 Motion of Connected Block over A Pulley

Condition Free body diagram Equation Tension and acceleration

 m1a = T1 – m1g T1 =




m2a = m2g – T1 T2 =

T2 = 2T1 a=

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 97

 m1a = T1 – m1g T1 =

m2a = m2g + T2 – T T2 =

m3a = m3g – T2 T3 =

T3 = 2T1 a=

  m1a = m1g – T1 a=
 


m2a = T2 – m2g T1 =

Torque
  = (T – T )R = 1
  1 2

(T1 – T2)R =

(T1 – T2)R = T2 =

MR2

T 1 – T2 =

98 Physics Class XI
3.18 Friction (Introduction)
If we slide or try to slide a body over a surface the motion is resisted by a
bonding between the body and the surface. This resistance is represented
by a single force and is called friction.
The force of friction is parallel to the surface and opposite to the direction
of intended motion.

3.19 Types of Friction

(1) Static friction : The opposing force that comes into play when objects
are at rest.
(i) In this case static friction F = P.
(ii) Static friction is a self-adjusting force because it changes itself
in accordance with the applied force.
(2) Limiting friction : The maximum value of static friction upto which
body does not move is called limiting friction.
(i) The magnitude of limiting friction between any two bodies in
contact is directly proportional to the normal reaction between
them.
F1 R or F1= sR
(ii) Direction of the force of limiting friction is always opposite to
the direction in which one body is at the verge of moving.

(a) s
0L0T0]

(d) Value of s lies in between 0 and 1

(e) Value of depends on material and nature of surfaces in
contact.
(f) Value of does not depend upon apparent area of contact.
(3) Kinetic or dynamic friction : If the applied force sets the body in
motion, the friction opposing the motion is called kinetic friction.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 99

 (i) Kinetic friction depends upon the normal reaction friction.
Fk R or Fk = kR where k
friction.
(ii) Kinetic friction is always lesser than limiting friction Fk < F1
k < s

Thus we require more force to start a motion than to maintain it

against friction. This is because when motion has actually started,
irregularities of one surface have little time to get locked again
into the irregularities of the other surface.

Rolling friction is directly proportional to the normal reaction

(R) and inversely proportional to the radius (r) of the rolling
cylinder or whell.

FRrolling =

is called c
dimensions of length and would be measured in metre.
Rolling friction is often quite small as compared to the sliding
friction.
In rolling the surfaces at contact do not rub each other.
The velocity of point of contact with respect to the surface
remains zero all the times.

3.20 Graph Between Applied Force and Force of Friction

(1) Part OA = static friction (Fs).
(2) At point A = limiting friction (F1).
(3) Beyond A, the force of friction is seen to decrease slightly.
The portion BC = kinetic friction (Fk).
(4) As the portion BC of the curve is parallel to x axis therefore kinetic
friction does not change with the applied force.

100 Physics Class XI

 






3.21 Angle of Friction

friction and normal reaction makes with the normal reaction.

is called he angle of friction tan =






 
 


tan = =
or = tan–1 ( )

3.22 Angle of Repose

such that a body placed on it is just begins to slide.

If is called the angle of repose.
= i.e., angle of repose = angle of friction.




 
 

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 101

 UNIT-III (Laws of Motion)
1 Mark Questions
1. A passenger sitting in a car at rest, pushes the car from within. The car
doesn’t move, why ?
2. Give the magnitude and directions of the net force acting on a rain drop
falling with a constant speed.
3. Why the passengers in a moving car are thrown outwards when it suddenly
takes a turn ?
4. You accelerate your car forward. What is the direction of the frictional force

5. What is the purpose of using shockers in a car ?

6. Why are tyres made of rubber not of steel ?
7. Wheels are made circular. Why ?
8. If a ball is thrown up in a moving train, it comes back to the thrower’s
hands. Why ?
9. Calculate the force acting on a body which changes the momentum of the
body at the rate of 1 kg-m/s2.
10. On a rainy day skidding takes place along a curved path. Why ?
11.
12.
are moving with the same velocity ?
13. The distance travelled by a moving body is directly proportional to time. Is
any external force acting on it ?
14. Calculate the impulse necessary to stop a 1500 kg car moving at a speed of
25 ms–1.
15. Lubricants are used between the two parts of a machine. Why ?
16. What provides the centripetal force to a car taking a turn on a level road ?
17. A body is acted upon by a number of external forces. Can it remain at
rest ?
18.
Why ?
19. An athlete runs a certain distance before taking a long jump. Why ?
20. Action and reaction forces do not balance each other. Why. ?
21. The wheels of vehicles are provided with mudguards. Why ?

102 Physics Class XI

22. China wares are wrapped in straw paper before packing. Why ?
23.
24. The outer edge of a curved road is generally raised over the inner edge.
Why ?
25. Explain why the water doesn’t fall even at the top of the circle when the
bucket full of water is upside down rotating in a vertical circle ?
26. Why does a speedy motor cyclist bends towards the centre of a circular path
while taking a turn on it ?
27. An impulse is applied to a moving object with a force at an angle of 20°
w.r.t. velocity vector, what is the angle between the impulse vector and
change in momentum vector ?
2 Marks Questions
28. A man getting out of a moving bus runs in the same direction for a certain
distance. Comment.
29. If the net force acting upon the particle is zero, show that its linear
momentum remains constant.
30. A force of 36 dynes is inclined to the horizontal at an angle of 60°. Find the
acceleration in a mass of 18 g that moves in a horizontal direction.
31. The motion of a particle of mass m is described by h = ut + 1/2 gt2 . Find
the force acting on particle. (F = mg)
32. A particle of mass 0.3 kg is subjected to a force of F = – kx with k = 15
Nm–1 . What will be its initial acceleration if it is released from a point
20 cm away from the origin ?
33. –1. What is
the speed of the recoil of the gun.
34. Smooth block is released at rest on a 45° incline and then slides a
distance d. If the time taken of slide on rough incline is n times as large

= .

35. A spring balance is attached to the ceiling of a lift. When the lift is at rest
spring balance reads 49 N of a body hang on it. If the lift moves :
(i) Downward
(ii) upward, with an acceleration of 5 ms–2

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 103

 (iii) with a constant velocity.
What will be the reading of the balance in each case ?
36. It is easier to pull a roller than to push it. Why ? (using vector diagram)
37. A horse cannot pull a cart and run in empty space. Why ? (using diagram)
38. A bob of mass 0.1 kg hung from the ceiling of room by a string 2 m long
is oscillating. At its mean position the speed of a bob is 1 ms–1. What is the
trajectory of the oscillating bob if the string is cut when the bob is
(i) At the mean position
(ii) At its extreme position.
39.
40.
41. A block placed on a rough horizontal surface is pulled by a horizontal force
F. Let f be the force applied by the rough surface on the block. Plot a graph
of f versus F.
42. A mass of 2 kg is suspended with thread AB. Thread CD of the same type
is attached. To the other end of 2 kg mass.
(i) Lower end of the lower thread is pulled gradually, hander and hander
is the downward direction so as to apply force on AB. Which of the
thread will break & why ?
A

(ii) If the lower thread is pulled with a jerk, what happens ?

43. A block of mass M is held against a rough vertical wall by pressing it with
and
the acceleration due to gravity is g, calculate the minimum force required to
t the wall ?

NUMERICALS (3 Marks Questions)

44. A block of mass 500 g is at rest on a horizontal table. What steady force is
required to give the block a velocity of 200 cms–1 in 4 s ?

104 Physics Class XI

45. A force of 98 N is just required to move a mass of 45 kg on a rough horizontal

46. Calculate the force required to move a train of 2000 quintal up on an incline
plane of 1 in 50 with an acceleration of 2 ms–2. The force of friction per
quintal is 0.5 N.
47. A force of 100 N gives a mass m1, an acceleration of 10 ms–2 and of 20
ms–2 to a mass m2. What acceleration must be given to it if both the masses
are tied together ?
48.
negligible. In (a) mass m is lifted up by attaching a mass (2 m) to the other
end of the rope. In (b), m is lifted up by pulling the other end of the rope
with a constant downward force F = 2 mg. In which case, the acceleration
of m is more ?

49. Fig. shows the position-time graph of a particle of mass 4 kg. What is the

(a) Force on the particle for t < 0, t > 4s, 0 < t < 4s ?
(b) Impulse at t = 0 and t = 4s ?
(Consider one dimensional motion only)
50.

Also Calculate friction in the string.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 105

 Take g = 10 m/s2, mass of the string is negligible.

k
kgf

51. Three blocks of masses m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 20 kg are connected by strings

on smooth horizontal surface and pulled by a force of 60 N. Find the
acceleration of the system and frictions in the string.

52. The rear side of a truck is open and a box of 40 kg mass is placed 5m

the surface below it is 0.15 on a straight road, the truck starts from rest and
accelerates with 2 m/s2. At what distance from the starting point does the

53. A block slides down as incline of 30° with the horizontal. Starting from rest,

54. A helicopter of mass 2000 kg rises with a vertical acceleration of 15 m/s2.

The total mass of the crew and passengers is 500 kg. Give the magnitude
and direction of the :

(ii) Action of the rotor of the helicopter on the surrounding air

(iii) Force on the helicopter due to the surrounding air (g =10 m/s2)
55.
between the surface and the box is ( ). Let the mass of the box be m.
(a) At what angle of inclination of the plane to the horizontal will the
box just start to slide down the plane ?
(b) What is the force acting on the box down the plane, if the angle of
inclination of the plane is increased to > .
(c) What is the force needed to be applied upwards along the plane to
make the box either remain stationary or just move up with uniform
speed ?

106 Physics Class XI

 (d) What is the force needed to be applied upwards along the plane to
make the box move up the plane with acceleration a ?
56. Two masses of 5 kg and 3 kg are suspended with help of mass less
inextensible string as shown. Calculate T1 and T2 when system is going
upwards with acceleration m/s2. (Use g = 9.8 m/s2)
   

  


   
   

57. There are few forces acting at a Point P produced by strings as shawn,
which is at rest, Find the forces F1 & F2

58.
150 ms–1 . A 60 kg tiger springs at him with a velocity of 10 ms–1. How

track ?
59. Two blocks of mass 2 kg and 5 kg are connected by an ideal string passing
over a pulley. The block of mass 2 kg is free to slide on a surface inclined at
an angle of 30° with the horizontal whereas 5 kg block hangs freely. Find
the acceleration of the system and the tension in the string.
60. Show that Newton’s second law of motion is the real law of motion.
5 Marks Questions
61.
of conservation of linear momentum from Newton’s third law of motion.
62. Why circular roads are banked ? Derive an expression for angle of banking

and road is .

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 107

63. Obtain an expression for minimum velocity of projection of a body at the
lowest point for looping a vertical loop.
64. Show that the area under the force-time graph gives the magnitude of the
impulse of the given force for the following case when (i) force is constant
(ii) variable force.
65. Derive an expression for acceleration of a body down a rough inclined
plane ? (Sliding only)
66. With the help of suitable example, explain the terms static friction, limiting
friction and kinetic friction. Show that static friction is a self adjusting
force. Also plot the graph showing the variation between applied force
F and force of friction f.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

For each questions, two students are given - one labelled Assertion (A) and
the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions
from the codes (a), (b), (c) & (d) are given below.
(a) Both A and R are true but R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is also false.
1. Assertion (A) : A rocket moves forward by pushing the surrounding air
backwards.
Reason (R) : It drives the necessary thrust to move forward according to
Newton's third law of motion.
2. Assertion (A) : A man in a closed cabin, which is falling freely, does not
experience gravity.
Reason (R) : Inertial and gravitational masses have equivalence.
3. Assertion (A) : Centripetal force is always required for motion in curved
path.
Reason (R) : On a banked curved track, vertical component of normal
reaction provides the necessary centripetal force.
4.
on.
Reason (R) : Sliding friction is greater than rolling friction.

108 Physics Class XI

 5. Assertion (A) : Friction forces are conservative forces.
Reason (R) : Potential energy can be associated with frictional force.

6. Assertion (A) : Use of ball bearings between two moving parts of a machine
is a common practice.
Reason (R) : Ball bearings reduce vibrations and provide good stability.
7. Assertion (A) : The driver in a vehicle moving with a constant speed on
a straight road is a non-inertial frame of reference.
Reason (R) : A reference frame in which Newton's laws of motion are
applicable is non-inertial.
8. Assertion (A) : A table cloth can pulled from a table without disloding the
dishes.
Reason (R) : To every action there is an equal and opposite reaction.
9. Assertion (A) : The apparent weight of a body in an elevator moving with
some downward acceleration is less than the actual weight of a body.
Reason (R) : The part of the weight is spent in producing downward
acceleration, when body is in elevator.

10. Assertion (A) : Angle of repose is equal to angle of friction.

Reason (R) : When a body is at the point of motion, the force of friction
at this stage is called limiting friction.

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

Q1. A person weighing 60 kg is standing on a platform scale balance kept on

or down direction with either a uniform velocity or a constant acceleration.

The value of velocity as well as acceleration may be adjusted at any suitable
value. Newton's second law of motion can be applied for the motion of
elevator cab.
(i) The observed weight a person in an elevator is -
(a) remains same and is equal to actual weight
(b) always increases
(c) always decreases
(d) Increases or decreases depending upon motion of elevator

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 109

 (ii) Find the observed weight of the person as recorded by the balance
when, the elevator cab is moving upward with a constant velocity of
2 m/s.
(a) 0 N (b) 30 gN (c) 60 gN (d) 90 gN
(iii) The elevator cab is in an accelerated motion in vertical downward
direction, with an acceleration of g/4
(a) 0 N (b) 45 gN (c) 90 gN (d) 60 gN
(iv) The elevator cab starts falling downward freely due to some
mechanical failure in its control system.
(a) 0 N (b) 75 gN (c) 120 gN (d) 90 gN
(v) The elevator cab is accelerating uniformly in upward directions
with uniform acceleration of g/2.
(a) 0 N (b) 120 gN (c) 30 gN (d) 90 gN
Q2. When two bodies are in contact, each experiences a contact force by
the other. The component of the contact force parallel to the surfaces in
contact, which opposes impending or actual relative motion between the
two bodies in contact is opposed by static friction. Kinetic friction opposes
actual relative motion between two bodies in contact.
There is a yet another type of friction which opposes rolling motion of
one body over the surface of another body. It is called rolling friction.
We often regard friction as something undesirable. However in many
practical situations friction is critically needed.
(i) What is the direction of friction?
(a) Friction always acts tangential to the surface in contact.
(b) Friction acts normal to the surface in contact.
(c) Direction depends upon weight of body which moves over surface
of another body.
(d) None of these.
(ii) Which one of the statement is not correct about friction?
(a) friction is an self adjusting force.
(b) force of friction is independent of area of contact as long as normal
reaction remains same.
(c) sliding friction is greater than static friction.
(d) limiting friction is the maximum static friction.
(iii) An automobile is moving on a horizontal road with a speed V. If the

110 Physics Class XI

 . What is
the shortest distance in which the automobile can be stopped?
v2 2v 2 v2 v2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
g g 4 g 2 g

(iv) What will be the maximum acceleration of the train in which a box

2).

(a) 2 m/s2 (b) 2.5 m/s2 (c) 1 m/s2 (d) 1.5 m/s2

of friction between block A and table is 0.2.

(a) 5 kg (b) 15 kg (c) 25 kg (d) 35 kg

Q3. In our daily life experiences, we sometime encounter situations where a
force acts on a body for a very short interval of time. For example when
a batsman hits a ball by the bat with some force, then time of contact

in momentum of the ball is produced by the force, which is provided by

the bat with in the small duration of time. The product of force and the
time duration for which the force acts on a body is called impulse and is
equal to change in momentum of the body.
(i) Which of the following physical quantity has same dimensional
formulae as that of impulse?
(a) Pressure (b) Momentum
(c) Tension (d) Surface energy
(ii) A batsman hits back a ball straight in the direction of bowler without
changing its initial speed of 12 m/s. If the mass of the ball is 0.15 kg,
determine the impulse imparted to the ball. (Assume linear motion
of the ball)
(a) 1.8 Ns (b) 2.2 Ns (c) 3.6 Ns (d) 4.8 Ns

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 111

 (iii) Figure shows the position-time graph of a particle of mass 4 kg. What
is the impulse at t = 4s.
(a) –3 kg m/s
(b) 3 kg m/s
(c) 2 kg m/s
(d) –2 kg m/s

(iv) Figure shows the position time graph of a body of mass 0.04 kg.
What is magnitude of impulse at t = 2s.
(a) 16 × 10–4 kg ms–1
(b) 2 × 10–4 kg ms–1
(c) 4 × 10–4 kg ms–1
(d) 8 × 10–4 kg ms–1

(v) A 3 kg ball strikes a heavy rigid wall with a speed of 10 m/s at an

angle of 60 with normal to wall. It gets reflected with the same speed
and is in contact with wall for 0.2s. What is impulse exerted by wall
on ball.
(a) 60 Ns
(b) 30 Ns
(c) 15 Ns
(d) 20 Ns

Q4. The maximum permissible speed for a vehicle to negotiate a tum on a level

of friction between the tyres and road. But in practice, this limiting
value of speed for sharp tum is quite low, especially in hilly areas where
the turns are too sharp. In order to move the vehicle at a reasonable speed
without getting skid/slip to go around the sharp tums of the inner one. It
is called banking of road.
Banking of roads provide the necessary centripetal force which is needed
to make sharp tum with reasonable speed and without getting skid.
(i) Force responsible for the circular motion of the body is
(a) Centripetal force (b) Centrifugal force
(c) Gravitational force (d) None of these

112 Physics Class XI

 (ii) What is maximum safe speed of car negotiating a circular tum of
radius r on a friction less banked track with angle of banking ?
(a) r tan (b) rg sin

(c) g tan (d) rg tan

(iii) What is maximum safe speed of car in a circular road of radius

3m? The coefficient of friction between the tyres and road is 0.1.
(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 1.43 m/s (b) 1.73 m/s (c) 1.63 m/s (d) 1.53 m/s
(iv) Which statement is not correct about banking of roads?
(a) Banking of roads reduces wear and tear on tyres of vehicles.
(b) It provide required centripetal force.
(c) It reduces the friction between road and the tyres.
(d) All are correct.
(v) A car sometime overturns while taking a turn. When it overturns,
it is
(a) the inner wheel, which leaves the ground first.
(b) the outer wheel, which leaves the ground first.
(c) both the wheels leaves the ground simultaneously.
(d) either wheel, which leaves the ground first.

Unit-III (LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION)

Solutions
1. For motion, there should be external force.

2. as = 0 so
3. Due to inertia of direction.
4. The package in the accelerated car (a non inertial frame) experiences a
Pseudo force in a direction opposite to that of the motion of the car. The
frictional force on the package which acts opposite to this pseudo force is
thus in the same direction (forward) as that of the car.
5. To decrease the impact of force by increasing the time for which force acts.
6.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 113

 7. Rolling friction is less than sliding friction.
8. Both during its upward and downward motion, the ball continues to move
inertia of motion with the same horizontal velocity as the train. In this
period, the ball covers the same horizontal distance as the train and so it
comes back to the thrower’s hand.
9. As F = rate change of momentum
F = 1kg-m/s2 = 1N
10. As the friction between the tyres and road reduces on a rainy day.
11. To conserve momentum.
12. Being heavier, cricket ball has higher rate of change of momentum during
motion so more force sumed.
13. As s t, so acceleration a = 0, therefore, no external force is acting on the
body.
14. Use formula I = change in momentum = m(v – u)
(Ans. – 37500 Ns)
15. To reduce friction and so to reduce wear & tear.
16. Force of friction between the tyre and road provides centripetal force.
17. Yes, if the external forces acting on the body can be represented in magnitude
and direction by the sides of a closed polygon taken in the same order.
18. As F = ma so for given a, more force will be required to put a large mass in
motion.
19.
longer jump.
20.
21.

mud does not spiral the clothes of passer by the wheels are provided with
mudguards .
22. The straw paper between the China ware increases the Time of experiencing
the jerk during transportation. Hence impact of force reduces on China
wares.
23. Less reaction force.

114 Physics Class XI

24. In addition to the frictional force, a component of reaction force also
provides centripetal force.
25. Weight of the water and bucket is used up in providing the necessary
centripetal force at the top of the circle.
26. So that in addition of the frictional force, the horizontal component of the
normal reaction also provides the necessary centripetal forces.
27. Impulse and change in momentum are along the same direction. Therefore
angle between these two vectors is zero.
28. Due to inertia of motion.

29. As F

when F = 0, = 0 so P = constant

30. F = 36 dyne at an angle of 60°

Fx = F cos 60° = 18 dyne
Fx = max

So ax = = 1 cm/s2

31. h =
a h twice w.r.t.
a=g
as F = ma so F = mg (answer)
32. As F = ma so F = – kx = ma

a=
for x = 20 cm, a = – 10 m/s2
33. Initial momentum = 0
using conservation of linear momentum
mv + MV = 0

V=
V = 2·5 m/s

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 115

34. When there is no friction, the block slides down the inclined plane with
acceleration.
a = g sin
when there is friction, the downward acceleration of the block is
a´ = g (sin – cos )
As the block slides a distance d in each case so

d= =

= = = n2

or = n2

Solving, we get (Using = 45°)

35. (i) R = m (g – a)
weight = 49 N

so m= = 5 kg
R = 5 (9·8 – 5)
R = 24N
(ii) R = m (g + a)
R = 5 (9·8 + 5)
R = 74 N
(iii) as a = 0 so R = mg = 49N
38. (i) Parabolic, (ii) vertically downwards
41.

Uuto point A, f = F (50 Long as block is stationary)

beyond A, when F increases, block starts moving f remains constant.

116 Physics Class XI

42. (i) Thread AB breaks down
(ii) CD will break.

43.

For the block not to fall f = Mg

But f = R = F so
F = Mg

F= .

44. Use F = ma

a= = = 50 cm/s2
F = 500 × 50 = 25,000 dyne.

45. F = 98 N, R = 45 × 9·8 = 441 N

2 = = 0.22
Angle of friction = tan–1 = tan–1 0·22 = 12°24

46. Force of friction = 0·5 N per quintal

f = 0·5 × 2000 = 1000 N
m = 2000 quintals = 2000 × 100 kg

sin = , a = 2 m/s2
In moving up an inclined plane, force required against gravity
= mg sin = 39200 N
And force required to produce acceleration = ma
= 2000 × 100 × 2 = 40,0000 N
Total force required = 1000 + 39,200 + 40,0000
= 440200 N.

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 117

47. Suppose, a = acceleration produced if m1 and m2 are tied together,
F = 100 N
Let a1 and a2 be the acceleration produced in m1 and m2, respectively.
a1 = 10 ms–2, a2 = 20 ms–2 (given)

Again m1 = and m2 =

m1 = = 10 ms–2

and m2 = = 5 ms–2
m1 + m2 = 10 + 5 = 15

So, a= = =

= 6.67 ms–2

48. Case (a) : a =

Case (b) : FBD of mass m

ma = T – mg
ma = 2mg – mg
ma = mg

So in case (b) acceleration of m is more.

49. (a) For t < 0. No force as Particles is at rest.

For t > 4s, No force again particle comes at rest.
For 0 < t < 4s, as slope of OA is constant so velocity constant
i.e., a = 0, so force must be zero.

118 Physics Class XI

 (b) Impulse at t = 0
Impulse = change in momentum
I = m(v – u) = 4(0 – 0·75) = 3 kg ms–1
Impulse at t = 4s
I = m (v – u) = 4 (0 – 0.75) = – 3 kg ms–1

50. Free body diagram of the block

30 – T = 3a ...(i)

Free body diagram of the trolley

T – fk = 20 a ...(ii)
where fk = k N = 0·04 × 20 × 10 = 8 N
Solving (i) & (ii),
a = 0·96 m/s2 and T = 27·2 N

51. All the blocks more with common acceleration a under the force F = 60 N.
F = (m1 + m2 + m3)a

a= = 1 m/s2
To determine, T1 Free body diagram of mass m1.

T1 = m1a = 10 × 1 = 10 N

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 119

 To determine, T2 – Free body diagram of m3.

F – T2 = m3a
Solving, we get T2 = 30 N

52. Force on the box due to accelerated motion of the truck

F = ma = 40 × 2 = 80 N
(in forward direction)
Reaction on the box, F´ = F = 80 N (in backward direction)
Force of limiting friction, f = R = 0·15 × 40 × 10 = 60 N
Net force on the box in backward direction is P = F´ – f
= 80 – 60 = 20 N

Backward acceleration in the box = a = = = 0·5 ms–1

t = time taken by the box to travel s
s=

5=
t = 4·47s
If the truck travels a distance x during this time
then x = 0 × 4·34 +
x = 19·98 m

53. Use s=

a= as u = 0

Putting the value and solving, = 0·11

120 Physics Class XI

54. opter by the crew and passengers
= apparent weight of crew and passengers
= 500 (10 + 15)
= 12500 N
(b) Action of rotor of helicopter on surrounding air is Obviously vertically
downwards, because helicopter rises on account of reaction of this
force. Thus force of action
= (2000 + 500) (10 + 15)
= 2500 × 25
= 62,500 N
(c) Force on the helicopter due to surrounding air is obviously a reaction.
As action and reaction are equal and opposite, therefore
Force of reaction F´ = 62,500 vertically upwards.
55. (a) When the box just starts sliding
= tan
or = tan–1
(b) Force acting on the box down the plane
= mg (sin – cos )

(c) Force needed mg (sin + cos )

(d) Force needed = mg (sin + cos ) + ma.

56. According Newton’s second law of motion

(i) T1 – (m1 + m2)g = (m1 + m2)a
T1 = (m1 + m2)(a + g)
= (5 + 3) (2 + 9·8)
T1 = 94·4 N

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 121

 (ii) T2 – m2g = m2a
T2 = m2 (a + g)
T2 = 3(2 + 9·8)
T2 = 35·4 N
57. Using Resolution of forces 1N and 2N and then applying laws of vector
addition.
Calculate for F1 & F2.

F1 = , F2 =

58. Given m = mass of bullet = 50 gm = 0.50 kg

M = mass of tiger = 60 kg
v = Velocity of bullet = 150 m/s
V = Velocity of tiger = – 10m/s
( It is coming from opposite direction n
at the tiger so as to stop it.)
Pi
Pf = n(mv) + MV ...(ii)
From the law of conservation of momentum,
Pi = pf
0 = n(mv) + MV

n=

= = 80.

59.

122 Physics Class XI

 Let a be the acceleration of the system and T be the Tension in the string.
Equations of motions for 5 kg and 2 kg blocks are
5g – T = 5a ...(1)
T – 2g sin – f = 2a ...(2)
where f = force of limiting friction
= R= mg cos = 0·3 × 2g × cos 30°
Solving (1) & (2),
a = 4·87 m/s2
T = 24·65 N.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (d)

6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (b)

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (d)
ii. (c) Because acceleration is zero, observed weight = actual weight
g
iii. (b) Net force = mg – R = m
4
3mg 3× 60
R= = g
4 4
= 45 gN.
iv. (b) Net force =
R=0N
mg
v. (b) Net force = R – mg =
2
3mg 3× 60
R= = g
2 2
= 90 gN.
2. i. (a)
ii. (c)

iii. (d)

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 123

 sR

sR amax = sg
sg = 0.15 × 10 = 1.5 ms–2
v. (b) Let the mass of block C is m
For block A, R = (m1+m)
T = fs = R = (m+m1)g
To avoid slipping of A, For block B
T = m2g
or (m+m1) = m2
0.2(m+10) = 5 m = 15 kg
3. i. (b)
ii. (c) Impulse = change in momentum = mv – mu
= m(v–u) = 0.15[12–(–12)]
= 3.6 Ns

iii. (a) Impulse = change in momentum = m(v–u)

3
= 0 = –3 kg ms1
3 4
v = 0 m/s, u = m/s
4
iv. (d) Impulse = change in momentum = m(v–u)
= 0.04 [–0.01 – 0.01]
= –8 × 10–4 kg m/s
0 2
v= = –1 cm/s = –0.01 m/s,
4 2
2 0
u= = 1 cm/s = 0.01 m/s
2 0
v. (b) Impulse = change in momentum
= mvcos60° – (–mvcos60°)
1
= 2mvcos60° = 2 × 3 × 10 × = 30 Ns
2

4. i. (a) ii. (d) iii. (b) iv. (c) v. (a)

124 Physics Class XI

 LAWS OF MOTION (MCQ's)
1. The maximum velocity (in m/s) with which a car driver must transverse

skidding is
(a) 60 (b) 30
(c) 15 (d) 25
m 2m F is ;
(a) F/3 (b) F/6
(c) F/2 (d) 2F

3. A particle moves in x-y plane under the action of force F (p)

such that
F (p) at any instant t is px = 2 cos t and
the value of its linear momentum
py = 2 sin t. The angle F
(p)(p)at a given time t will be-
between F and
(a) 90° (b) 0°
(c) 180° (d) 30°

4. Three forces A i j k, B 2i j 3k and C are acting on a body to keep

it in equilibrium. Then C is

(a) (3i 4k) (4i 3k) 3i (3i

4k(b)4k)
2i 3k(4i 3k) 3i 4k 2i 3k

(3i 4k) (4i (c)3k) 3i 4k(3i 2i4k)3k (4i 3k) 3i (d)4k 2i 3k

5. The objects at rest suddenly explodes into three parts with the mass ratio
2:1:1. The parts of equal masses moves at right angles to each other with
equal speeds. The speed of the third part after the explosion will be
V V
(a) 2v (b)
2
V V
(c) (d) 2
2
6. Two Iron blocks of equal masses but with double surface area slide down an

area A experience a friction force f, then the second block with surface area
2A will experiences a frictional force.
(a) f/2 (b) f (c) 2f (d) 4f

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 125

7. A body of mass M starts sliding down an Inclined plane where critical angle


Mg
(a) (b) 2 3 Mg 3 

3
2 (c)
3 Mg 3 (d) None of these
 

8. Three block of masses m1, m2 & M3 are connected by mass less stings as
shown on a frictionless table.
  
  

They are pulled with a force T3 = 40N, If m1=10 kg, m2=6 kg, & m3=4 kg,
then tension T2 will be
(a) 20 N (b) 40 N
(c) 10 (d) 32 N
9. If the tension in the cable supporting an elevator is equal to the weight of
elevator, the elevator my be
(a) going up with increasing speed
(b) going down with increasing speed
(c) going up with uniform speed
(d) elevator falls freely under gravity
10. A graph is drawn with a force along y-axis and time along x-axis. The area
under the graph represent–
(a) Momentum (b) Couple
(c) Moment of the force (d) Impulse of the force
11. In a game of tug of wars, a condition of equilibrium exists. Both the team
pull the rope with a force of 104N. The tension in the rope is –
(a) 104 N (b) 108 N
(c) 0N (d) 2×104 N

126 Physics Class XI

 12. A bullet of mass m moving with a speed v strikes a wooden block of mass

M m m M m m
(a) M mV M m M Mm(b) V
m 2 M m M m 2
M m m V
(c) V (d)
M m M m M m 2 2

For the system to remain in equilibrium, the angle should be

(a) 0° (b) 30°

(c) 45° (d) 60°
14. If two forces are acting at a point such that the magnitude of each force is
2N and the magnitude of their resultant is also 2N, then the angle between
the two forces is
(a) 120° (b) 60°
(c) 90° (d) 0°
15. The dimensions of action are
(a) [M L T–2] (b) [M2 L T–3]
(c) [M L T–1] (d) [ML2 T–1]

addition of two forces F1 & F2 to yield the third force F3?

  
   
   
  
 

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 127

17. A car when passes through a bridge exerts a force on it which is equal to
mv 2 mv 2
(a) mg + (c)
r r
mv 2
(c) mg – (d) None of these
r

shown the impulse at t = 2s is


(a) 0.2 kg m/s 

(b) –0.2 kg m/s
(c) 0.1 kg m/s    
(d) –0.4 kg m/s 

19. A particle revolves round a circular path. The acceleration of the particle is
inversely proportional to–
(a) radius (b) velocity
(c) mass of particle (d) both (b) & (c)
20. If Maximum and minimum values of the resultant of two forces acting at a
point are 7N and 3N respectively, the smaller force is equal to
(a) 4N (b) 5N
(c) 3N (d) 2N
Answer Key :
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b)
7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (a) 12. (c)
13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (b)
19. (a) 20. (d)

HINTS AND EXPLANATIONS :

1. rg 0.6 150 10 30 m / s

2. 2ma = F–T –––– (1) Solve T = F/3

ma = T –––– (2)
3. p px 2 py 2 4 cos 2 t 4sin 2 t 2 (constant), As p remains constant,

(p) at right angleFto(p).

F acts
128 Physics Class XI
4. Since body is in equilibrium

A B C O
C –(A B) – [i j k 2i j 3k]
– [3i 0 j 4k) – (3i 4k)
5. Resultant momentum of two part of equal mass
p1 (m ) 2 (m ) 2 2m
ut v1 = speed of third part of mass 2 m
Acc. to Law of conservation of momentum
1
(2 m ) 2 m
1 2
2 2

6. Frictional force is independent of area of contact.

7. tan 60 3
T3 40
8. Net acceleration 2 m / s2
m1 m2 m3 20

T2 (m1 m 2 ) a 16 2 32 N

9. Impulse = F dt

12. By law of conservation of momentum

m M(0) (m M) V
m
V
m M
13. For equilibrium of mass m, T = mg –––– (1)
For equilibrium of mass 2m

2T cos = mg –––––– (2)

2m

Solve (1) & (2)

1
cos = 2
,

Newton's Law Of Motion And Friction 129

14. P = Q 2N, R = 2N
R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2PQ Cos
4 = 4 + 4 + 2(4) Cos
4 1
cos , 120
8 2
15. Action = Force
= [M L T–2]

17. F = mg –
mv 2
r
18. Impulse
= change in momentum
= m(v–u)
= 0.1 (0–2) = –0.2 kg m/s

V2
19. a
r
1
a
r
20. F max. = P + Q = 7N –––––– (1)
F min. = P – Q = 3N –––––– (2)
From (1) & (2)
P Q 7 P Q 7
P Q 3 5 Q 7
2P 10 Q=2N
P 5N

****

130 Physics Class XI

4.1 Introduction
Work is said to be done when a force applied on the body displaces the body
through a certain distance in the direction of force.

4.2 Work Done by a Constant Force

Let a constant force F be applied on the body such that it makes an angle
with the horizontal and body is displaced through a distance s.
Then work done by the force in displacing the body through a distance s is
given by
W = (F cos ) s = Fs cos W = (F cos ) s = Fs cos

W=

4.3 Nature of Work Done

Positive work Negative work

Positive work means that force (or its Negative work means that force (or its
component) is parallel to displacement component) is opposite to displacement
0º < 90º i.e., 90º < 180º

The positive work signifies that the external The negative work signifies that the
external force favours the motion force opposes the motion of the body.
of the body.

Work, Energy And Power 131

4.4 Work Done by a Variable Force
When the magnitude and direction of a force varies with position, the work
done by such a force for an infinite simal displacement is given by
dW = .

The total work done in going from A to B is W = .

Area under force displacement curve with proper algebraic sign represents
work done by the force.

4.5 Work Depends on Frame of Reference

With change of frame of reference (inertial) force does not change while

Examples : If a person is pushing a box inside a moving train, the work done
in the frame of train will while in the frame of earth will be
where is the displacement of the train relative to the ground.

4.6 Energy
its capacity for doing work.
(1) It is a scalar quantity.
(2) Dimension : [ML2 T–2] it is same as that of work or torque.
(3) Units : Joule [S.I.], erg [C.G.S.]
Practical units : electron volt (eV), Kilowatt hour (KWh), Calories (Cal)

1 Joule = 107 erg

1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 Joule
1 KWh = 3.6 × 106 Joule
1 Calorie = 4.18 Joule
(4) Mass energy equivalence : The relation between the mass of a particle
m and its equivalent energy is given as E = mc2 where c = velocity of
light in vacuum.

132 Physics Class XI

4.7 Kinetic Energy
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is called kinetic
energy.

Let m = mass of the body, v = velocity of the body then K.E. = .

(1) Kinetic energy depends on frame of reference : The kinetic energy
of a person of mass m, sitting in a train moving with speed v, is zero in

the frame of train but in the frame of the earth.

(2) Work-energy theorem : It states that work done by a force acting on a
body is equal to the change produced in the kinetic energy of the body.
This theorem is valid for a system in presence of all types of forces
(external or internal, conservative or non-conservative).
(3) Relation of kinetic energy with linear momentum : As we know

   

(4) Various graphs of kinetic energy

4.8 Kinetic Energy

 


4.9 Potential Energy

by conservative forces every point is associated with certain energy which is

called the energy of position or potential energy. Potential energy generally

Work, Energy And Power 133

 are of three types : Elastic potential energy and Gravitational potential energy
etc.
(1) Change in potential energy : Change in potential energy between any

the particle between these two points without any change in kinetic
energy.

U2 – U1 = ...(1)
(2) Potential energy curve : A graph plotted between the potential energy of
a particle and its displacement from the centre of force is called potential
energy curve. Negative gradient of the potential energy gives force.

= F

(5) Types of equilibrium : If net force acting on a particle is zero, it is said

to be in equilibrium.

For equilibrium, = 0, but the equilibrium of particle can be of three

types :
Stable Unstable Neutral
When a particle is displaced When a particle is displaced When a particle is slightly
slightly from a position, then slightly from a position, then displaced from a position
a force acting on it brings it a force acting on it tries to then it does not experience
back to the initial position, any force acting on it and
displace the particle further
it is said to be in stable continues to be in equili-
equilibrium position. away from the equilibrium brium in the displaced
position, it is said to be in position, it is said to be in
unstable equilibrium. neutral equilibrium.
Potential energy is minimum. Potential energy is maximum. Potential energy is constant.

i.e., rate of change of is i.e., rate of change of i.e., rate of change of

positive. is negative. is zero.
Example : A marble placed E x a m p l e : A m a r b l e Example : A marble placed
at the bottom of a hemi- balanced on top of a hemi- on horizontal table.
spherical bowl. spherical bowl.

134 Physics Class XI

4.10 Elastic Potential Energy
(1) Restoring force and spring constant : When a spring is stretched or
compressed from its normal position (x = 0) by a small distance x, a
restoring force is produced in the spring to bring it to the normal position.
According to Hooke’s law this restoring force is proportional to the
displacement x and its direction is always opposite to the displacement.

i.e.,

or = ...(i)
where k is called spring constant.
(2) Expression for elastic potential energy :

Elastic potential energy U=

Note :
If spring is stretched from initial position x1 x2 then
work done = Increment in elastic potential energy

(3) Energy graph for a spring : It mean kinetic energy changes parabolically
w.r.t. position but total energy remain always constant irrespective to
position of the mass.
4.11 Law of Conservation of Energy
(1) Law of conservation of energy : For an isolated system or body in
presence of conservative forces the sum of kinetic and potential energies
at any point remains constant throughout the motion. It does not depends
upon time. This is known as the law of conservation of mechanical energy.
(2) Law of conservation of total energy : If the forces are conservative
and non-conservative both, it is not the mechanical energy alone which

Work, Energy And Power 135

 is conserved, but it is the total energy, may be heat, light, sound or
mechanical etc., which is conserved.

4.12 Power

Average power (Pav) =

Instantaneous power (Pinst.) =

[As dW =

Pinst =
i.e., power is equal to the scalar product of force with velocity.
(1) Dimension : [P] = [ML2T–3]
(2) Units : Watt or Joule/sec [S.I.]
Practical Units : Kilowatt (kW), Mega watt (MW) and Horse power
(hp)
7 erg/sec
1hp = 746 Watt
(3) The slope of work time curve gives the instantaneous power. As
P = dW/dt = tan

(4) Area under power time curve gives the work done as P =
W =
W = Area under P – t curve

4.13 Collision
Collision is an isolated event in which a strong force acts between two or
more bodies for a short time as a result of which the energy and momentum of
the interacting particle change.
In collision particles may or may not come in real touch.
(3) Types of collision : (i) On the basis of conservation of kinetic energy.

136 Physics Class XI

 Perfectly Inelastic collision Perfectly inelastic
Elastic collision collision
If in a collision, kinetic If in a collision kinetic If in a collision two bodies
energy after collision is energy after collision stick together or move
equal to kinetic energy is not equal to kinetic with same velocity after
before collision, the energy before collision, the collision, the collision
collision is said to be the collision is said to is said to be perfectly
perfectly elastic. inelastic. inelastic.
Coefficient of restitution
e=1 0<e<1 e=0
H er e ki net i c ene rgy The term ‘perfectly
appears in other forms. inelastic’ does not
In some cases (KE) < necessarily mean that all
(KE)initial such as when the initial kinetic energy is
initial KE is converted lost, it implies that the loss
into internal energy of the in kinetic energy is as large
(KE) = (KE)initial product (as heat, elastic as it can be. (Consistent
or excitation) while in with momentum conser-
other cases (KE) final > vation).
(KE)initial such as when
internal energy stored in
the colliding particles is
released.
Examples : (1) Collision Examples : (1) Collision Example : Collision
between atomic particles between two billiard balls. between a bullet and a
(2) Bouncing of ball with (2) Collision between two block of wood into which
same velocity after the automobile on a road.
collision with earth. In fact all majority of remains embeded in the
collision belong to this block.
category.

4.14 Perfectly Elastic Head on Collision

Let two bodies of masses m1 and m2

moving initial velocities u1 and u2 in the
same direction they collide such that after
v1 and
v2 respectively.

Work, Energy And Power 137

 According to law of conservation of momentum and conservation of kinetic
energy.
Note :
The ratio of relative velocity of separation and relative velocity of

e = or v2 – v1 = e (u1 – u2).
For perfectly elastic collision e = 1
v2 – v1 = u1 – u2 [As shown in eq. (vi)]
For perfectly inelastic collision e = 0
v2 – v1 = 0 or v2 = v1
It means that two body stick together and move with same velocity.
For inelastic collision 0 < e < 1
v2 – v1 = (u1 – u2)
In short we can say that e is the degree of elasticity of collision and it is
dimension less quantity.

v1 = ...(vii)

v2 = ...(viii)

When two bodies of equal masses undergo head on elastic collision,

their velocities get interchanged.

(2) Kinetic energy transfer during head on elastic collision : Fractional

decrease in kinetic energy

= ...(iv)

Note :

and vice versa.

Transfer of kinetic energy in head on elastic collision (when target is at

rest) is maximum when the masses of particles are equal.

138 Physics Class XI

4.15 Motion in Vertical Circle
This is an example of non-uniform circular motion. In this motion body is

(1) Velocity at any point on vertical

loop : If u is the initial velocity imparted
to body at lowest point then, velocity of
body at height h is given by

where l is the length of the string.

(2) Tension at any point on vertical loop : Tension at general point P,

T=

(3) Various conditions for vertical motion :

Velocity at lowest Condition

point

Tension in the string will not be zero at any of the point and
body will continue the circular motion.

Tension at highest point C will be zero and body will just

complete the circle.

Particle will not follow circular motion. Tension in string

become zero somewhere between points B and C whereas
velocity remain positive. Particle leaves circular path and
follow parabolic trajectory.

Both velocity and tension in the string becomes zero between

A and B and particle will oscillate along semi-circular path.

Velocity of particle becomes zero between A and B but

tension will not be zero and the particle will oscillate about
the point A.

Work, Energy And Power 139

positions :

VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 MARK)

1.
each.
2. A light and heavy body have same linear momentum. Which one has greater
kinetic energy?
3. How much work is done by a coolie walking a horizon lat platform with a
load on his head?
4. A body is moving along a circular path. How much work is done by the
centripetal force ?
5. Which spring has greater value of spring constant – a hard spring or a delicate
spring ?
6. Two bodies stick together after collision. What type of collision is in between
these two bodies ?
7. State the two conditions under which a force does no work ?
8. How will the momentum of a body changes if its K.E. is doubled ?
9. K.E. of a body is increased by 300 %. Find the % increase in its momentum ?
10. A light and a heavy body have same K.E., which of the two have more
momentum and why ?

140 Physics Class XI

11. Does the P.E. of a spring decreases or increases when it is compressed or
stretched ?
12. Name a process in which momentum changes but K.E. does not.
13. What happens to the P.E. of a bubble when it rises in water ?
14. A body is moving at constant speed over a frictionless surface. What is the
work done by the weight of the body ?
15.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
16. The momentum of body is doubled. What % does it K.E. charge?
17. Mountain roads orally go straight up the slope but wind up gradually.
Why?
18. A truck and a car moving with the same K.E. on a straight road. Their engines

19. Is it necessary that work done in the motion of a body over a closed loop is
zero for every force in nature ? Why?
20. Derive an expression for K.E. of a body of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity
‘v’ by calculus method.
21. How high must a body be lifted to gain an amount of P.E. equal to the K.E. it
has when moving at speed 20 ms–1. (The value of acceleration due to gravity
at a place is 9.8 ms–2).
22. Give an example in which a force does work on a body but fails to change
its K.E.
23. A bob is pulled sideway so that string becomes parallel to horizontal and
released. Length of the pendulum is 2 m. If due to air resistance loss of energy
is 10%, what is the speed with which the bob arrived at the lowest point.
24. Two springs A and B are identical except that A is harder than B (KA > KB)
if these are stretched by the equal force. In which spring will more work be
done ?
25. Two springs A and B are identical except that A is harder than B i.e., KA >
KB. In which spring is more work expanded if they are stretched by same
amount?
26. Find the work done if a particle moves from position r1 (3iˆ 2 ˆj 6kˆ) to a

position r2 (14iˆ 13 ˆj 9kˆ) F (4iˆ ˆj + 3kˆ) N .

Work, Energy And Power 141

27. A ball at rest is dropped from a height of 12 m. It loses 25% of its kinetic

you account for the loss in kinetic energy ?

28. State and prove work energy theorem.
29. Which of the two kilowatt hour or electron volt is a bigger unit of energy
and by what factor ?
30. A spring of force constant K is cut into two equal pieces. Calculate force
constant of each part.

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)

31. A elastic spring is compressed by an amount x. Show that its P.E. is 1/2 kx2
where k is the spring constant.

32. A car of mass 2000 kg is lifted up a distance of 30 m by a crane in 1 min. A

second crane does the same job in 2 min. Do the cranes consume the same

Neglect Power dissipation against friction.

33. Prove that bodies of identical masses exchange their velocities after head-on
elastic collision.

34. A bullet of mass 0.012 kg and horizontal speed 70 m/s strikes a block of
wood of mass 0.4 kg and instantly comes to rest w.r.t. the block. The block is
suspended from the ceiling by wire. Calculate the height to which the block
rises. Also, estimate the amount of heat produced in the block.

35.
more massive body at rest. Prove that the direction of lighter body is reversed
and massive body remains at rest.

36. 20 J work is required to stretch a spring through 0.1 m. Find the force constant
of the spring. If the spring is further stretched through 0.1 m. Calculate work
done.

37. A body of mass M at rest is struck by a moving body of mass m. Prove that
fraction of the initial K.E. of the mass m transferred to the struck body is
4 m M/(m + M)2 in an elastic collision.

142 Physics Class XI

38.
of volume 30 m3 in 15 min. If the tank is 40 m above the ground, how

is 30%.
39. Show that in an elastic one dimensional collision the relative velocity of
approach before collision is equal to the relative velocity of separation after
collision.
40. A ball bounces to 80% of its original height. Calculate the mechanical energy
lost in each bounce.
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)
41. Show that at any instant of time during the motion total mechanical energy
of a freely falling body remains constant. Show graphically the variation of
K.E. and P.E. during the motion.
42.
elongation of a spring. Derive the relation for the P.E. stored when it is
elongated by X. Draw the graphs to show the variation of P.E. and force with
elongation.
43.
? Two particles of mass m1 and m2 having velocities U1 and U2 respectively

the following special cases.

(i) m1 = m2
(ii) m1 >> m2 and U2 = 0
(iii) m1 << m2 and U1 = 0
NUMERICALS
44. A body is moving along z

constant force F = Find the work done by the force in moving

the body a distance of 2 m along z-axis.
45. Water is pumped out of a well 10 m deep by means of a pump rated 10 KW.
00 kg of water is pumped out every
2
minute. Take g = 10 m/s .
46. A railway carriage of mass 9000 kg moving with a speed of 36 km h–1 collides
with a stationary carriage of same mass. After the collision, the carriages get
coupled and move together. What is their common speed after collision ?
What type of collision is this ?
Work, Energy And Power 143
47. In lifting a 10 kg weight to a height of 2m, 230 J energy is spent. Calculate
the acceleration with which it was raised ?
48. A bullet of mass 0.02 kg is moving with a speed of 10 ms–1. It can penetrate
10 cm of a wooden block, and comes to rest. If the thickness of the target

49. A man pulls a lawn roller through a distance of 20 m with a force of 20 kg

weight. If he applies the force at an angle of 60º with the ground, calculate
the power developed if he takes 1 min in doing so.
50. A body of mass 0.3 kg is taken up an inclined plane to length 10 m and height

friction between the body and the plane is 0.15. What is the
(i) work done by the gravitational force over the round trip.
(ii) work done by the applied force over the upward journey.
(iii) work done by frictional force over the round trip.
(iv) kinetic energy of the body at the end of the trip.

51. Two identical 5 kg blocks are moving with same speed of 2 ms–1 towards each
other along a frictionless horizontal surface. The two blocks collide, stick
together and come to rest. Consider the two blocks as a system. Calculate
work done by (i) external forces and (i) Internal forces.
52. A truck of mass 1000 kg accelerates uniformly from rest to a velocity of
15 ms–1 in 5 seconds. Calculate (i) its acceleration, (ii) its gain in K.E.,
(iii) average power of the engine during this period, neglect friction.
53. An elevator which can carry a maximum load of 1800 kg (elevator +
passengers) is moving up with a constant speed of 2 ms–1. The frictional force
opposing the motion is 4000 N. Determine the minimum power delivered by
the motor to the elevator in watts as well as in horse power.
54. To simulate car accidents, auto manufacturers study the collisions of

a typical simulation with a car of mass 1000 kg moving with a speed

18.0 kmh–1 on a smooth road and colliding with a horizontally mounted spring of
spring constant 6.25 × 10–3 Nm–1. What is the maximum compression of
the spring.

144 Physics Class XI

 MCQ (Work, Energy and Power)
55. A man is squatting on the ground gets straight up and stand. The force of
reaction of ground on the man during the process is
(a) constant and equal to 'mg' in magnitude.
(b) constant and greater than 'mg' in magnitude.
(c) variable but always greater than 'mg'

56. A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in straight line with velocity V = ax3/2 where
a = 5 m–½ s–1. The work done by the net force during it's displacement from
x = 0 to x = 2m is
(a) 15 J (b) 50 J
(c) 10 J (d) 100 j
57. A mass of 5 kg is moving along a circular path of radius 1 m. If the mass
moves with 300 rev/min. it's kinetic energy would be
(a) 250 2 (b) 100 2

(c) 5 2 (d) 0
58. An Athlete in the Olympic games covers a distance of 100 m in 10s, this
kinetic energy can be estimated to be in the range (assume m = 60 kg)
(a) 200J – 500 J (b) 2×105J – 3×105J
(c) 20000J – 50000J (d) 2000J – 5000J
59. A block of mass 0.5 kg is moving with a speed of 2m/s on a smooth surface.
It strikes another mass of 1 kg at rest and then they move together as a single
body. The energy loss during the collision is
(a) 0.16J (b) 1.00 J
(c) 0.67 J (d) 0.34J
60.
distance of 3 cm. How much further it will penetrate before coming to rest
assuming that if faces constant resistance to it's motion?
(a) 3 cm (b) 2.0 cm
(c) 1.5 cm (d) 1.0 cm

Work, Energy And Power 145

61. A uniform chain of length 2m is kept on a table such that a length of 60 cm
hangs freely from the edge of the table. The total mass of the chain is 4 kg.
What is the work done in pulling the entire chain on the table?
(a) 7.2 J (b) 3.6 J
(c) 120 J (d) 1200 J
62. If the linear momentum is increased by 50%, then kinetic energy will
increase by
(a) 50% (b) 100%
(c) 125% (d) 25%
63. A block having mass 'm' collides with another stationary block having mass

(a) 0.5 (b) 0.4

(c) 0.6 (d) 0.8
64. A body of mass 50 kg is at rest. The work done to accelerate it by 20 m/s in
10 s is
(a) 103 J (b) 104 J
(c) 2×103 J (d) 4×104 J
65. A spring of force constant 800 Nm–1 has an extension of 5 cm. The work
done in extending it from 5 cm to 15 cm is
(a) 16 J (b) 8 J
(c) 35 J (d) 24 J
66. A particle is projected at an angle of 60° to the horizontal with a kinetic
energy E. The kinetic energy at the highest point is
(a) E (b) E/4
(c) E/2 (d) Zero
67. A child is sitting on a swing. Its minimum and maximum heights from the
ground 0.75 m and 2 m respectively, it's maximum speed will be
(a) 10 m s–1 (b) 5 m s–1
(c) 8 m/s (d) 15 m s–1

146 Physics Class XI

68. 300 J of work is done in sliding a 2 kg block up on inclined plane of height
10 m. Work done against friction is (g = 10 ms–2)
(a) 1000 J (b) 200 J
(c) 100 J (d) Zero
69. During inelastic collision between two bodies, which of the following
quantities always remain conserved
(a) Total kinetic energy (b) Total mechanical energy
(c) Total linear momentum (d) Speed of each body
70. Two bodies with kinetic energies in the ratio 4 : 1 are moving with equal
linear momentum. The ratio of their masses is
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 1
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4
71. A position dependent force, F = 7 – 2x + 3x2 N acts on a small body of mass
2 kg and displaces it from x = 0 to x = 5 m. The work done in joule is
(a) 135 (b) 270
(c) 35 (d) 70
72.
is 'e'. After one bounce the maximum height is
(a) e2 h (b) e h
(c) eh (d) eh

73. How much water a pump of 2 KW can raise in one minute to a height of 10
m? (g = 10 ms)?
(a) 1000 litres (b) 1200 litres
(c) 10 litres (d) 2000 litres
74. A bomb of mass 30 kg at rest explodes in to two pieces of masses 18 kg and
12 kg. The velocity of 18 kg mass is 6 ms–1. The kinetic energy of the other
mass is
(a) 324 J (b) 486 J
(c) 256 J (d) 5245 J

Work, Energy And Power 147

 ASSERTION AND REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
(Work, Power and Energy)
Directions:- The following questions consist of two statements each, labelled
as Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). While answering these
questions. You are required to choose any of the following four options
(a), (b), (c) & (d).
(a) If both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) If both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A.
(c) If A is true but R is false.
(d) If A is false and R is also false/True.

1. Assertion (A) : When two equal masses undergo a glancing elastic collision
in 2D with one of them at rest, then after the collision, they will be at 90°
to each other.
Reason (R) : It follows from the principle of conservation of linear
momentum.
2. Assertion (A) : According to law of conservation of mechanical energy,
change in potential energy is equal to and opposite for the change kinetic
energy.
Reason (R) : Mechanical energy is not a conserved quantity.
3. Assertion (A) : Friction is a non-conservative force.
Reason (R) : This is because work done against friction in moving a body
over a curved path is never zero.
4. Assertion (A) : Mass and energy are not conserved separately, but are
conserved as a single entity called mass-energy.
Reason (R) : This is because one can be obtained at the cost of the other
as per Einstein equation (E = mc2).

5. Assertion (A) : Work done by the centripetal free in moving a body along
a circle is always zero.
Reason (R) : Because displacement of the body is along the force.

6. Assertion (A) : A spring has potential energy, both when it is compressed

or stretched.
Reason (R) : This is because in compressing or stretching work is done
by the spring against the restoring force.

148 Physics Class XI

 7. Assertion (A) : Graph between potential energy of a spring v/s the
extension / compression (x) of the spring is a straight line.
Reason (R) : Potential energy is directly proportional to x.

8. Assertion (A) : In an elastic collision between the two bodies, the relative
speed of the bodies after collisions is equal to the relative speed before
the collision.
Reason (R) : In a elastic collision the linear momentum of the system is
conserved.

9. Assertion (A) : Work done by the frictional force is negative.

Reason (R) : Frictional force acts along the direction of motion.

10. Assertion (A) : A body cannot have energy without possessing momentum
but it can have momentum without having energy.
Reason (R) : Momentum and energy have same dimensions.

11. Assertion (A) : Time taken by a body to complete a given work has nothing
to do with energy of the body.
Reason (R) : Power of a body is the rate of doing work.

12. Assertion (A) : Two particles moving in the same direction do not lose
all their energy in a perfectly inelastic collision.
Reason (R) : Principle of conservation of linear momentum holds true
for all kind of collisions.

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

Work :-
Q1. The term work is frequently used in everybody language. A farmer

student studying for a competitive examination, an artist painting a beautiful

landscape. All are said to be working but in the language of physics they
are not doing any work! In physics however the word 'Work' covers a

& power is the rate of doing work.

Though work is scalar quantity, yet its value may positive, negative
and Zero.

Work, Energy And Power 149

 (a) Product of component of force in the direction of displacement
and the magnitude of displacement.
(b) Product of component of force perpendicular to the direction of
displacement and its magnitude of the displacement.
(c) Cross product of force vector and displacement vector.
(d) Product of the component of the force in the direction of
displacement and magnitude of velocity.

(ii) Which of the following is not an example of zero work done -

(a) Work done by centripetal force.
(b) Work done by tension in a spring of simple pendulum.
(c) Word done by a frictional force.
(d) The work done in pushing a immovable stone.

(iii) A body is subjected to a constant force.

F iˆ 2 ˆj 3kˆ ( N ) is constrained to move along the z axis of a
coordinate system. The work done by the force in moving the body
though a distance of 4m along z axis is
(a) 12 J (b) –12 J (c) 0 J (d) 16 J

(iv) When a body is thrown up, during the upward journey the work done
by gravity an the body is
(a) + Positive (b) Zero (c) negative (d) cannot say
(v) A body is initially at rest. It undergoes one-dimensional motion
with constant acceleration. The power delivered to it at time t is
proportional to
(a) t1/2 (b) t (c) t 3/2 (d) t2

Conservative Forces & Non-conservative Forces, Transformation &

Conservation of energy :-
Q2. The process of changing or converting one form of energy into another
form is known as transformation of energy. We know, mechanical energy
of a system is conserved, if forces acting on it are conservative forces.
However, if a system is acted upon by conservative & non-conservative
forces, then some of the mechanical energy of the system is converted

150 Physics Class XI

into other forms of energy like sound, heat & hight energies but total
mechanical energy of the system remains constant. Mechanical energy is the
1
sum of kinetic energy & potential energy where K.E = mv 2 and potential
2
energy = mgh, where symbols have usual meanings.
(i) Which one the following is non-conservative force?
(a) gravitational force (b) electrostatic force
(c) magnetic force (d) frictional force

(ii) A body falling freely under the action of gravity alone in vacuum.
Which of the following quantities remains constant during the fall :-
(a) kinetic energy
(b) potential energy
(c) total mechanical energy
(d) total linear momentum

(iii) A mass of 5 kg is moving along a circular path of radius 1 m. If mass

moves with 300 rev./min., its KE would be
(a) 250 2J (b) 100 2 J (c) 5 2 J (d) 0 J
(iv) In which case the potential energy decreases ?
(a) on compressing the string
(b) on stretching the string
(c) on moving a body against gravitational pull
(d) on rising of an air bubble in water
(v) The bob of simple pendulum is held in the horizontal position A.
Assuming no loss of energy, speed of bob at the lowest position B
when released is 
 
(a) 9.8 m/s
(b) 9.8 m/s
(c) 0 m/s

(d) 2 9.8 m/s

Work, Energy And Power 151

 Motion in a Vertical Circle :-
Q3. A uniform circular motion is the motion of a particle travelling at a
constant (uniform) speed along circular path and hence its kinetic energy
remain same everywhere. But when a particle moves in a vertical circle
completing the loop, then its speed goes on changing at every point &
hence, its kinetic energy goes on changing but total mechanical energy
remains constant.
(i) Uniform circular motion is a example of
(a) accelerated motion
(b) uniform motion
(c) non-accelerated motion
(d) None of the above

(ii) The minimum velocity with which a body of mass m must enter a
vertical loop of radius r, so that it can complete the loop is
(a) 2gr (b) 3gr (c) gr (d) 5gr

(iii) A bucket of water of mass m is rotated in a vertical circle of radius r

such that the bucket is upside down at the highest point. The minimum
angular velocity so that the water does not spill out is
r g
(a) w (b) w (c) w rg (d) w 3rg
g r

(iv) Particle of mass m executing a circular motion in a vertical plane (of

radius r) has the tension in the string at the lowest point equal to
(a) TL = mg (b) TL = 0
mv2L mv 2L
(c) TL = + mg (d) TL = – mg
r r
(v) The ratio of kinetic energy at the lowest point to the kinetic energy of
the highest point of a vertical circle of radius r looping by a particle
of mass m is
(a) 1 : 5 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 3 : 1 (d) 5 : 1

Collision :-
Q4. The laws of momentum & energy conservation are successfully applied
to a commonly encountered phenomenon; namely – collisions. Several

152 Physics Class XI

games such as billiards, marble or carom involve collisions. In all types of
collisions; the linear momentum is conserved, on the other hand the total
kinetic energy of the system is not necessarily conserved. The impact &
deformation during collision may generate heat & sound.
The degree of elasticity of a collision is determined by a quantity called

(i) In an elastic collision

(a) both momentum & kinetic energy are conserved
(b) both momentum & kinetic energy are non-conserved
(c) only energy is conserved
(d) Only momentum is conserved.
(ii) A body of mass M1 collides elastically with another man M 2 at
rest. There is 100% transfer of energy takes place when (assuming
perfectly elastic collision)
(a) M1 > M2 (b) M1 < M2
(c) M1 = M2 (d) Same of all values of M1 & M2
(iii) A bullet hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a frictionless
surface. In this process which one of the following is correct?
(a) only momentum is conserved
(b) only KE is conserved
(c) Neither momentum nor KE is conserved
(d) Both momentum & KE are conserved.
(iv) Two identical balls A & B collide head on elastically of velocities of
A & B, before the collision are +0.5 m/s and –0.3 m/s respectively,
then their velocities after the collision are respectively -
(a) –0.5 m/s, +0.3 m/s (b) +0.5 m/s, +0.3 m/s
(c) +0.3 m/s, –0.5 m/s (d) –0.3 m/s, +0.5 m/s

(v) Two bodies of mass 0.25 kg each moving towards each other with
velocities 3 m/s & 1 m/s respectively. After collision, they stick
together. The velocity of the combination will be -
(a) 0.1 cm/s (b) 1 cm/s
(c) 1 m/s (d) cannot be predicted

Work, Energy And Power 153

 Work energy theorem :-
Q5. Work energy theorem states that the work done by the net force acting on
the body is equal to the change produced in kinetic energy of the body.
Work energy theorem is not independent of Newton's second law. It may
be viewed as scalar form of second law. By using work energy theorem,
the work done by a force can be calculated, even if the exact nature of
the force is not known!
(i) When work is done on the system, then kinetic energy of the
system -
(a) decreases (b) increases
(c) remains same (d) becomes zero

(ii) A body of mass 2.4 kg is subjected to a force which varies with

distance as shown. The body starts from rest at x = 0. Its velocity at
x = 9m is - 

(a) 5 3 m/s
(b) 20 3 m/s 

(c) 10 m/s
(d) 40 m/s 
   

(iii) If the kinetic energy of the body becomes four times of its initial
value, then new momentum will
(a) became twice its initial value
(b) became four times
(c) became thrice its initial value
(d) remains same
(iv) Two bodies with kinetic energies in the ratio 4 : 1 are moving with
equal momentum. The ratio of their masses is
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4
(v) A ball of mass 50 g is moving over the surface with velocity 10 m/s.
Velocity of ball became 5 m/s after travelling some distance over the
surface. The work done on the ball by the force of friction between
the ball and the surface is
(a) –2 J (b) + 2 J (c) 3 J (d) –3 J

154 Physics Class XI

 VERY SHORT ANSWERS (1 MARKS)
1. Conservative force : e.g., Gravitational force, electrostatic force.
Non-Conservative force : e.g., forces of friction, viscosity.

2. Lighter body has more K.E. as K.E. = and for constant p, K.E.

3. W = 0 as angle between the force and despoilment is 90°.

and W = FS cos =W=0

4. W = FS cos 90º = 0.
5. Hard spring.
6. Inelastic collision.
7. (i) Displacement is zero or it is perpendicular to force.
(ii) Conservative force moves a body over a closed path.

8. Momentum becomes times.

9. K.E. = so p =

Increase in K.E. = 300% of k = 3k

Final K.E., k = k + 3k = 4k

Final momentum, p =
= 2p

% Increase in momentum =

10. Heavier body; for some kinetic energy p m

11. Increases because W.D. on it when it is compressed or stretched.
12. Uniform circular motion.
13. Decreases.
14. W = 0.
15. It is the restoring force set up in a string per unit extension.

Work, Energy And Power 155

 SHORT ANSWERS (2 MARKS)
16. K.E = p2/2m when p is doubled, K.E becomes 4 times.
17. If roads go straight up then angle of slope would be large so frictional force
f = mg cos would be less and the vehicles may slip. Also greater power
would be required.
18. By Work - Energy Theorem,
Loss in K.E. = W.D. against the force × distance of friction
or K.E. = mg S

For constant K.E., S

Truck will stop in a lesser distance.
19. No. W.D. is zero only in case of a conservative force.

21. mgh =
so h = 20.4 m
22. When a body is pulled on a rough, horizontal surface with constant velocity.
Work is done on the body but K.E. remains unchanged.

23. = 90% of mgh

v = 6 m/s

24. F = Kx so x =

For same F, WA =

and WB =

=
As KA > KB so WA < WB.
1 2 WA KA
25. W = Kx ; , for some x
2 WB KB
As KA > KB So WA > WB

156 Physics Class XI

26. r r2 r1 11iˆ 11 ˆj 3kˆ
F (4iˆ ˆj 3kˆ) N
W F .r 46 J
27. If ball bounces to height h , then
mgh = 75% of mgh
h = 0·75 h = 9 m.
29. kwh is a bigger unit of energy.

30. Force constant of each half becomes twice the force constant of the original
spring.
SHORT ANSWERS (3 MARKS)
32. t1 = 1 min = 60 s, t2 = 2 min = 120 s
W = Fs = mgs = 5·88 × 105 J
As both cranes do same amount of work so both consume same amount of
fuel.

P1 =

and P1 =

P1 = 9800 W & P2 = 4900 W.

36. P.E. of spring when stretched through a distance 0·1 m,
U = W.D.

K = 4000 N/m
when spring is further stretched through 0·1 m, then P.E. will be :

U =

W.D. = U – U = 80 – 20 = 60 J.

Work, Energy And Power 157

38. 30% of Power =

P = 43·6 KW.
40. Let Initial P.E. = mgh
mg × 80% of h
= 0·80 mgh
P.E. lost in each bounce = 0·20 mgh
Fraction of P.E. lost in each bounce

= = 0·20

NUMERICAL ANSWERS

44. =

W =
45. Input power = 10 KW

Output power = = 7 KW

46. m1 = 9000 kg, u1 = 36 km/h = 10 m/s

m2 = 9000 kg, u2 = 0, v = v1 = v2 = ?
By conservation of momentum :
m1u1 + m2u2 =(m1 + m2) v

v = 5 m/s

Total K.E. before collision =

= 45000 J

Total K.E. after collision =

158 Physics Class XI

 As total K.E. after collision < Total K.E. before collision
Collision is inelastic.

47. W = mgh + mah = m (g + a) h

a = 1·5 m/s2.

48. For x = 10 cm = 0·1 m, Fx =

F = 10 N

For x = 6 cm = 0·06 m, Fx =

or Fx =

or Final K.E. =

= 1 – 0·6
= 0·4 J

49.

50.

sin =

= 30º.
(i) W = FS = – mg sin q × h = – 14·7 J is the W.D. by gravitational force in
moving the body up the inclined plane.
W = FS = + mg sin × h = 14·7 J is the W.D. by gravitational force in
moving the body down the inclined plane.
Total W.D. round the trip, W1 = W + W = 0.

Work, Energy And Power 159

 (ii) Force needed to move the body up the inclined plane,
F = mg sin + fk
= mg sin + k R
= mg sin + k mg cos
W.D. by force over the upward journey is
W2 = F × l = mg (sin + k cos ) l
= 18·5 J
(iii) W.D. by frictional force over the round trip,
W3 = – fk (l + l) = – 2fk l
= –2 k mg cos l = – 7·6 J
(iv) K.E. of the body at the end of round trip
= W.D. by net force in moving the body down
the inclined plane
= (mg sin – k mg cos ) l
= 10·9 J
K.E. of body = net W.D. on the body.

51. Here no external forces are acting on the system so :

= 0 Wext. = 0

According to work-energy theorem :

Total W.D. = Change in K.E.

or Wext. + Wint. = Final K.E. – Initial K.E.

0 + Wint. =

or Wint. = – mu2 = – 20 J

160 Physics Class XI

52. (i)

(ii) Gain in K.E. =

(iii)

53. Downward force on the elevator is :

F = mg + f = 22000 N

Power supplied by motor to balance this force is :

P = Fv = 44000 W

= = 59 hp.

54. At maximum compression xm, the K.E. of the car is converted entirely into
the P.E. of the spring.

or xm = 2 m.

Answer Key :
55. (d) 56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (c) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (b) 65. (b) 66. (b)
67. (b) 68. (c) 69. (c) 70. (d) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74. (b)

HINTS AND SOLUTION TO MCQ

55. (d) In squatting, he is tilted some what, hence also has to balance
frictional force besides his weight in this case R = friction + mg
R > mg
When he set straight up in that case,
R = mg.

Work, Energy And Power 161

56. (b)
dv 2 2 2
A a x ,F mA
dt 2
2
w F ds 50J
0

57. (a) 2
V R, 10 rod / s
T
1 1
V 10 ms K.E mv 2 250 2 J
2

S
58. (d) Vav 10ms 1, m 60 kg Av. K.E. 3000J
t

59. (c) 2 1
m1v1 m2v2 (m1 m 2 )V v ms
3
2
1 1 2
Energy loss 0.5 22 1.5 0.67 J
2 2 3

60. (d) W K
2
1 Vo 1
Case I : F 3 m mV 2 ,
2 2 2
Where F resistive force
V0 initial velocity
Case II : Let further distance be 's'

1
F(3 s) Kf Ki mV0 2
2
s 1 cm

162 Physics Class XI

 4 kg 1
61. (b) Mass per unit length 2 kg m
2m
Mass of 60 cm length = 1.2 kg.

weight of hanging part = 1.2×10=12N

W = F×S = 12×0.3 = 3.6 J.

P2 P12
62. (c) P1 1.5P, Initial K.E. , Find K.E., K1
2m 2m
K1 2.25 K
K
% increase 100 125%
K
63. (a) By conservation of momentum

V
mV 2mV1 V1
2
Vel. of separation
e 0.5
Velocity of approch

v u 1 2
64. (b) a 2 ms 2 , 5 ut at 100 m
t 2
W F S 10 4 J

1
65. (b) W 800 (0.152 0.052 ) 8 J.
2
1 E
66. (b) K.E. at highest point m (4 cos 60 ) 2 .
2 4

67. (b) Maximum K.E. = Drop in P.E.

1 2 1
m Vmax mg (h 2 h1 ) Vmax 5 ms
2

68. (c) Total work done = Gain in P.E.+Work done against friction
300 = 2×10×10+W W = 100 J.

Work, Energy And Power 163

70. (d) 1 1
E or m
m E
m1 E 2 1
m 2 E1 4

71. (a) W F dx 135 J

72. (a) Velocity with which the ball strikes the ground, u 2gh

If the ball re-bounces with velocity, V, then V eu e 2gh

If h max. height after one bounce, then

02 V 2 2( g)h h e2 h
w
73. (b) P w Pt mgh m 1200 kg
t
74. (b) By conservation of momentum

30×0 = 18×6+12+V V= –9 ms–1

1
K.E. mV 2 486 J
2

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
2. (c) A is true but the R is false.
According to Law of conservation of mechanical on energy (If No
external forces do work on a system),
K + U = constant
K + U = 0 or K = – U.
3. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of
assertion.
4. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
5. (c) A is true but R is false.
Displacement (tangential) of the body is perpendicular to the
centripetal force (acts along radius towards centre).

164 Physics Class XI

6. (c) A is true but R is false.
In compressing or stretching the spring, work is done on the spring
against the restoring force.
7. (d) both A & R are false.
1
P.E. of a spring; U = Kx2 [symbols have then usual meaning]
2
so U x2
so graph is a parabola.
8. (d) Hence Assertion is false, because is elastic collision the relative
velocity of separation (not relative speed of separation) is equal to
the relative velocity of approach (Not the relative speed of approach)
of two bodies during elastic collision.
Reason is though true but cannot explain the assertion.
9. (c) A is true but R is false.
Force is friction acts is the apposite direction of motion.
10. (d) both A & R are false.
A raised body at rest has energy (PE) but no momentum (p) but to
P2
possess momentum (p), a body should have KE on KE = .
2m
Also dimensions of momentum is [MLT –1] and of energy of
[ML2T–2].
11. (b) both A & R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
12. (b) both A & R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (a) w = fdcos
ii. (c) Work done by a frictional force is an example of negative work
done.

iii. (a) F = ˆi 2ˆj 3k;

ˆ d = 4k
w = F.d
ˆ ˆ = 12J
= 3k.4k

iv. (c) negative

Work, Energy And Power 165

 v. (b) v = u + at
v = at as u = 0
As power P = fV = (ma)(at)
P = Ma2t p t as a is constant.

2. i. (d)
ii. (c)
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
iii. (a) KE = mV2 = m(rw)2 = mr 4 f 250 J
2 2 2
iv. (d) PE decreases when an air bubble rises in water because work is
done by upthrust.

v. (a) Applying Law of Conservation of Energy at A and B.

1
mV2 = mgh
2
v 2gh 2 9.8 0.5 9.8 m/s

3. i. (a) accelerated motion

ii. (d) velocity at the lowest point = 5gr

g
iii. (b) at the highest point mrw2 = mg w
r
mv 2L
iv. (c) TL mg
r
(KE) L v L2 5gr 5
v. (d)
(KE) H v 2H gr 1

4. i. (a) both momentum & KE are conserved.

ii. (c) M1 = M2 [when both the colliding bodies have equal masses,
maximum transfer of energy occurs].

iii. (a) only momentum is conserved.

(as this is an example of perfectly inelastic collisions)

166 Physics Class XI

 iv. (d) –0.3 m/s, +0.5 m/s
(In elastic collision, two identical bodies exchange then velocities
after collision)

v. (c) 1 m/s
m1u1 m 2 u 2
[Common velocity V = , u1 = 3 m/s, u2 = –1 m/s]
m1 m 2

5. i. (a) decreases
ii. (c) 10 m/s

Work done = change is KE

1 2
Area under f – x = mv – 0
2
1 1
(9 + 3) × 20 = × 2.4 × v2
2 2
v = 10 m/s

iii. (a) become twice its initial value [Using p = 2mk ].

p2
iv. (d) 1 : 4 [again using p = 2mk k ]
2m
1
v. (a) –2J [Work done = change is KE = m(v2 – u2) = –2J]
2

***

Work, Energy And Power 167

5.1 Introduction
Rigid body : A rigid body is a body that can rotate with all the parts locked
together and without any change in its shape.
5.2 Centre of Mass
Centre of mass of a system is a point that moves as though all the mass were
concentrated there and all external forces were applied there.
(1) Position vector of centre of mass for n particle system : If a system
consists of n particles of masses m1, m2, m3 ........ mn, whose positions

vectors are respectively then position vector of centre

of mass

If two masses are equal i.e., m1 = m2, then position vector of centre of

mass of to particle system is

(2) Important points about centre of mass
(i) The position of centre of mass is independent of the co-ordinate
system chosen.
(ii) The position of centre of mass depends upon the shape of the body
and distribution of mass.
(iii) In symmetrical bodies in which the distribution of mass is
homogeneous, the centre of mass coincides with the geometrical
centre or centre of symmetry of the body. Centre of mass of cone

168 Physics Class XI

 or pyramid lies on the axis of the cone at point distance from
the vertex where h is the height of cone.
(iv) The centre of mass changes its position only under the translatory

the body.
(v) If the origin is at the centre of mass, then the sum of the moments
of the masses of the system about the centre of mass is zero i.e.,

.
(vi) If a system of particles of masses m1, m2, m3, ...... move with velocity
v1, v2, v3, ......... then the velocity of centre of mass

(vii) If a system of particles of masses m1, m2, m3, ...... move with
accelerations a1, a2, a3, .......... then the acceleration of centre of
mass

(viii) If is a position vector of centre of mass of a system then velocity

of centre of mass = .

(ix) Acceleration of centre of mass = .

(x) Force on a rigid body .

(xi) For an isolated system external force on the body is zero

= constant.
i.e., centre of mass of an isolated system moves with uniform velocity
along a straight-line path.
Rotational Motion 169
5.3 Equations of Linear Motion and Rotational Motion
Rotational Motion
If angular acceleration is 0, = constant and = t
If angular acceleration = constant then

(i)

(ii)
(iii) 2 = 1 + t

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

If acceleration is not constant, the above equation will not be applicable. In this case

(i)

(ii)

(iii) d = d

5.4 Moment of Inertia

Moment of inertia plays the same role in rotational motion as mass plays in
linear motion. It is the property of a body due to which it opposes any change
in its state of rest or of uniform rotation.
(1) Moment of inertia of a particle I = mr2; where r is the perpendicular
distance of particle from rotational axis.
(2) Moment of inertia of a body made up of number of particles (discrete
distribution)

I =
(3) Moment of inertia of a continuous distribution of mass, dI = dmr2 i.e.,
I =
(4) Dimension : [ML2T0]

170 Physics Class XI

 (5) S.I. unit : kgm2.
(6) Moment of inertia depends on mass, distribution of mass and on the
position of axis of rotation.
(7) Moment of inertia is a tensor quantity.
5.5 Radius of Gyration
Radius of gyration of a body about a given axis is the perpendicular distance
of a point from the axis, where if whole mass of the body were concentrated,
the body shall have the same moment of inertia as it has with the actual
distribution of mass.
When square of radius of gyration is multiplied with the mass of the body
gives the moment of inertia of the body about the given axis.

I = Mk2 or k =
Here k is called radius of gyration.

k =
Note :
For a given body inertia is constant whereas moment of inertia is variable.

5.6 Theorem of Parallel Axes Ig

Moment of inertia of a body about a given axis
I is equal to the sum of moment of inertia of the
body about an axis parallel to given axis and
passing through centre of mass of the body Ig
and Ma2 where M is the mass of the body and
a is the perpendicular distance between the
two axes.
I = Ig + Ma2

5.7 Theorem of Perpendicular Axes

According to this theorem the sum of moment
of inertia of a plane lamina about two mutually
perpendicular axes lying in its plane is equal to
its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular
to the plane of lamina and passing through the

Iz = Ix + Iy

Rotational Motion 171

Note :
In case of symmetrical two-dimensional bodies as moment of inertia for
all axes passing through the centre of mass and in the plane of body will
be same so the two axes in the plane of body need not be perpendicular
to each other.
5.8 Analogy between Translatory Motion and Rotational
Motion
Translatory motion Rotatory motion
Mass (m) Moment of Inertia (I)
Linear P = mv Angular L=l

Momentum P= Momentum L=

Force F = ma Torque =I

Kinetic energy E= E=

E= E=

5.9 Moment of Inertia of Some Standard Bodies and

Different Axes
Body Axis of Rotation Figure Moment K K2/R2
of inertia
Ring About an axis
(Cylindrical Passing through
Shell) C.G. and MR2 R 1
perpendicular to
its plane
Ring About its diameter

172 Physics Class XI

 Body Axis of Rotation Figure Moment K K2/R2
of inertia
Ring About a tangential
axis in its own plane

Ring About a tangential

axis perpendicular
to its own plane
2MR2 2

Disc (Solid About an axis

cylinder) Passing through
C.G. and
perpendicular to

its plane
Disc About its diameter

Disc About a tangential

axis in its own
plane

Disc About a tangential

axis perpendicular
to its own plane

Rotational Motion 173

 Body Axis of Rotation Figure Moment K K2/R2
of inertia
Solid Sphere About its diametric
axis

Solid Sphere About a tangential

axis

Spherical About its diametric

Shell axis

Spherical About a tangential

Shell axis

Long thin rod About on axis

passing through
its centre of mass
and perpendicular
to the rod

Long thin rod About an axis

passing through
its edge and
perpendicular to
the rod

174 Physics Class XI

5.10 Torque

If the particle rotating in xy plane about the origin

and at any instant the
position vector of the particle is then,

Torque
= rF sin
[where is the angle between the direction of

(1) Torque is an axial vector i.e., its direction is always perpendicular to the
plane containing vector in accordance with right hand screw

direction of torque is perpendicular to the plane, outward through the

axis of rotation.

i.e., Torque = Force × Perpendicular distance of line of action of force

from the axis of rotation.

Torque is also called as moment of force and d is called moment or lever

arm.

(2) Unit : Newton-metre (M.K.S.) and Dyne-cm (C.G.S.)

(3) Dimension : [ML2T–2].

(4) A body is said to be in rotational equilibrium if resultant torque acting

on it is zero i.e.,

(5) Torque is the cause of rotatory motion and in rotational motion it plays
same role as force plays in translatory motion i.e., torque is rotational
analogue of force. This all is evident from the following correspondences
between rotatory and translatory motion.

Rotational Motion 175

 Rotatory Motion Translatory Motion

P F.V

5.11 Couple

of couple or torque by a couple

5.12 Angular Momentum

The moment of linear momentum of a body with respect to any axis of
rotation is known as angular momentum. If is the linear momentum of
particle and its position vector from the point of rotation then angular
momentum.

=
Angular momentum is an axial vector i.e., always directed perpendicular to
the plane of rotation and along the axis of rotation.
(1) S.I. Unit : kgm2 s–1 or J-sec.
(2) Dimension : [ML2T–2] and it is similar to Planck’s constant (h).
(3) Angular momentum = (Linear momentum) × (Perpendicular distance of
line of action of force from the axis of rotation)

176 Physics Class XI

 (4) In vector form .

(5) From

[Rotational analogue of Newton’s second law]

(6) If a large torque acts on a particle for a small time then ‘angular impulse’

of torque is given by

Angular impulse = Change in angular momentum

5.13 Law of Conservation of Angular Momentum

If the net external torque on a particle (or system) is zero then =

i.e.,

=
Angular momentum of a system (may be particle or body) remains constant
if resultant torque acting on it zero.

As L = I so if = 0 then I = constant.

5.14 Slipping, Spinning and Rolling

(1) Slipping : When the body slides on a surface without rotation then its
motion is called slipping motion.
In this condition friction between the body and surface F = 0.

Body possess only translatory kinetic energy KT =

(2) Spinning : When the body rotates in such a manner that its axis of
rotation does not move then its motion is called spinning motion. In this

In spinning, body possess only rotatory kinetic energy KR =

(3) Rolling :
axis of rotation also moves, the motion is called combined translatory
and rotatory.

Rotational Motion 177

 Example :
(i) Motion of a wheel of cycle on a road.
(ii) Motion of football rolling on a surface.
In this condition friction between the body and surface F 0. Body possesses
both translational and rotational kinetic energy.
Net kinetic energy = (Translatory + Rotatory) kinetic energy.

5.15 Rolling Without Slipping

In case of combined translatory and rotatory motion if the object rolls across
a surface in such a way that there is no relative motion of object and surface
at the point of contact, the motion is called rolling without slipping.
Friction is responsible for this type of motion but work done or dissipation
of energy against friction is zero as there is no relative motion between body
and surface at the point of contact.
Rolling motion of a body may be treated as a pure rotation about an axis
through point of contact with same angular velocity . [v = R ]
In case of rolling, all points

C and D are four points then their velocities are shown in the following

178 Physics Class XI

5.16 Rolling on an Inclined Plane
When a body of mass m and radius R rolls down on inclined plane of height
‘h’ and angle of inclination , it loses potential energy. However it acquires
both linear and angular speeds and hence, gain kinetic energy of translation
and that of rotation.

(1) Velocity at the lowest point : v =

(2) Acceleration in motion : From equation v2 = u2 + 2as.

By substituting u = 0, s = and v = , we get a = .

(3) Time of descent : From equation v = u + at

By substituting u = 0 and value of v and a from above expressions

Rotational Motion (1 mark)

1. About which axis a uniform cube will have minimum moment of inertia ?
2. State the principle of moments of rotational equilibrium.
3. Find the moment of inertia of a disc of radius R and mass m about an axis in
its plane at a distance R/2 from its centre.
4. Can the couple acting on a rigid body produce translator motion ?
5. Which component of linear momentum does not contribute to angular
momentum ?
6. A system is in stable equilibrium. What can we say about its potential
energy ?
7. Is radius of gyration a constant quantity ?

Rotational Motion 179

 8. Two
Which of them has a large moment of inertia about the diameter ?
9. The moment of inertia of two rotating bodies A and B are I A and
IB (IA > IB) and their angular momenta are equal. Which one has a greater kinetic
energy ?
10. A particle moves on a circular path with decreasing speed. What happens to
its angular momentum ?
11. What is the value of instantaneous speed of the point of contact during pure
rolling ?
12. Which physical quantity is conserved when a planet revolves around the
sun ?
13. What is the value of torque on the planet due to the gravitational force of
sun ?
14. If no external torque acts on a body, will its angular velocity be constant ?
15. Why there are two propellers in a helicopter ?
16. A child sits stationary at one end of a long trolley moving uniformly with

of mass of the (trolley + child) system ?

Rotational Motion (2 marks)
17. Show that in the absence of any external force, the velocity of the centre of
mass remains constant.
18. State the factors on which the position of centre of mass of a rigid body
depends.
19.
depend ?
20. State the factors on which the moment of inertia of a body depends.
21.
22. Why the speed of whirl wind in a Tarnado is alarmingly high ?
23. Can a body be in equilibrium while in motion ? If yes, give an example.
24. There is a stick half of which is wooden and half is of steel. (i) it is pivoted
at the wooden end and a force is applied at the steel end at right angle to its
length (ii) it is pivoted at the steel end and the same force is applied at the
wooden end. In which case is the angular acceleration more and why ?
25. If earth contracts to half of its present radius what would be the length of the
day at equator ?

180 Physics Class XI

26. An internal force can not change the state of motion of centre of mass of a
body. How does the internal force of the brakes bring a vehicle to rest ?
27. When does a rigid body said to be in equilibrium ? State the necessary
condition for a body to be in equilibrium.
28. How will you distinguish between a hard boiled egg and a raw egg by spinning
it on a table top ?
29. Equal torques are applied on a cylinder and a sphere. Both have same mass
and radius. Cylinder rotates about its axis and sphere rotates about one of its
diameter. Which will acquire greater speed and why ?
30. In which condition a body lying in gravitational field is in stable
equilibrium ?
31.
wheel in Engine.

Rotational Motion (3 marks)

32. Derive the three equation of rotational motion

(i) = 0 + at (ii) (iii)

Under constant angular acceleration. Here symbols have usual meaning.
33.
expression for power.
34. Prove that the rate of change of angular momentum of a system of particles
about a reference point is equal to the net torque acting on the system.
35. Three mass point m1, m2, m3 are located at the vertices of equilateral of
side ‘a’. What is the moment of inertia of system about an axis along the
altitude of passing through m1 ?
36. Show that moment of a couple does not depend on the point about which
moment is calculated.
37. A disc rotating about its axis with angular speed 0 is placed lightly (without
any linear push) on a perfectly frictionless table. The radius of the disc is R.
What are the linear velocities of the points A, B and C on the disc shown in

Rotational Motion 181

38. A uniform circular disc of radius R is rolling on a horizontal surface.
Determine the tangential velocity (i) at the upper most point (ii) at the centre
of mass and (iii) at the point of contact.
39.
duration of the day ?
40. A solid cylinder rolls down an inclined plane. Its mass is 2 kg and radius
0.1 m. If the height of the include plane is 4 m, what is rotational K.E. when
it reaches the foot of the plane ?
41. Find the torque of a force 7i – 3j– 5k about the origin which acts on a particle
whose position vector is i + j– k.

Numericals
42. Three masses 3 kg, 4 kg and 5 kg are located at the corners of an equilateral
triangle of side 1 m. Locate the centre of mass of the system.
43. Two particles mass 100 g and 300 g at a given time have velocities 10i – 7j
– 3k and 7i – 9j + 6k ms–1
44. From a uniform disc of radius R, a circular disc of radius R/2 is cut out. The
centre of the hole is at R/2 from the centre of original disc. Locate the centre

45. The angular speed of a motor wheel is increased from 1200 rpm to 3120 rpm
in 16 seconds, (i) What is its angular acceleration (assume the acceleration
to be uniform) (ii) How many revolutions does the wheel make during this
time ?
46. A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each
of mass 5 g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is
found to be balanced at 45.0 cm, what is the mass of the meter stick ?
47. A solid sphere is rolling on a frictionless plane surface about its axis of
symmetry. Find ratio of its rotational energy to its total energy.
48. Calculate the ratio of radii of gyration of a circular ring and a disc of the same
radius with respect to the axis passing through their centres and perpendicular
to their planes.
49. Two discs of moments of inertia I1 and I2 about their respective axes (normal
to the disc and passing through the centre), and rotating with angular speed
1 and 2 are brought into contact face to face with their axes of rotation
coincident, (i) What is the angular speed of the two-disc system ? (ii) Show

182 Physics Class XI

 that the kinetic energy of the combined system is less than the sum of the
initial kinetic energies of the two discs. How do you account for this loss in
energy ? Take 1 2.

50. In the HCl molecule, the separating between the nuclei of the two atoms is
about 1.27 A (1A = 10–10 m). Find the approximate location of the CM of
the molecule, given that the chlorine atom is about 35.5 times as massive as
a hydrogen atom and nearly all the mass of an atom is concentrated in all its
nucleus.
51. A child stands at the centre of turn table with his two arms out stretched.
The turn table is set rotating with an angular speed of 40 rpm. How much is
the angular speed of the child if he folds his hands back and thereby reduces
his moment of inertia to 2/3 times the initial value ? Assume that the turn
table rotates without friction. (ii) Show that the child’s new kinetic energy
of rotation is more than the initial kinetic energy of rotation.
How do you account for this increase in kinetic energy ?
52. To maintain a rotor at a uniform angular speed of 200 rad s–1, an engine needs
to transmit a torque of 180 Nm. What is the power required by the engine ?

53. A car weighs 1800 kg. The distance between its front and back axles is
1·8 m. Its centre of gravity is 1·05 m behind the front axle. Determine the
force exerted by the level ground on each front and back wheel.

Rotational Motion (5 marks)

54. Prove that the angular momentum of a particle is twice the product of its mass
and areal velocity. How does it lead to the Kepler’s second law of planetary
motion ?
55. Prove the result that the velocity V of translation of a rolling body (like a
ring, disc, cylinder or sphere) at the bottom of an inclined plane of a height

h is given by v2 = .

where K = Radius of gyration of body about its symmetry axis, and R is

radius of body. The body starts from rest at the top of the plane.
56. (i) Establish the relation between torque and angular acceleration.

Rotational Motion 183

 (ii) Can a body in translatory motion have angular momentum ? Explain ?
(iii) Establish the relation between angular momentum and moment of inertia
for a rigid body.

than by tying it to a shorter string ?

(v) State the law of conservation of angular momentum and illustrate it with
the example of planetary motion.
(vi) A cat is able to land on its feet after a fall. Why ?
57. State the theorem of :
(i) perpendicular axis (ii) parallel axis.
Find the moment of inertia of a rod of mass M and length L about and
axis perpendicular to it through one end. Given the moment of inertia

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

58. For which of the following does the center of mass lie out side the body?
(a) Pencil (b) A Short put
(c) A dice (d) A bangle
59. When a disc rotates with uniform angular velocity, which of the following
is not true?
(a) Sense of rotation remains same.

(c) The speed of rotation is non-zero and remains same.

(d) The angular acceleration is non-zero and remains same.
60. Two identical particles moves towards each other with velocities 2V and V
respectively. The velocity of centre of mass is
(a) V (b) V/3
(c) V/2 (d) Zero
61. A circular disc of radius R is removed from a bigger circular disc of radius
2R, such that the circumference of the disc coincides. The centre of mass of
the new disc is R from the centre of bigger disc. The value of is
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) (b)
3 2 6 4 3 2 6 4
1 1
(c) 1 1 1 1(d) 1 1
3 2 6 4 3 2 6 4

184 Physics Class XI

62. Distance of the centre of mass of a solid uniform cone from it's vertex is Zo.
If the radius of it's base is R and it's height is h, the Zo is equal to
h2 3h 2 h 2 3h 5h 3h 2
(a) (b) R
4R 8R 4 4 8 8R
h 2 3h 5h 3h 2 h2 3h 2
(c) (d)
4 R 4 8 8R 4R 8R
63. Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a central force is constant
due to
(a) Constant force (b) Constant linear momentum
(c) Constant torque (d) Zero torque
64. Four point masses each of the value m, are placed at the corner of a square
ABCD of side l. The moment of inertia of this system about an axis passing
through (diagonal BD) B D is
(a) 3 ml2 (b) ml2
(c) 2 ml2 (d) 3 ml2
65. A couple is acting on a two particle system. The resultant motion will be
(a) Purely rotational motion (b) Purely linear motion
(c) Both (a) & (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)
66. The dimension of angular momentum are
(a) [MLT–2] (b) [ML2T–1]
(c) [ML2T–2] (d) [ML2T]
67. Moment of Inertia of an object does not depend up on
(a) Mass of object (b) Mass distribution
(c) Angular velocity (d) Axis of rotation

The ratio of their moment of inertia about the axis passing through their
centres and perpendicular to their planes will be
(a) 1:1 (b) 2:1
(c) 1:2 (d) 4:1
69. What is the ratio of the moments of inertia of two rings radii r and nr about
an axis perpendicular to their plane and passing through their centres?
(a) 1 : n2 (b) 1:n
(c) 1 : 2n (d) n2 : 1
Rotational Motion 185
 70. Two rings of radii R and nR made from the same wire have the ratio of
moments of inertia about an axis passing through their centres equal to 1:8.
The value of n is
(a) 2 (b) 2 2

(c) 4 (d) ½
71. The moment of inertia of a ring about one of it's diameter is I. What will be
the moment of inertia about a tangent parallel to the diameter?
(a) 4I (b) 2I
3
(c) I (d) 3I
2
72. A person standing on a rotating disc stretches out his hands, the angular
speed will
(a) Increase (b) Decrease
(c) Remains same (d) None of the these
73. A sphere of radius 'r' is rolling without sliding. What is the ratio of rotational
kinetic energy and total kinetic energy associated with sphere
2 2 2 1
(a) (b)
7 1 5 2
2 2 1
(c) 1 (d)
1 5 2
74. A solid sphere of radius 'r' is rolling with velocity V on a smooth plane. The
total kinetic energy of sphere is
7 3 1 1 72 2 3 1 1
(a) mv 2 mv 2 mv 2 mv
mv (b) mv 2 mv 2 mv 2
10 4 2 4 10 4 2 4
7 3 1 1 72 3 1 1
mv 2 (c) mv 2 mv 2 (d)
2
mv 2 mv mv mv 2 mv 2
10 4 2 4 10 4 2 4
75. Two bodies have their moment of inertia I and 2I respectively about their
axis of rotation. If their kinetic energies of rotation are equal, their angular
momentum will be in the ratio
(a) 1:2 (b) 2:1
(c) 2:1 (d) 1: 2
76. An inclined plane makes on angle of 30° with horizontal. A solid sphere
rolling down this inclined plane has a linear acceleration of
5g 2g 2 5g 5g 2g 2 5g
(a) 14 3 3 7
(b)14
3 3 7
5g 2g 2 5g 5g 2g 2 5g
(c) (d)
14 3 3 7 14 3 3 7

186 Physics Class XI

77. Planetary motion in the solar system describes
(a) Conservation of kinetic energy
(b) Conservation of linear momentum
(c) Conservation of angular momentum
(d) All of the above.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

Direction for Q.No. 1 to Q.No. 12
The following questions from 1 to 12 consists of two statements each,
labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). While answering
these questions, you are required to choose any of the following from
options (a), (b), (c) & (d).
(a) If both A and R are true & R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) If both A and R are true & R is the correct explanation of A.
(c) If A is true but R is false.
(d) If A is false and R is also false.

1. Assertion (A) : In rolling, all points of a rigid body have the same linear
velocity.

2. Assertion (A) : The speed of a whirl wind in tornado is alarmingly high.

Reason (R) : If no external torque acts on a body, its angular velocity
remains constant.
3. Assertion (A) : The velocity of a body at the bottom of an inclined plane
of given height is more when it slides down the plane compared when it
is rolling down the same plane.
Reason (R) : In rolling down, a body acquires both kinetic energy of
translation and rotation.
4. Assertion (A) : Torque is due to the transverse component of force only.
The radical component has no role to play.
Reason (R) : This is because transverse component is not perpendicular
to radial component.
5. Assertion (A) : Power associated with torque is product of torque and
angular speed of the body about the axis of rotation.
Reason (R) : It is rotational analogue of power in translatory motion.

Rotational Motion 187

6. Assertion (A) : A wheel moving down a perfectly frictionless inclined
plane shall undergo slipping (not rolling)
Reason (R) : For rolling torque is required, which is provided by tangential
frictional force.
7. Assertion (A) : Torque is a vector whose direction is along the applied
force.
Reason (R) : F r
8. Assertion (A) : The centre of mass of a body may lie where there is no
mass.
Reason (R) : The centre of mass has nothing to do with the mass of the
body.
9. Assertion (A) : To unscrew a rusted nut, we need a wrench with longer
arm.
Reason (R) : r F
10. Assertion (A) : Moment of inertia of a body is same, whatever be the axis
of rotations.
Reason (R) : Moment of inertia depends only a distribution of mass.
11. Assertion (A) : If polar ice melts, days will be longer.
Reason (R) : Moment of inertia decreases and these angular velocity
increases.
12. Assertion (A) : Value of radius of gyration of body depends upon axis on
rotation.
Reason (R) : Radius of gyration is root near square distance of particles
of the body from the axis of rotation.

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

1. Motion of a rigid body and centre of mass :-

A Point object is only a hypothetical concept. In actual practice, we have

objects is made up of large number of particles. Whereas point object/mass

can have only translation motion, extended object can have translational
motion, rotational motion & combination of translational & rotational
motion as well.

188 Physics Class XI

 The motion of system of particles or an extended object is quite complicated.

than the other particles of the system. Therefore to describe the overall

a concept 'Centre of Mass'.

(i) The centre of mass of a system of particles does not depend on
(a) position of particles
(b) relative distance between the particles
(c) forces acting on the particles
(d) mass of the particles
(ii) The centre of mass of a hallow sphere is at the its centre. Centre of

(a) shifts to A
(b) shifts to B  


(c) shifts to C
 


(centre of sphere)
(iii) For which of the following does the centre of mass outside the body
(a) a pencil (b) a dice
(c) a bangle (d) a shot put

(iv) Two identical particles move towards each other with velocities
2v and v respectively. The velocity of centre of mass is
v v
(a) v (b) (c) (d) zero
3 2
(v) A couple is acting on a two particle system. The resultant motion
will be
(a) purely rotational motion (b) purely translatory motion
(c) both (a) & (b) (d) neither (a) nor (b)
2. Torque :-
We know that when an external force is applied on a body. It accelerates the
body and the body has translation motion. Similarly, a body has rotational
motion, upon a force is applied on a body at a certain distance from the
axis of rotation of the body. The product of the applied force & distance of
the point of application of the force from the axis of rotation its expressed

Rotational Motion 189

 by a physical quality known as a 'Torque'. Torque is rotational analogue
of force. Torque is an axial vector as it points along the axis of rotation.
(i) The torque about the origin of the force F mg ˆj and r xiˆ yiˆ
is
(a) mgxiˆ (b) mgyjˆ (c) mgxkˆ (d) 0

(ii) Which of the following statement is false for torque

dl I
(a) (b) r f (c) f r (d)
dt
(iii) Let F be the force acting on a particle having position vector r and
be the torque of this force about the origin, then
(a) r.F 0 and F. 0 (b) r. 0 and F. 0
(c) r. 0 and F. 0 (d) r. 0 and F. 0
(iv) Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a central force is
constant due to
(a) constant force (b) constant linear momentum
(c) constant torque (d) zero torque
(v) When a disc rotates with uniform angular velocity, which of the
following is correct?
(a) The sense of rotation remains the same
(b) The orientation of the axis of the rotation remains the same
(c) The speed of rotation is non-zero & remains the same
(d) The angular acceleration is non-zero & remains the same.

distance of carbon atom from the centre of mass is

(a) 0.3 A° (b) 0.7 A° (c) 0.5 A° (d) 0.9 A°

3. Equilibrium of a rigid body :-

A rigid body is said to be in translational equilibrium, if the net external
force acting on the body is zero and it is said to be in rotational equilibrium,
if net external torque acting on the body is zero. A rigid body is said to
be in partial equilibrium, if either it is in rotational equilibrium but not
in translational equilibrium or it is in translational equilibrium but not in
rotational equilibrium.
(i) A couple is acting on rigid body then which statement is true
(a) The body is in translational equilibrium but not in rotational
equilibrium

190 Physics Class XI

 (b) The body is in rotational equilibrium but not in translational
equilibrium
(c) The body is in translational as well as in rotational
equilibrium
(d) The body is neither in translational equilibrium nor in rotational
equilibrium.
(ii) For a body in translational equilibrium, which of the following
statement is false
(a) Fext 0 (b) p 0 (c) v 0 or constant (d) a 0
(iii) For a body in rotational equilibrium which of the following is true
(a) ext 0 (b) L 0 (c) r 0 (d) w 0
(iv) A merry go round, made of a ring like platform of radius R and mass
M, is revolving with angular speed . A person of mass M is standing

from the centre of the round (as seen the ground). The speed of the
marry go round afterwards is
(a) 2 (b) (c) (d) 0
2
(iv) A thin horizontal circular disc is rotating about a vertical axis
passing through its centre. An insect is at rest at a point near the
rim of the disc. The insect now moves along a diameter of the disc
to reach its other end. During the journey of the insect, the angular
speed of the disc.
(a) Continuously decrease
(b) Continuously increase
(c) First increases and then decrease
(d) remaining unchanged
4. Moment of inertia, parallel and perpendicular axis theorem :-
A body rotating about a given axis tends to maintain its state of uniform
rotation, unless an external torque is applied on it to change this state. The
property of a body by virtue of which it opposes to change its state of rest
or uniform rotation about an axis is called rotational inertia or moment of
inertia. Moment of inertia is the rotational analogue of man.
There are two theorem namely theorem of perpendicular axes and theorem

about any axis of rotation. If the value of MI of the given body is known
about a certain axis of rotation.

Rotational Motion 191

 (i) The moment of inertia (MI) of a body does not depend upon its
(a) Axis of rotation

(c) Nature of distribution of mass

(d) Angular velocity
(ii) Which physical quantity is represented by the product of MI and
angular acceleration
(a) Centre of mass (b) Torque
(c) Angular momentum (d) Linear momentum

(iii) The MI of a this uniform rod of length L and mass M, about an axis
passing through its one end and perpendicular to its length is
3 2 1 2 1 1 2
(a) ML (b) ML (c) ML2 (d) ML
2 2 12 3
(iv) The radius of gyration of a solid cylinder about its own axis is
R R R
(a) (b) (c) 2R (d)
2 2 3
(v) The MI of a circular ring of radius R and mass M about its diameter
is
1 3
(a) MR2 (b) MR 2 (c) MR 2 (d) 2MR2
2 2
5. Rolling Motion :-

All wheels used in transportation have rolling motion. Rolling motion can
be regarded as a combination of pure rotation and pure translation (without
slipping). This means that at any instant of time, the bottom of the body
which is in contact with the surface is at rest always.
Total kinetic energy of a rolling body is the sum of translational kinetic
energy and rotational kinetic energy of the rolling body.
(i) For a pure rolling (without slipping) of a spherical rigid body when
of the following friction is not correct.
(a) During pure rolling, the force of friction acts in the same direction
as the direction of motion of the CM of the body
(b) The instantaneous speed of the point of contact during rolling is
zero.
(c) For perfect rolling, work done against friction is zero.
(d) A sphere moving down a perfectly frictional inclined plane will
undergo pure rolling motion.
192 Physics Class XI
 (ii) A spherical body is rolling over a horizontal surface w/o slipping
such that the velocity of centre of mass (CM) of the body is 3 m/s.
The velocity of point A & B on the body at any instant is
(a) 0 m/s, 6 m/s 

(b) 0 m/s, 3 m/s 

(c) 3 m/s, 0 m/s 

(d) 6 m/s, 0 m/s 

with an angular velocity of 1 rad/s. The linear velocity of the centre

of mass (CM) of the sphere is
1
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s (c) 2 m/s (d) at rest
2
(iv) A solid sphere and hollow sphere both of same mass and same radius
and mode of same material are allowed to roll down on inclined plane,
then

(c) both reaches the bottom of the same time

(d) cannot say
(v) If a solid sphere of mass 1 kg and radius 0.1 m rolls w/o slipping
at a uniform velocity of 1 m/s, along a straight line on a horizontal

2 7 7
(a) J (b) 1 J (c) J (d) J
5 10 5

ANSWERS (ROTATIONAL MOTION) 1 MARK

1. It will be about an axis passing through the centre of the cube and connecting
the opposite corners.
2.

3.

4. No. It can produce only rotatory motion.

5. Radial Component.
6. P.E. is minimum.
7. No, it changes with the position of axis of rotation.

Rotational Motion 193

 8. Sphere of small density will have large moment of inertia.

9.

10. as i.e., magnitude decreases but direction remains constant.

11. Zero.
12. Angular momentum of planet.
13. Zero.
1
14. No. .
I
15. Due to conservation of angular momentum.
16. No change in speed of system as no external force is working.

ANSWERS (2 MARKS)

18. (i) Shape of body

(ii) mass distribution
19. Torque
Factors
(i) Magnitude of force
(ii) Perpendicular distance of force vector from axis of rotation.
20. (i) Mass of body
(ii) Size and shape of body
(iii) Mass distribution w.r.t. axis of rotation
(iv) Position and orientation of rotational axis
21. Mass distribution.
22. In this, air from nearly regions get concentrated in a small space, so I
considerably. Since I.W = constant so W so high.
23. Yes, if body has no linear and angular acceleration. Hence a body in uniform
straight line motion will be in equilibrium.

194 Physics Class XI

24.
= I
(second case)

25. I1 = I2 =

L = I1 1 = I2 2

or =

or T2 =
26. In this case the force which bring the vehicle to rest is friction, and it is an
external force.
27. For translation equilibrium

= 0
For rotational equilibrium

= 0
28. For same external torque, angular acceleration of raw egg will be small than
that of Hard boiled egg.

29. = I , =

in cylinder, C =

in sphere, S =

30. When vertical line through centre of gravity passes through the base of the
body.
31. It plays the same role in rotatory motion as the mass does in translatory
motion.

Rotational Motion 195

 ANSWERS (3 MARKS)

35.

I =
= m1 × 0 + m2 × (BD)2 + m3 × (DC)2

I =

37. For A, VA = R 0 in forward direction

For B, VB = R 0 in backward direction

For C, VC = in forward direction disc will not roll.

41.

ANSWERS (NUMERICALS)
42. (x, y) = (0.54 m, 0.36 m)

43. .

44.
a direction opposite to the centre of the cut out portion.
45. = 4 rad s–1
n = 576
46. m = 66·0 gm.

196 Physics Class XI

47. Rot. K.E. =

=
Total energy = Translational K.E. + Rot. K.E.

48. 2 :1

49. (i) Let w be the angular speed of the two-disc system. Then by conservation
of angular momentum.

(I1 + I2) = I1 1 + I2 2

or =

(ii) Initial K.E. of the two discs.

K1 =

Final K.E. of the two disc system.

K2 =

Loss in K.E. =

= = a positive quantity [ 1 2]

Rotational Motion 197

 Hence there is a loss of rotational K.E. which appears as heat.
When the two discs are brought together, work is done against friction between
the two discs.

50. As shown in Fig. suppose the H nucleus is located at the origin. Then

x1 = 0, x2 = 1.27 Å, m1 = 1, m2 = 35.5
The position of the CM of HCl molecule is

x =

= 1.239 Å

Thus the CM of HCl is located on the line joining H and Cl nuclei at a distance
of 1.235 Å from the H nucleus.

51. Here 1 = 40 rpm, I2 =

By the principle of conservation of angular momentum,

I1 1 = I2 2 or I1 × 40 = or 2 = 100 rpm.
(ii) Initial kinetic energy of rotation

= (40)2 = 800 I1

New kinetic energy of rotation

Thus the child’s new kinetic energy of rotation is 2.5 times its initial kinetic
energy of rotation. This increase in kinetic energy is due to the internal energy

198 Physics Class XI

 of the child which he uses in folding his hands back from the out stretched
position.
52. Here = 200 rad s–1, = 180 Nm
Power, P = = 180 × 200 = 36,000 W = 36 kW.
53.

For translation equilibrium of car

NF + NB = W = 1800 × 9·8 = 17640 N
For rotational equilibrium of car
1·05 NF = 0·75 NB
1·05 NF = 0·75 (17640 – NF)
1·8 NF = 13230
NF = 13230/1·8 = 7350 N
NB = 17640 – 7350 = 10290 N

Force on each front wheel= = 3675 N

Force on each back wheel= = 5145 N

ANSWERS (5 MARKS)
56. (ii) Yes, a body in translatory motion shall have angular momentum unless

motion of body

= rp sin
= 0 only when = 0º or 180º
(iv) MI of stone I = ml2 (l length of string)
= I

=
if l is large is very small

Rotational Motion 199

Answer (MCQ) Key :
58. (d) 59. (d) 60. (c) 61. (a) 62. (b) 63. (d)
64. (a) 65. (a) 66. 67. 68. (b) 69. (a)
70. (a) 71. (d) 72. (b) 73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (d)
76. (a) 77. (c)

HINTS AND SOLUTION (MCQ)

58. (d) In bangle centre of mass lies at it's centre.
dw
59. (d) , given w = constant
dt
Hence =0
m1v1 m 2 v 2 m(2v) m( v) V
60. (c) Vcm
m1 m 2 2m 2

61. (a) Mass of original disc = m

m
Mass of disc removed, m1
4
3m
Mass of remaining disc 4
Mass m1 and m2 1 2
is their centre of mass.
Moment of m1 2
m 3m 1
R R
4 R 3

62. Mass of elementary disc,

dm = r2 dze
r z Rz
r
R h h
h
r 2 dzez
zdm 0 3
ZO h
dm 1 2 4
R he
3

63. (d) Torque due to central force is zero

dL
0 L = constant.
dt

200 Physics Class XI

64. (a) AC = BD = 2

IBD m (AO) 2 m (CO) 2 ml 2

65. (a) Net force for a couple is zero.
So, couple produces only rotational motion.

66. (b) L r p [L] [M L2 T 1 ]

67. (c) M.I. does not depend up on angular velocity.

I ring mR 2
68. (b) 1
=2:1
Idisc mR 2
2

I1 Mr 2
69. (a) 1: n 2
I2 m(nr) 2
70. (a) As radius of round ring is n times, length and hence mass of wire
is also n times
I1 mR 2 1 1
n 2
I2 nM(nR) 2 n3 8
1
71. (d) IT I mR 2 mR 2 mR 2
2
1
3 mR 2 3I
2
72. (b) As person stretches his hands outward, hence moment of inertia,
I = increases
L = Iw = constant, So w decreases.
73. (a)
1 1 2
ET E trans E rot mV 2 Iw
2 2
2 2 7
I mr , E T mV 2
5 10
1
mV 2
E rot 5 2
E trans 7 7
mV 2
10

Rotational Motion 201

 7
74. (a) ET E trans E rot mV 2
10
1 2
75. (d) Rotational K.E. = 2
Iw

1 1 w1
I1 w12 I 2 w 22 w2
2 2 2
L1 1
L2 2

76. (a) 5 5g
a g sin 30
7 14
dL
77. (c) Text 0 So 0
dt
L constant.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (d) both A & R are false. In case of rolling body, all fruits on it have

minimum at lowest point.

2. (c) here assertion is true but reason is false.
Assertion is true as per conservation of angular momentum but when
no external torque acts on the body, they its angular momentum is
constant not angular velocity.
3. (b) both A & R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A. When
a body slides its PE is converted into KE of translation, but when it
rolls down, some part of its PE is converted into its KE of rotation,
thereby reducing the KE of translation and hence its linear velocity.
4. (c) A is true but R false.
5. (a) both A & R are true & R is the correct explanation of A.
In translatory motion P = fV.
In rotatory motion P = I .
6. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
7. (d) both A & R are false.
r F so is r to the force.

202 Physics Class XI

8. (c) A is true but R is false.
CM depends upon the distribution of mass.
9. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
10. (d) both A & R are false.
11. (c) A is true but R is false. When ice melts, MI increases and hence
angular velocity decreases.
L = I = constant
12. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (c) forces acting on the particle
ii. (b) shifts to B.
iii. (c) a bangle
v m1v1 m 2 v 2
iv. (c) use VCM
2 m1 m 2
v. (a) purely rotational motion

2. i. (c) r F
xiˆ yjˆ mgjˆ

mgx(iˆ ˆj)
mgx k
ii. (c) F×r
iii. (d) r. 0 and F. 0 [as vector is r to both r & F ]
[ so r. 0 and also F. 0 ]
d
iv. (d) Zero torque [as ent so then ent 0
dt
then 0 constant
dt
v. (d) The angular acceleration is non-zero & remains the same.

3. i. (a) ii. (d) iii. (a)

iv. (a) v. (c)

Rotational Motion 203

4. i. (a)
ii. (b)
iii. (d) using parallel ones theorem.
I
iv. (b) as radius of gravitation = M
v. (b) using perpendicular are theorem.

5. i. (d)
ii. (a)
iii. (b) as VCM = r

iv. (a) Isolid sphere hallow sphere so asolid sphere > ahallow sphere
sin
a
I
1
MR 2

7 1 2
v. (c) J [KE = Imv2 +
10 2
1 2 1 7 2
v2
= mv + . MR × 2
2 2 5 R
7
= MV2
10
7 7
= ×1×1×1= J]
10 10

***

204 Physics Class XI

6.1 Newton’s Law of Gravitation
Newton’s law of gravitation states that every body in this universe attracts
every other body with a force, which is directly proportional to the product
of their masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance
between their centres. The direction of the force is along the line joining the
particles.
Thus the magnitude of the gravitational force F that two particles of masses

m1 and m2 separated by a distance r exert on each other is given by

or F =

Also clear that Which is Newton’s third law of motion.

Here G is constant of proportionality which is called ‘Universal gravitational
constant’.
(i) The value of G is 6.67 × 10 –11 N-m2 kg–2 in S.I and 6.67 × 10 –8
dyne– cm2g–2 in C.G.S. system.
(ii) Dimensional formula [M–1L3T–2].
(iii) The value of G does not depend upon the nature and size of the bodies.
(iv) It does not depend upon the nature of the medium between the two bodies.

6.2 Acceleration Due to Gravity

The force of attraction exerted by the earth on a body is called gravitational
pull or gravity.

is called acceleration due to gravity, it is denoted by g.

If M = mass of the earth and R = radius of the earth and g is the acceleration

Gravitation 205
 due to gravity, then

g =

(i) Its value depends upon the mass radius and density of planet and it is
independent of mass, shape and density of the body placed on the surface
of the planet.
(ii) Acceleration due to gravity is a vector quantity and its direction is always
towards the centre of the planet.
(iii) Dimension [g] = [LT–2]
(iv) It’s average value is taken to be 9.8 m/s2 or 981 cm/sec2, on the surface
of the earth at mean sea level.

6.3 Variation in g with Height

Acceleration due to gravity at height h from the surface of the earth

g =

Also g =

= [As r = R + h]

(i) If h << R g =

(ii) If h << R. Percentage decrease .

6.4 Variation in g with Depth

Acceleration due to gravity at depth d from the surface of the earth

g =

also g =
(i) The value of g decreases on going below the surface of the earth.
(ii) The acceleration due to gravity at the centre of earth becomes zero.

206 Physics Class XI

 (iii) Percentage decrease .

(iv) The rate of decrease of gravity outside the earth (if h << R) is double to
that of inside the earth.

6.5 Gravitational Field

The space surrounding a material body in which gravitational force of

Gravitational Field intensity :

a unit mass (test mass) placed at that point. If a test mass m at a point in a

I
6.6 Gravitational Potential
At
done per unit mass in shifting a test mass from some reference point (usually

Negative sign indicates that the direction of intensity is in the direction where
the potential decreases.

6.7 Gravitational Potential Energy

The

the gravitational force.

W =
This work done is stored inside the body as its gravitational potential
energy

U =
If r = then it becomes zero (maximum).

6.8 Escape Velocity

The minimum velocity with which a body must be projected up so as to
enable it to just overcome the gravitational pull, is known as escape velocity.

Gravitation 207
 If ve is the required escape velocity, then

(i) Escape velocity is independent of the mass and direction of projection

of the body.
(ii) For the earth, ve = 11.2 km/sec
(iii) A planet will have atmosphere if the velocity of molecule in its atmosphere
is lesser than escape velocity. This is why earth has atmosphere while
moon has no atmosphere.

6.9 Kepler’s laws of Planetary Motion

(1) The law of Orbits : Every planet moves around the sun in an elliptical
orbit with sun at one of the foci.
(2) The law of Area : The line joining the sun to the planet sweeps out equal
areas in equal interval of time. i.e., areal velocity is constant. According
to this law planet will move slowly when it is farthest from sun and more
rapidly when it is nearest to sun. It is similar to law of conservation of
angular momentum.

Areal velocity =
(3) The law of periods : The square of period of revolution (T) of any planet
around sun is directly proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis of
the orbit.

T2 a3 or T2

where a = semi-major axis

r1 = Shortest distance of planet from sun (perigee).
r2 = Largest distance of planet from sun (apogee).

208 Physics Class XI

 Kepler’s laws are valid for satellites also.

6.10 Orbital Velocity of Satellite

v = [r = R + h]

(i) Orbital velocity is independent of the mass of the orbiting body.

(ii) Orbital velocity depends on the mass of planet and radius of orbit.
(iii) Orbital velocity of the satellite when it revolves very close to the surface
of the planet, (earth is)
[r R h]
v =
[h 0]
6.11 Time Period of Satellite

T= = [As r = R + h]

(i) Time period is independent of the mass of orbiting body

(ii) T2 r3 (Kepler’s third law)
R
(iii) Time period of nearby satellite, T 2
g
For earth T = 84.6 minute 1.4 hr.

6.12 Height of Satellite

h =

6.13 Geostationary Satellite

The satellite which appears stationary relative to earth is called geostationary
or geosynchronous satellite, communication satellite.
A geostationary satellite always stays over the same place above the earth.
The orbit of a geostationary satellite is known as the parking orbit.
(i) It should revolve in an orbit concentric and coplanar with the equatorial
plane.
(ii) It sense of rotation should be same as that of earth.
(iii) Its period of revolution around the earth should be same as that of earth.

Gravitation 209
 (iv) Height of geostationary satellite from the surface of earth h = 6R = 36000
km.
(v) Orbital velocity v = 3.08 km/sec.
(vi) Angular momentum of satellite depend on both the mass of orbiting and
planet as well as the radius of orbit.

6.14 Energy of Satellite

(1) Potential energy : U =

(2) Kinetic energy : K =

(3) Total energy : E = U + K =

(4) Energy graph for a satellite

(5) Binding Energy : The energy required to remove the satellite its orbit
i.e.,

6.15 Weightlessness
The state of weightlessness (zero weight) can be observed in the following
situations.
(1) When objects fall freely under gravity
(2) When a satellite revolves in its orbit around the earth
(3) When bodies are at null points in outer space. The zero gravity region
is called null point.

210 Physics Class XI

 Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 Mark)
1. The mass of moon is nearly 10% of the mass of the earth. What will be the
gravitational force of the earth on the moon, in comparison to the gravitational
force of the moon on the earth ?
2. Why does one feel giddy while moving on a merry go round ?
3. Name two factors which determine whether a planet would have atmosphere
or not.
4. The force of gravity due to earth on a body is proportional to its mass, then
why does a heavy body not fall faster than a lighter body ?
5. The force of attraction due to a hollow spherical shell of uniform density on a
point mass situated inside is zero, so can a body be shielded from gravitational

6. The gravitational force between two bodies in 1 N if the distance between

them is doubled, what will be the force between them ?
7. A body of mass 5 kg is taken to the centre of the earth. What will be its
(i) mass, (ii) weight there.
8. Why is gravitational potential energy negative ?
9. A satellite revolves close to the surface of a planet. How is its orbital velocity
related with escape velocity of that planet.
10.

11. Identify the position of sun in the following diagram if the linear speed of
the planet is greater at C than at D.

12. A satellite does not require any fuel to orbit the earth. Why ?
13. A satellite of small mass burns during its descent and not during ascent.
Why ?
Gravitation 211
14. Is it possible to plac
visible over New Delhi ?

15. If the density of a planet is doubled without any change in its radius, how
does ‘g’ change on the planet.

16. Why is the weight of a body at the poles more than the weight at the
equator ? Explain.

17. Why an astronaut in an orbiting space craft is not zero gravity although he
is in weight lessness ?

18. Write one important use of (i) geostationary satellite, (ii) polar satellite.

19. A
and T , radius RA and R and masses mA and m which of the three quantities
are same for the stars. Justify.

20. The time period of the satellite of the earth is 5 hr. If the separation between
earth and satellite is increased to 4 times the previous value, then what will
be the new time period of satellite.

21. Why does the earth impart the same acceleration to every bodies ?

22. If suddenly the gravitational force of attraction between earth and satellite
become zero, what would happen to the satellite ?

Short Answer Type Questions (2 Marks)

23. If the radius of the earth were to decreases by 1%, keeping its mass same,
how will the acceleration due to gravity change ?

24.
(a) swollen feet, (b) swollen face, (c) headache, (d) orientation problem.

25. A satellite is moving round the earth with velocity v0 what should be the
minimum percentage increase in its velocity so that the satellite escapes.

26. The radii of two planets are R and 2R respectively and their densities and
/2 respectively. What is the ratio of acceleration due to gravity at their
surfaces ?

212 Physics Class XI

27. If earth has a mass 9 times and radius 4 times than that of a planet ‘P’.
Calculate the escape velocity at the planet ‘P’ if its value on earth is
11.2 kms–1.

28. At what height from the surface of the earth will the value of ‘g’ be reduced
by 36% of its value at the surface of earth.

29. At what depth is the value of ‘g’ same as at a height of 40 km from the surface
of earth.

30. The mean orbital radius of the earth around the sun is 1.5 × 108 km. Calculate
mass of the sun if G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2/kg–2 ?

31. Draw graphs showing the variation of acceleration due to gravity with
(i) height above earth is surface (ii) depth below the earth’s surface.

32.
the gravitational force on the rocket zero ? Mass of sun = 2 × 1030 kg, mass
of the earth = 6 × 1024
radius = 1.5 × 1011 m.

33. If the earth is one half its present distance from the sun. How many days will
be present one year on the surface of earth will change ?

34. A body weighs 63 N on the surface of the earth. What is the gravitational
force on it due to the earth at a height equal to half the radius of the earth ?

35. Why the space rockets are generally launched west to east ?

36. Explain why a tennis ball bounces higher on hills than in plane ?

37. The gravitational force on the earth due to the sun is greater than moon.

due to sun. Why ?

38. The mass of moon is (where M is mass of earth). Find the distance of

other. Given distance of moon from earth is 60 R, where R is radius of earth.

Gravitation 213
39. m about the sun S. The shaded
t1 is the time for the planet to
move from D to C and t2
between t1 and t2 ?

40. Calculate the energy required to move a body of mass m from an orbit of
radius 2R to 3R.
41. A man can jump 1.5 m high on earth. Calculate the height he may be able
to jump on a planet whose density is one quarter that of the earth and whose
radius is one third of the earth.

Short Answer Type Questions (3 Marks)

42.
relation for it. What is the position at which it is (i) maximum (ii) minimum.
43. Find the potential energy of a system of four particles, each of mass m, placed
at the vertices of a square of side. Also obtain the potential at the centre of
the square.
44. Three mass points each of mass m are placed at the vertices of an equilateral

of the triangle due to the three masses.

45.
use of multistage rockets in launching a satellite.
46.
of 150 km and the 2nd stage gives it the necessary critical speed to put it in a
circular orbit. Which stage requires more expenditure of fuel ? Given mass
of earth = 6.0 × 1024 kg, radius of earth = 6400 km.
47. The escape velocity of a projectile on earth’s surface is 11.2 kms–1. A body is
projected out with thrice this speed. What is the speed of the body far away
from the earth ? Ignore the presence of the sun and other planets.

214 Physics Class XI

48. A satellite orbits the earth at a height ‘h’ from the surface. How much
energy must be expended to rocket the satellite out of earth’s gravitational

49.

50. What do you mean by gravitational potential energy of a body ? Obtain an

expression for it for a body of mass m lying at distance r from the centre of
the earth.

51. What is the minimum energy required to launch a satellite of mass m kg from
the earth’s surface of radius R in a circular orbit at an altitude of 2R ?

Long Answer Type Questions (5 Marks)

52. What is acceleration due to gravity ?

Obtain relations to show how the value of ‘g’ changes with (i) altitude,
(ii) depth.

53.
from the surface of earth ? Does the escape velocity depend on (i) location
from where it is projected (ii) the height of the location from where the body
is launched.

54. State Kepler’s three laws of planetary motion. Prove the second and third
law. Name the physical quantities which remain constant during the planetary
motion.

55. Derive expression for the orbital velocity of a satellite and its time period.

What is a geostationary satellite. Obtain the expression for the height of the
geostationary satellite.

56. State and derive Kepler’s law of periods (or harmonic law) for circular orbits.

57. A black hole is a body from whose surface nothing may ever escape. What
is the condition for a uniform spherical mass M to be a black hole ? What
should be the radius of such a black hole if its mass is the same as that of the
earth ?

Gravitation 215
 Numericals
58. The mass of planet Jupiter is 1.9 × 1027 kg and that of the sun is 1.99 × 1030
kg. The mean distance of Jupiter from the Sun is 7.8 × 1011 m. Calculate
gravitational force which sun exerts on Jupiter, and the speed of Jupiter.
59. A mass ‘M’ is broken into two parts of masses m1 and m2. How are m1 and
m2 related so that force of gravitational attraction between the two parts is
maximum.
60. If the radius of earth shrinks by 2%, mass remaining constant. How would
the value of acceleration due to gravity change ?
61. A body released at the distance r (r > R) from the centre of the earth. What
is the velocity of the body when it strikes the surface of the earth ?
62. How far away from the surface of earth does the acceleration due to gravity
become 4% of its value on the surface of earth ? Radius of earth = 6400 km.
63.
earth is 4.8 N kg–1. Calculate gravitational potential at that point.
64. A geostationary satellite orbits the earth at a height of nearly 36000 km.
What is the potential due to earth’s gravity at the site of this satellite (take
the potential energy at to be zero). Mass of earth is 6 × 1024 kg, radius of
earth is 6400 km.
65. Jupiter has a mass 318 times that of the earth, and its radius is 11.2 times the
earth’s radius. Estimate the escape velocity of a body from Jupiter’s surface,
given that the escape velocity from the earth’s surface is 11.2 km s–1.
66. The distance of Neptune and Saturn from the sun is nearly 1013 m and 1012
m respectively. Assuming that they move in circular orbits, then what will
be the ratio of their periods.
67. vp and Sun planet distance
SP be rp. Relate (rA, vA) to the corresponding quantities at the aphelion
(rA, vA). Will the planet take

216 Physics Class XI

 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
68. If both the mass and radius of the earth, each decreased by 50%, the
acceleration due to gravity would
(a) remains same (b) decreases by 50%
(c) decreases by 100% (d) increases by 100%
69. A body is suspended on a spring balance in a ship sailing along the equator
o is the scale reading
when ship is at rest, the scale reading when the ship is sailing is
(a) w0 (b) zero
2wv g
(c) W0 1 (d) W0 1
g 2w
70. The maximum vertical distance through which a full dressed astronaut can
jump on the earth is 0.5m. Estimate the maximum vertical distance through
2
which he can jump on the moon, which has mean density rd that of the
3
earth and radius one quarter that of the earth
(a) 1.5 m (b) 3m
(c) 6m (d) 7.5 m
71. A uniform ring of mass M and radius R is placed directly above a uniform
sphere of mass 8M and same radius R. The centre of ring is at a distance of
d = 3 R from the centre of sphere. The gravitational attraction between the
sphere and ring is
2
GM 2 3GM 2 2GM 2 3GM 2 GM 3GM 2 2GM 2 3GM 2
(a) R2 R3 R
(b)
R 2
R3 R
GM 2 3GM 2 2GM 2 3GM 2 GM 2 3GM 2 2GM 2 3GM 2
R (c) R 2R 2 R R R
(d) R2
72. A satellite of mass ms revolving in a circular orbit of radius rs round the
earth of mass M, has total energy E. Than it's angular momentum will be
(a) (2E ms rs)½ (b) (2E ms rs)
(c) (2E ms rs2)½ (d) (2E ms rs2)
73. A mass M splits in to two parts m and (M-m), which are separated by a
certain distance. The ratio m/M which maximizes the gravitational force
between the parts is
(a) 1:4 (b) 1:3
(c) 1:2 (d) 1:1
Gravitation 217
74. If one moves from the surface of the earth to the moon, what will be the

(a) Weight of the person decreases continuously with height from the
surface of the earth
(b) Weight of the person increases with height from the surface of earth

with height from surface of earth

height from the surface of earth

75. A satellites goes along an elliptical path around earth. The rate of change of
area swept by the line joining earth and the satellite is proportional to
(a) r1/2 (b) r
(c) r3/2 (d) r2
76. The change in the value of 'g' at a height 'h' above the surface of the earth
is same as at a depth 'd' below the surface of earth. When both 'd' and 'h' are
much smaller than the radius of earth, then which one of the following in
correct?
h 3h h 3h
(a) d d d(b) d
2 2 2 2
(c) d = 2h (d) d=h
77. Two bodies of mass m and 4m are placed at a distance r. The gravitational

zero, is
4 Gm 6 Gm 9 Gm
(a) zero (b) r r r
4 Gm 6 Gm 9 Gm 4 Gm 6 Gm 9 Gm
(c) (d)
r r r r r r
78. When a body is taken from poles to equator on the earth, its weight
(a) increases
(b) decreases
(c) remains same
(d) increases at south pole and decreases at north pole

218 Physics Class XI

 79. A man weights 60 kg at earth's surface. At what height above the earth's
surface weight becomes 30 kg. Given radius of earth is 6400 km.
(a) 2624 km (b) 3000 km
(c) 2020 km (d) None the these
80. There are two bodies of masses 1 kg and 100 kg reporated by a distance
1 m. At what distance from the smaller body, the intensity of gravitational

1 1 1 10 1 1 1 10
(a) m m m m (b)m m m m
9 10 11 11 9 10 11 11
1 1 1 10 1 1 1 10
m (c) m m m m m (d)m m
9 10 11 11 9 10 11 11

would be
2 gR 2gR

(c) 2 gR 2gR (d) zero

82. If g is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth's surface, the gain in
potential energy of on object of mass m raised from the surface of earth to
a height equal to radius R of the earth is
1 1 1 1
(a) mgR (b) mgR
4 2 4 2
(c) 2mgR (d) mgR
83. Energy required to move a satellite of mass m from an orbit of radius 2R to
3R is, (M mass of earth)
GMm GMm GMm GMmGMm GMm GMm GMm
(a) (b)
12 R 2
3 R2 8R 6R
12 R 2 3R 2
8R 6R
GMm GMm
(c) GMm GMmGMm GMm GMm
(d)
GMm
12 R 3R 8 R 12 R6 R 3 R 8R 6R
84. If mass of a body is M on the surface of earth, then the mass of the same
body on the moon surface is
(a) M/6 (b) zero
(c) M (d) None of these

Gravitation 219
85. A body weighed 250N on the surface. Assuming the earth to be a sphere
of uniform mass density, how much would it weigh half way down to the
centre of earth
(a) 240 N (b) 210 N
(c) 195 N (d) 125 N

on the weight of a body placed at the south pole?

(a) Remains same (b) Increases
(c) Decreases but not zero (d) Decreases to zero

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

Direction for Q.No. 1 to Q.No. 12

The following questions from 1 to 12 consists of two statements each,
labelled as Assertion (A) and the other labelled as Reason (R). While
answering these questions, you are required to choose any of the following
from options (a), (b), (c) & (d).
(a) If both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) If both A & R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) If A is true but R is false.
(d) If A is false and R is also false.

1. Assertion (A) : The time period of revolution of a satellite close to surface

of earth is smaller than that revolving away from the surface of earth.
Reason (R) : The square of time period of revolution of a satellite is directly
proportional to cube of its orbital radius.

stars.
Reason (R) : Every body in this universe attracts every other body with
a force which is inversely proportional to the square of distance between
them.
3. Assertion (A) : Angular speed, linear speed and KE change with time but
angular momentum remains constant for a planet orbiting the sun.
Reason (R) : Angular momentum is constant as no torque acts on the
planet.

220 Physics Class XI

 the earth has a total energy (i.e. sum of potential & kinetic energy) E. Its
potential energy –E.

GMm
of earth is .
2R
5. Assertion (A) : The comets do not obey Kepler's Laws of planetary motion.
Reason (R) : The comets do not have elliptical orbits.

6. Assertion (A) : The square of the period of revolution of a planet is

proportional to the cube of its distance from the sun.

of its distance from the planet.

7. Assertion (A) : The earth without its atmosphere would be inhospitably
cold.
Reason (R) : All heat would escape in the absence of atmosphere.

at pole and equator is proportional to square of angular velocity of earth.

Reason (R) : The value of acceleration due to gravity is minimum at the
equator and maximum at the pole.
9. Assertion (A) : At the centre of earth a body has centre of mass, but no
centre of gravity.
Reason (R) : This is because g = 0 at the centre of the earth.
10. Assertion (A) : An astronaut in an orbiting space station above the earth
experiences weightlessness.

earth's gravitational force is in a state of free fall.

11. Assertion (A) : Linear momentum of a planet does not remain conserved.
Reason (R) : Gravitational force acts on it.
12. Assertion (A) : Kepler's second law can be understood by conservation of
angular momentum principle.
Reason (R) : Kepler's second law is related with areal velocity which can
further be proved to be based on conservation of angular momentum as
dA 1 2
r .
dt 2 .
Gravitation 221
 CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

1. Universal Law of Gravitation :-

Careful observations are the hallmarks of great discoveries and inventions.
Isaac Newton observed that an apple fell from a tree towards the earth.
This simple observation led him to propose an important law known as
Newton Law of Gravitation. He proposed that all particles or objects in
the universe attract each other as the earth attracts the apple.
Gravitation or gravitational force is the weakest of all the four basic forces
in nature. Gravity is the special case of gravitation.
(i) The force of gravitation is
(a) repulsive (b) electro-state
(c) conservative (d) non-conservative
(ii) The gravitational force between the two point masses does not
depend upon
(a) product of the two masses
(b) distance of separation between the two masses
(c) medium separating the two masses
(d) None the above
(iii) The dimensional formula for 'G' universal gravitation constant is
(a) [M–1L3T–2] (b) [M–1L2T–2]
(c) [M–1L3T–3] (d) [M–1L2T–3]

(iv) strongest force among the following four forces is

(a) electrostatic force (b) gravitational force
(c) nuclear force (d) magnetic force
(v) Two spheres of masses m and M are situated in air and the gravitational

with a liquid of relative density 3. The gravitational force will be

F F
(a) 3F (b) (c) F (d)
3 9
2. Kepler's Law of Planetary Motion :-
To test the validity of Copernicus model (Heliocentric model), the great

studying the motions of planets and stars without the aid of telescope.

222 Physics Class XI

 This data was critically analysed by Johannes Kepler. From these complicated
data; Kepler deduced simple relations that governed planetary motion.
These are three famous laws of Kepler which strongly supported the
Copernicus model of solar system and played major role in the discovery of
Newton's Law of Gravitation. The laws are (i) Law of orbits (ii) Law of
areas (iii) Law of periods
(i) Kepler's second law is the consequence of the law of
conservation of
(a) linear momentum (b) energy
(c) angular momentum (d) mass
(ii) The distance of two planets from the sun are 10 13m & 10 12m
respectively. The ratio of then time periods are
(a) 10 2 :1 (b) 1:10 9 (c) 1 : 1 (d) 103 : 1

1, v2 & v3 be the tangential speeds of

(a) v1 = v2 = v3   

(b) v1 > v2 > v3 

 
(c) v1 < v2 < v3
(d) v1 = v2 > v3


(iv) If the distance between the earth and the sun were one third of its
present value, the number of days in a year would have been
(a) increased (b) decreased
(c) remains same (d) cannot say
(v) A planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit with the sun at
one of its foci. The physical quantity associated with the motion of
the planet that remains constant with time is
(a) velocity (b) centripetal force
(c) linear momentum (d) angular momentum
3. Acceleration due to gravity and its variation with altitude & depth :-
Relation between g and G : Where symbols have their usual meaning.
GM e Me = Mass of the earth
g 2
Re R e = Radius of the earth
This relation gives acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the earth.

Gravitation 223
 The value g is independent of mass, size and shape of the body falling
under gravity but g varies with altitude and depth & depends on shape of
the earth and rotation of the earth.
(i) Which of the following graph shows the correct variation of acceleration
due to gravity with distance from the centre of the earth :

   

        
   

(a) (i) (b) (ii) (c) (iii) (d) (iv)

(ii) At which place, the weight of the body is maximum
(a) at poles
(b) equator
(c) at the centre
(d) at 1 km above the surface of the earth
(iii) If the diameter of the earth becomes twice its present value but mass
remaining the same, then the weight of the object would be
W W W
(a) (b)
2 4 2
(iv) The change in the value of g at a height h above the surface of the
earth is same distance at a depth h below the surface of the earth.
When both d & h are much smaller that the radius of the earth, then
choose the correct answer
h 3h
(a) d = (b) d = (c) d = 2h (d) d = h
2 2
(v) If the radius of two planets be R1 & R2 and their densities be 1 &
1, then ratio of acceleration due to gravity on the planets will be
(a) R1 1 : R2 2 (b) R1 2 : R2 1
(c) 1 : 1 (d) R2 1 : R1 1
4. Escape Speed :-
If we throw a ball vertically upwards from the surface of the earth; it rises
to a certain height and falls back. If we throw it with a greater velocity, it

224 Physics Class XI

 never come back. It will escape from the gravitational pull of the earth.
This minimum velocity is called escape velocity.
(i) Escape speed of a body of mess m depends upon its mass as
(a) m0 (b) m (c) m2 (d) m3
(ii) The escape velocity for an object projected vertically upward from
the earth's surface is approx. 11 km/s. If the body is projected at an
angle of 45° with the vertical, then escape velocity will be
(a) 11/ 2 km/s (b) 11 km/s (c) 11 2 km/s (d) 22 km/s

(iii) The value of escape velocity on a certain planet is 2 km/s. Then the
value of orbital speed of a satellite orbiting close to its surface is
(a) 12 km/s (b) 1 km/s (c) 2 km/s (d) 2 2 km/s
(iv) The escape speed of the planet is v. If the radius of the planet contracts
1
to th of present value, without any change in mass, the escape speed
4
would became
(a) halved (b) doubled (c) quadripled (d) one fourth

(v) The moon has no atmosphere as

(a) The escape speed on the moon is very large as the thermal speed
of the molecules of gases on moon.
(b) The escape speed on the moon is equal to the thermal speed of
the gaseous molecules on the moon.
(c) The escape speed on the moon is very small as compared to the
thermal speed of the molecules of gases on moon.
(d) Size of the moon as compared to the earth is very less and hence
escape speed of moon is large.
5. Satellite :-
A small body revolving around a planet in an orbit is called its satellite.
To put the satellite with a particular orbit around the earth, we need to
give it two velocities. A minimum vertical velocity to take the satellite to
a suitable height for which multistage rockets are used and secondly when
satellite is reached at a particular height it is given a horizontal velocity
called orbital velocity.
Geostationary satellite are used for communication purposes and polar
satellite are used for spying and remote sensing.

Gravitation 225
 (i) Time period of earth's satellite in circular orbit is independent of
(a) mass of the satellite
(b) radius of the orbit
(c) both the mass and radius of the orbit
(d) neither the mass of the satellite nor the radius of the orbit
(ii) The time period of a satellite of the earth is 5 hrs. If the separation
between the earth & satellite is increased to 4 time the previous value,
the new time period will become
(a) 10 hrs. (b) 80 hrs. (c) 40 hrs. (d) 20 hrs.
(iii) If suddenly the gravitational force of attraction between the earth and
a satellite revolving around it becomes zero, then the satellite will
(a) continue to move in its orbit with the same velocity
(b) move tangentially to the original orbit with the same velocity
(c) become stationary in its orbit
(d) move towards the earth
(iv) The total energy of a satellite is E. What is its potential energy?
(a) 2 E (b) –2 E (c) E (d) –E

program from one part of the world to the other because its
(a) period of revolution is greater than the period of rotates of the
earth about its axis.
(b) Period of revolution is less than the period of rotation of the earth
about its axis.
(c) Period of revolution is equal to the period of rotation of the earth
about its axis.
(d) mass is less than the mass of the earth.

Answers For Very Short Questions (1 Mark)

1.
force between the two bodies.
2. When moving in a merry go round, our weight appears to decrease when we
move down and increases when we move up, this change in weight makes
us feel giddy.
3.
(ii) Surface temperature of planet.

226 Physics Class XI

 4. F= ,F m but g = and does not depend on ‘m’ hence they
bodies fall with same ‘g’.
5. No, the gravitational force is independent of intervening medium.

6. F = 1 F =

7. Mass does not change, weight at centre of earth will be 0 because g = 0.

8.

9. ve = v0, ve = and v0 = when r = R.

10. T = and v = T is independent of mass, =1:1 TA = T .

11.
12. The gravitational force between satellite and earth provides the necessary
centripetal force for the satellite to orbit the earth.
13. The speed of satellite during descent is much larger than during ascent, and
so heat produced is large.
14. No, A satellite will be always visible only if it revolves in the equatorial
plane, but New Delhi does not lie in the region of equatorial plane.
15. ‘g’ gets doubled as g (density).
16. As g = GM/R2 and the value of R at the poles is less than that the equator, so
g at poles is greater than that g at the equator. Now, gp > ge, hence mgp > ge
i.e., the weight of a body at the poles is more than the weight at the equator.
17.
However, the gravity is used in providing necessary centripetal force, so is
in a state of free fall towards the earth.
18. Geostationary satellite are used for telecommunication and polars
satellite for remote sensing.
19. Angular velocity of binary stars are same is A= ,

TA = T

Gravitation 227
20.

21. The force of gravitation exerted by the earth on a body of mass m is

F =

Acceleration imparted to the body, g =

Clearly, g does not depend on m. Hence the earth imparts same acceleration
to all bodies.
22. The satellite will move tangentially to the original orbit with a velocity with
which it was revolving.

Short Answers (2 Marks)

GM
23. g = if R decreases by 1% it becomes
R2
GM GM GM
g = 1.02 (1 0.02)
(.99R)2 R2 R2
GM
g increases by 0.02 , therefore increases by 2%.
R2
24. ected in space.
25. The maximum orbital velocity of a satellite orbiting near its surface is

v0 =

For the satellite to escape gravitational pull the velocity must become ve

ve =
This means that it has to increases 0.414 in 1 or 41.4%.
The minimum increment is required, as the velocity of satellite is maximum
when it is near the earth.
26. Here
g =

228 Physics Class XI

 or g R

= .

27. ve = , vp =

Mp =

vp =

= 7.47 km/sec.

28. g = 64% of g =

g =

h =

29. gd = gh

d = 2h = 2 × 40 = 80 km.

30. R = 1.5 × 108 km = 1.5 × 1011 m

T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 3600 s

Gravitation 229
 Centripetal force =gravitational force

Ms =

Ms = 2.01 × 1030 g.

31. g for r > 0 above surface of earth i.e.,

g (R – d) for r < 0 below surface of earth i.e., AC

g is max. for r = 0 on surface.
32. Given Ms = 2 × 1030 kg,
Me = 6 × 1024 kg, r = 1.5 × 1011 m
Let m be the mass of the rocket. Let at distance x from the earth, the
gravitational force on the rocket be zero.
Then at this distance, Gravitational pull of the earth on the rocket
= Gravitational pull of the sun on the rocket.
GMs m
i.e., = or =
(r x)2

R x
or =
x
or r – x = 577.35x

230 Physics Class XI

 or 578.35 x = r = 1.5 × 1011

or x =

33. T1 = 365 days; r1 = r, T2 = ?, r2 = r/2

or T2 =

Therefore decrease in number of days in one year will be

=365 – 129 = 236 days.
34. Here mg = 63 N, h = R/2

As =

gh =

mgh =

35. Since the earth revolves from west to east, so when the rocket is launched
from west to east the relative velocity of the rocket increases which helps it
to rise without much consumption of fuel.

36. The value of ‘g’ on hills is less than at the plane, so the weight of tennis ball
on the hills is lesser force than at planes that is why the earth attract the ball
on hills with lesser force than at planes. Hence the ball bounces higher.

37. The tidal effect depends inversely on the cube of the distance, while
gravitational force depends on the square of the distance.

Gravitation 231
38.

81x2 = (60 R – x)2

9x = 60 R – x
x = 6 R.
39. According to Kepler’s IInd law, area velocity for the palnet is constant

t1 = 2t2.

40. Gravitational P.E. of mass m in orbit of radius R = U =

Ui =

Uf =

U = Uf – Ui =

41. g =

232 Physics Class XI

 4
g' = GR g
3
The gain in P.E. at the highest point will be same in both cases. Hence
mg h = mgh
4
m GRgh
mgh 3
h =
mg 4
m GR1g1
3
3 4 R g 1.5
h =
Rg
h = 18 m.

Answers For 3 Marks Questions

44. E1 =

E2 =

E3 =

From

Gravitation 233
 E =

is equal and opposite to

As gravitational potential is scalar

1 2 3

46. 1 = PE at 150 km – PE at the surface

W1 =

Work done on satellite in 2nd stage = W2

= energy required to give orbital velocity v0

W2 > W1, so second stage requires more energy.

47. –1
e = 11.2 kms , velocity of projection = v = 3ve Let m be the mass of projectile
and v0 the velocity after it escapes gravitational pull.

234 Physics Class XI

 1 2 1 1 2
mv mve2 mv0
2 2 2

v0 =

v0 =
v0 =31.68 km s–1.
48.
to the total energy with which it is revolving around the earth.

The K.E. of satellite = , v=

The P.E. of satellite =

T.E. =

Energy required will be .

51. E1 = =
If v is velocity of the satellite at distance 2R, than total energy
E2 =K.E. + P.E.

Orbital velocity of satellite, v= or v2 =

So, =

E2 =
Minimum energy required to launch the satellite is

=E2 – E1 =

Gravitation 235
 Answers For Numericals

58. F =

F = 4.1 × 1023 N

F =

v =

v =

v = 1.3 × 104 ms–1.

59. Let m1 = m then m2 = M – m
Force between them when they are separated by distance ‘r’

F =

m and equate to zero

M = 2m; m =

m1 = m2 =

GM
60. g =
R2
Taking logarithm log g = log G + log M – 2 log R

236 Physics Class XI

 = 0+0–2 =

61. Total Energy of the body = KE + PE =

Let v be velocity acquired by body on reaching the surface of earth.

Total Energy on the surface=

According to law of conservatives of energy

v2 = =

v =

62. g = 4% of g =

h = 4R = 4 × 6400 = 25,600 km.

63. Gravitational intensity =

Gravitation 237
 = –R

3 = – 4.8 × 107 J kg–1.

64. U = Potential at height h =

U =

65. Escape velocity from the earth’s surface is

ve =

Escape velocity from Jupiter’s surface will be

ve =

= 318 M, R = 11.2 R

ve =

=ve × .

66. rd law

=
TN : TS = 31.6 : 1.

238 Physics Class XI

67. The magnitude of angular momentum at P is Lp = mprpvp
Similarly magnitude of angular momentum at A is LA = mArAvA
From conservation of angular momentum
mprpvp = mArAvA

rA > rp, vp > vA

nd law equal areas are swept in equal intervals of time. Time taken to

Answer (MCQ) Key :

68. (d) 69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (d) 72. (c) 73. (c)
74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (d) 79. (b)
80. (d) 81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (d) 85. (c)
86. (d) 87. (a)

HINTS AND SOLUTION (MCQ)

68. (d) GM G(M / 2)

g 2
and g1 2
2g
R R
2

g 2g g
% increase
% in g
increasing 100 100 100%
g g

w 2R
69. (c) At equator, g1 g 1 g w 2R
g

vR
w0 m g1 m(g w R) m g

Speed of ship relative to the velocity of centre of earth be V0 V .

(v0 v) 2
Weight on spring balance, W m g
R

Gravitation 239
 1
w (v 0 v) 2 v2
1 1
w0 Rg Rg

2wv
w w0 1
g

4 R 2e g
70. (b) On the moon, g m G
3 4 3 6
4 R 2e g
Work done in jumping = m × g × 0.5 = m × × h1
3 4 3 6
h1 = 3.0m
71. (d) Gravitational intensity due to ring at a distance d = 3 R, on it's axis
is I GMd 3GM
2 2 3/2
(d R ) 8 R2
3GM 2
Force on sphere = 8m × I
R2
GMms
72. (c) Total energy of satellite, E
2rs
GM
Orbital velocity, Vs
rs
L = ms vs rs = (2E ms rs2)½

GM (M m) dF
73. (c) F For maximum, 0
x2 dm
dF G m 1.
(M 2m) 0
dm x2 M 2

74. (c) First decreases, becomes zero and than increases again.

dA L mVr Vr
75. (a) A real velocity =
dt 2m 2m 2
r GM 1
GMr
2 r 2

dA
So, r.
dt

240 Physics Class XI

76. (c) gn = gd

2h d
g 1 g 1 d 2h.
R R

r r
77. (d) Position of null point from mass m, x
4m 3
1
m

GM G.4m 9GM
Gravitational potential at null point r 2r r
.
3 3
78. (b) gp = g, ge= g – w2R < gp

mg R 2 60 64002
79. (d) mg1 30
(R h) 2 (6400 h) 2
h 2651 km

G 1 G 100 1
80. (c) x m
x2 (1 x) 2 11
1 ( GMm)
81. (b) mv 2 Ui Uf 0
2 R
v 2gR

GMm
82. (b) On earth's surface, U1
R
At a height equal to radius of earth,
GMm GMm
U2
R r 2R
GMm GMm GMm
U U2 U1
2R R 2R
2
GM gR m mgR
But g U
R2 2R 2

Gravitation 241
83. (d) Gravitational P.E. of mass m in an orbit of radius R
GMm GMm GMm
U Ui , Uf
R 2R 3R
GMm
U Uf Ui .
6R
84. (c) Mass does not changes.
R
85. (d) At depth, d = 2
,

d g
gd g 1
R 2
mg
Net weight = 125 N
2
86. (a) At poles = 90°, so,
gpole = g – w2R cos2 = g.

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (a) A & R both are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
2. (a) A & R both are true and R is the correct explanation of A
3. (a) A & R both are true and R is the correct explanation of A
GMm
4. (d) A & R both are false. E
2(R h)
GMM
PE
(R h)
5. (b) A & R both are true, but R is not the correct explanation of A.
Some of the comets are non-periodic and move along hyperbolic or
parabolic paths. They don't obey Kelpers law of planetary motion.
6. (b) both A & R are true and R is not the correct explanation of A.
GMm mv 2
r2 r
2
GMm m 2 r
r2 r T
4 2 3
T2 r T2 r3
GM

242 Physics Class XI

7. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
8. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
(gp – ge) = Re 2
9. (a) both A & R are true and R is the correct explanation of A.
10. (a)
11. (a)
12. (a)
CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (c) conservative
ii. (c) Medium separating the two masses
iii. (a) [M–1 L3 T–2]
iv. (c) Nuclear force
v. (c) F

2. i. (c) angular momentum 3/2

T1 r1
ii. (a) 10 2 :1 use T r2
2
iii. (c) v1 < v2 < v3 as L = mvr = constant
1
v .
r
iv. (b) decreased as T 2 (R)3

v. (d) angular momentum

3. i. (d) (iv)
ii. (a) At poles
W GM
iii. (b) use g = 2
4 R
2h d
iv. (c) d = 2h Put 1 1 as gn = gd.
R R
4
v. (a) R1 1 : R2 2 [Use g = GR .]
3
Gravitation 243
4. i. (a) m0

ii. (b) 11 km/s

iii. (d) 2 2 km/s

iv. (a) halved

v. (c)

5. i. (a) mass of the satellite

2 3
T1 R1
ii. (c) 40 hrs. Hint :
T2 R2
iii. (b)

iv. (a) E GMm GMm so PE = 2E

, P.E.
2r r
v. (c)

****

244 Physics Class XI

7.1 Interatomic Forces
The forces between the atoms due to electrostatic interaction between the
charges of the atoms are called interatomic forces.
(1) When two atoms are brought close to each other to a distance of the order
of 10–10 m, attractive interatomic force is produced between two atoms.
(2) This attractive force increases continuously with decrease in r and
becomes maximum for one value of r called critical distance, represented

(3) When the distance between the two atoms becomes r0, the interatomic
force will be zero. This distance r0 is called normal or equilibrium
distance.

(4) When the distance between the two atoms further decreased,
the interatomic force becomes repulsive in nature and increases very
rapidly.

Properties Of Matter 245

 (5) The potential energy U is related with the interatomic force F by the
following relation.

F =

When the distance between the two atoms becomes r0, the potential energy of
the system of two atoms becomes minimum (i.e., attains maximum negative
value hence the two atoms at separation r0 will be in a state of equilibrium.

7.2 Intermolecular Forces

The forces between the molecules due to electrostatic interaction between
the charges of the molecules are called intermolecular forces. These forces
are also called Vander Waal forces and are quite weak as compared to inter-
atomic forces.

7.3 Solids
A solid is that state of matter in which its constituent atoms or molecules
are held strongly at the position of minimum potential energy and it has a

7.4 Elastic Property of Matter

(1) Elasticity : The property of matter by virtue of which a body tends to
regain its original shape and size after the removal of deforming force
is called elasticity.
(2) Plasticity : The property of matter by virtue of which it does not regain
its original shape and size after the removal of deforming force is called
plasticity.
(3) Perfectly elastic body : If on the removal of deforming forces the body

elastic.

body.
(4) Perfectly plastic body : If the body does not have any tendency to

is said to be perfectly plastic.

body. Practically there is no material which is either perfectly elastic or

perfectly plastic.
(5) Reason of elasticity : On applying the deforming forces, restoring forces
are developed. When the deforming force is removed, these restoring

246 Physics Class XI

 forces bring the molecules of the solid to their respective equilibrium
position (r = r0) and hence the body regains its original form.
(6) Elastic limit : The maximum deforming force upto which a body retains
its property of elasticity is called elastic limit of the material of body.
Elastic limit is the property of a body whereas elasticity is the property
of material of the body.
(7) Elastic fatigue : The temporary loss of elastic properties because of the
action of repeated alternating deforming force is called elastic fatigue.
It is due to this reason :
(i) Bridges are declared unsafe after a long time of their use.
(ii) Spring balances show wrong readings after they have been used for
a long time.
(iii) We are able to break the wire by repeated bending.
The time delay in which the substance regains its
original condition after the removal of deforming force is called elastic
le for perfectly elastic substance, like quartz,

7.5 Stress
The internal restoring force acting per unit area of cross section of the
deformed body is called stress.

Stress =

Unit : N/m2 (S.I.), dyne/cm2 (C.G.S.)

Stress developed in a body depends upon how the external forces are applied
over it.
On this basis there are two types of stresses : Normal and Shear or tangential
stress
(1) Normal stress : Here the force is applied normal to the surface.
It is again of two types : Longitudinal and Bulk or volume stress.
(i) Longitudinal stress
(a) Deforming force is applied parallel to the length and causes increase
in length.

Properties Of Matter 247

 (b) Area taken for calculation of stress is area of cross section.
(c) Longitudinal stress produced due to increase in length of a body
under a deforming force is called tensile stress.
(d) Longitudinal stress produced due to decrease in length of a body
under a deforming force is called compressional stress.
(ii) Bulk or Volume stress
(a) It occurs in solids, liquids or gases.
(b) Deforming force is applied normal to surface at all points.
(c) It is equal to change in pressure because change in pressure is
responsible for change in volume.
(2) Shear or tangential stress : It comes in picture when successive layers
of solid move on each other i.e., when there is a relative displacement
between various layers of solid.
(i) Here deforming force is applied tangential to one of the faces.
(ii) Area for calculation is the area of the face on which force is applied.
(iii) It produces change in shape, volume remaining the same.

7.6 Strain

strain. It has no dimensions and units. Strain are of three types :

L
(1) Linear strain : Linear strain =
N
Linear strain in the direction of deforming force is called longitudinal
strain and in a direction perpendicular to force is called lateral strain.

(2) Volumetric strain : Volumetric strain =

(3) Shearing strain :

248 Physics Class XI

 X
=
L
When a beam is bent both compression strain as well as an extension
strain is produced.
7.7 Stress-strain Curve
(1) When the strain is small (region OP) stress is proportional to strain. This
is the region where the so called Hooke’s law is obeyed. The point P is
called limit of proportionality and slope of line OP gives the Young’s
modulus Y of the material of the wire. Y = tan




  
 


 
  

 
(2) Point E known as elastic limit or yield-point.
(3) Between EA, the strain increases much more.
(4) The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of the material of
wire.

Brittle material Ductile material Elastomers

The plastic region between The material on this type

For ealstomers the strain
E and C is small for brittle have a good plastic range
produced is much larger
material and it will break than the stress applied.
and such materials can
soon after the elastic limit Such materials have no
be easily changed into
is crossed. plastic range and the
breaking point lies very
be drawn into thin wires. close to elastic limit.
AORTA - The large tube (Vessel) carrying blood from Example : Elastic tissue
heart. of aorta (AORTA)

Properties Of Matter 249

7.8 Hooke’s law and Modulus of Elasticity
According to this law, within the elastic limit, stress is proportional to the
strain.
i.e., stress strain
stress
k= = constant
strain
The constant k is called modulus of elasticity.

(1) It’s value depends upon the nature of material of the body and the manner
in which the body is deformed.

(2) It’s value depends upon the temperature of the body.

(3) It’s value is independent of the dimensions of the body.

There are three moduli of elasticity namely Young’s modulus (Y), Bulk
modulus (K) and modulus of rigidity ( ) corresponding to three types of
the strain.

7.9 Young’s Modulus (Y)

of proportionality.
F/A FL
= =
L/L A L
Thermal stress :
in temperature its length will change and so it will exert a normal stress. This
stress is called thermal stress. Thermal stress = Y Force produced in
the body = YA Here, = change in temperate.

7.10 Work Done in Stretching a Wire

In stretching a wire work is done against internal restoring forces. This work
is stored in the wire as elastic potential energy or strain energy.

Energy stored in wire (l = change in length)

Energy stored in per unit volume of wire

250 Physics Class XI

7.11 Breaking of Wire
When the wire is loaded beyond the elastic limit, then strain increases much
more rapidly. The maximum stress corresponding to B (see stress-strain

or tensile strength and the force by application of which the wire breaks is
called the breaking force.
(i) Breaking force depends upon the area of cross-section of the wire.
(ii) Breaking stress is a constant for a given material.
(iii) Breaking force is independent of the length of wire.
(iv) Breaking force r2.
(v) Length of wire if it breaks by its own weight

L = [Here, P Stress or pressure]

[and d Density and g Acceleration due to gravity]

7.12 Bulk Modulus

The ratio of normal stress to the volumetric strain within the elastic limits is
called as Bulk modulus.
This is denoted by K.

K =

K =

where p = increase in pressure; V = original volume; V = change in volume

The reciprocal of bulk modulus is called compressibility

C = compressibility =
S.I. unit of compressibility is N–1m2 and C.G.S. unit is dyne–1 cm2.
Gases have two bulk moduli, namely isothermal elasticity E and adiabatic
elasticity E .

7.13 Modulus of Rigidity

Within limits of proportionality, the ratio of tangential stress to the shearing
strain is called modulus of rigidity of the material of the body and is denoted
Properties Of Matter 251
 by , i.e.,

7.14 Poisson’s Ratio

Lateral strain : The ratio of change in radius to the original radius is called
lateral strain.
Longitudinal strain : The ratio of change in length to the original length is
called longitudinal strain. The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain is
called Poisson’s ratio ( ).

i.e., =

7.15 Factors Affecting Elasticity

(1) Hammering and rolling : This result is increase in the elasticity of
material.
(2) Annealing : Annealing results is decrease in the elasticity of material.
(3) Temperature : Elasticity decreases with rise in temperature but
the elasticity of invar steel (alloy) does not change with change of
temperature.
(4) Impurities :
present in the material.
7.16 Practical Applications of Elasticity
(i) The thickness of the metallic rope used in the crane is decided from the
knowledge of elasticity.
(ii) Maximum height of a mountain on earth can be estimated.
(iii) A hollow shaft is stronger than a solid shaft made of same mass, length
and material.

7.17 Intermolecular Force

The force of attraction or repulsion acting between the molecules are known
as intermolecular force. The nature of intermolecular force is electromagnetic.

252 Physics Class XI

 Cohessive force Adhesive force
The force of attraction between molecules The force of attraction between the mole-

cohesion. This force is lesser in liquids the force of adhesion.

and least in gases.

7.18 Surface Tension

The property of a liquid due to which its free surface tries to have minimum
surface area is called surface tension. A small liquid drop has spherical shape
due to surface tension. Surface tension of a liquid is measured by the force
acting per unit length on either side of an imaginary line drawn on the free
surface of liquid, then T = (F/L).
(1) It depends only on the nature of liquid and is independent of the area of
surface or length of line considered.

(3) Dimension : [MT–2]. (Similar to force constant)

(4) Units : N/m (S.I.) and Dyne/cm [C.G.S.]

7.19 Factors Affecting Surface Tension

(1) Temperature : The surface tension of liquid decreases with rise of
temperature
Tt = T0 (1 – t)
where Tt, T0 are the surface tensions at t0C and 00C respectively and

(2) Impurities : A highly soluble substance like sodium chloride when

dissolved in water, increases the surface tension of water. But the springly
soluble substances like phenol when dissolved in water, decreases the
surface tension of water.

7.20 Surface Energy

The potential energy of surface molecules per unit area of the surface is
called surface energy.
Unit : Joule/m2 (S.I.) erg/cm2 (C.G.S.)
Dimension : [MT–2]
W=T× A[

Properties Of Matter 253

 i.e.,
the area of the liquid surface by unity against the force of surface tension at
constant temperature.

7.21 Splitting of Bigger Drop

When a drop of radius R splits into n smaller drops, (each of radius r) then
surface area of liquid increases.
R3 = nr3
Work done = T × n drops
– surface area of big drop] = T[4n r2 – 4 R2].

7.22 Excess Pressure

 


 

  

 
 

   
 
 

 


  



 
 
  

   







254 Physics Class XI

7.23 Shape of Liquid Meniscus
The curved surface of the liquid is called meniscus of the liquid.
If Fc = Fc < Fc >
tan = = 90º i.e., tan = positive tan = negative
the resultant force acts is acute angle i.e., the is obtuse angle i.e., the
vertically downwards. resultant force directed resultant force directed
Hence the liquid meniscus outside the liquid. Hence inside the liquid. Hence
must be horizontal. the liquid meniscus must the liquid meniscus must
be concave upward. be convex upward.

Example : Pure water Example : Water in glass Example : Mercury in

in silver coated capillary
capillary tube. glass capillary tube.
tube.

7.24 Angle of Contact

between the tangents to the liquid surface and the solid surface inside the
liquid, both the tangents being drawn at the point of contact of the liquid with
the solid.

< 90º = 90º > 90º

  
concave meniscus. plane meniscus. convex meniscus,
Liquid wets the Liquid does not wet the does not wet the
solid surface. solid surface. solid surface.

Properties Of Matter 255

 (i) Its value lies between 0º and 180º.
= 0º for pure water and glass, = 90º for water and silver.
(ii) On increasing the temperature, angle of contact decreases.
(iii) Soluble impurities increases the angle of contact.
(iv) Partially soluble impurities decreases the angle of contact.

7.25 Capillarity
If a tube of very narrow bore (called capillary) is dipped in a liquid, it is
found that the liquid in the capillary either ascends or descends relative to the
surrounding liquid. This phenomenon is called capillarity.

surface of liquid.

7.26 Ascent Formula

When one end of capillary tube of radius r is immersed into a liquid of
density d which wets the sides of the capillary and R = radius of curvature of
liquid meniscus.
T = surface tension of liquid
P = atmospheric pressure

h =

Important points
(i) The capillary rise depends on the nature of liquid and solid both i.e., on
T. d, and R.
(ii) Capillary action for various liquid-solid pair.
Meniscus Angle of contact Level
Concave < 90º Rises
Plane = 90º No rise no fall
Convex > 90º Fall

7.27 Pressure
The normal force exerted by liquid at rest on a given surface in contact with
it is called thrust of liquid on that surface.
If F be the normal force acting on a surface of area A in contact with liquid, then

256 Physics Class XI

 pressure exerted by liquid on this surface is P = F/A
(1) Units : N/m2 or Pascal (S.I.) and Dyne/cm2 (C.G.S.)

(2) Dimension : [P] =

(3) Pressure is a tensor quantity.

(4) Atmospheric pressure : atm = 1.01 × 105 Pa = 1.01bar = 1 torr.
(5) If P0 is the atmospheric pressure then for a point at depth h below the
surface of a liquid of density , hydrostatic pressure P is given by
P – P0 + h g.
(6) Gauge pressure :
P and atmospheric pressure P0 is called gauge pressure. P – P0 + gh.

7.28 Pascal’s Law

The increase in pressure at one point of the enclosed liquid in equilibrium
of rest is transmitted equally to all other points of the liquid and also to the

Example : Hydraulic lift, hydraulic press and hydraulic brakes.

7.29 Archimedes Principle

principle is called Archimedes principle. Apparent weight of the body of

density ( ) when immersed in a liquid of density ( ).
Apparent weight = Actual weight – Upthrust
= W – Fup = V g – V g = V( – )g

Wapp =

(1) Relative density of a body (R.D.)

W
=
W1 W2

Properties Of Matter 257

 (2) If the loss of weight of a body in water is ‘a’ while in liquid is ‘b’

7.30 Streamline, Laminar and Turbulent Flow

element of the liquid passing through a point travels along the same path
and with the same velocity as the preceding element passes through that
point.
The two streamlines cannot cross each other and the greater is the
crowding of streamlines at a place, the greater is the velocity of liquid
particles at that place.

velocity of the liquid.

When a liquid moves with a velocity greater than its
critical velocity, the motion of the particles of liquid becomes disordered

7.31 Critical Velocity

7.32 Equation of Continuity

The equation of continuity is derived from the principle of conservation of
mass.
For an incompressible, streamlined and non-viscous liquid product of area
of cross section of tube and velocity of liquid remains constant.
i.e., a1v1 = a2v2

258 Physics Class XI

 or av = constant; or

When water falls from a tap, the velocity of falling water under the action of
gravity will increase with distance from the tap (i.e., v2 > v1). So in accordance
with continuity equation the cross section of the water stream will decrease (i.e.,
A2 < A1), i.e., the falling stream of water becomes narrower.

7.33 Energy of a Flowing Fluid

Pressure Energy Potential energy Kinetic energy
It is the energy possessed It is the energy possessed It is the energy possessed
by a liquid by virtue of its by liquid by virtue of its by a liquid by virtue of its
pressure. It is the measure height or position above motion or velocity.
of work done in pushing the surface of earth or any
the liquid against pressure reference level taken as
without imparting any zero level.
velocity to it.
Pressure energy of the Potential energy of the Kinetic energy of the
liquid PV liquid mgh Potential
energy per unit mass of liquid Kinetic
Pressure energy per unit the liquid gh energy per unit mass of
mass of the liquid the liquid
Potential energy per unit Kinetic energy per unit
Pressure energy per unit volume of the liquid volume of the liquid
volume of the liquid P

7.34 Bernoulli’s Theorem

According to this theorem the total energy (pressure energy, potential energy
and kinetic energy) per unit volume or mass of an incompressible and non-viscous

= constant

Properties Of Matter 259

 (i) Bernoulli’s theorem for unit mass of :

= constant

(ii) Dividing above equation by g, we get

= constant

Here is called pressure head, h is called gravitational head and

is called velocity head.

7.35 Applications of Bernoulli’s Theorem

(i) Attraction between two closely parallel moving boats.
(ii) Working of an aeroplane : ‘dynamic lift’



(iii) Action of atomiser : 

When a spinning ball is


thrown, it deviates from its usual path in

(vi) Venturimeter :
through pipes.

7.36 Velocity of Efflux

h below the free surface of
the liquid (of depth H) is given by

height h. This result is known as Torricelli’s theorem.

7.37 Viscosity and Newton’s law of Viscous Force

the force between the layers opposing the relative motion is called viscous
force.

260 Physics Class XI

 Viscous force F is proportional to the area of the plane A and the velocity

gradient in a direction normal to the layer,

i.e., F =
Where

liquid.
(1) Units : dyne-s-cm–2 or Poise (C.G.S. system);
Newton-s-m–2 or Poiseuille or decapoise (S.I. system)
1 Poiseuille = 1 decapoise = 10 Poise
(2) Dimension : [ML–1T–1]
(3) With increase in pressure, the viscosity of liquids (except water) increases
while that of gases is independent of pressure. The viscosity of water
decreases with increase in pressure.
(4) Solid friction is independent of the area of surfaces in contact and the
relative velocity between them.
(5) Viscosity represents transport of momentum, while diffusion and
conduction represents transport of mass and energy respectively.
(6) The viscosity of gases increases with increase of temperature.
(7) The viscosity of liquid decreases with increase of temperature.

7.38 Stoke’s Law and Terminal Velocity

Stokes established that if a sphere of radius r moves with velocity v through
, the viscous force opposing the motion of the sphere is
F = 6 rv (stokes law)
If a spherical body of radius r
accelerated and then it’s acceleration becomes zero and it attains a constant
velocity called terminal velocity.

Terminal velocity v =

(i) If > then body will attain constant velocity in downward

direction.
(ii) If < then body will attain constant velocity in upward direction.
Example : Air bubble in a liquid and clouds in sky.

Properties Of Matter 261

 (iii) Terminal velocity graph :

7.39 Poiseuille’s Formula

of liquid in capillary tubes. He found

tube of length ‘l’ and radius r, then the volume of liquid coming out of the
tube per second is

(Poiseuille's equation)

This equation also can be written as, V = where R =

R is called as liquid resistance.

3.40 Stefan’s Law

According to it the radiant energy emitted by a perfectly black body per unit
area per sec (i.e., emissive power of black body) is directly proportional to
the fourth power of its absolute temperature.
i.e., E T4 or E = T4
where = Stefan’s constant having dimension [MT –3 –4] and value
5.67 × 10–8 W/m2K4.
(i) If e is the emissivity of the body then E = e T4
(ii) If Q is the total energy radiated by the body then Q = At e T4
(iii) If a body at temperature T is surrounded by a body at temperature
T0, then E = e (T4 – T04).

Nature of thermal Radiation

contribution in the total radiation.

262 Physics Class XI

 following curves.

These curves show

(i) Energy is not uniformly distributed in the radiation spectrum of
black body.
(ii) At a given temperature the intensity of radiations increases with
increase in wavelength, becomes maximum at particular wavelength
and further increase in wavelength leads to decrease in intensity of
heat radiation.
(iii) Increase in temperature causes increase in energy emission for all
wavelengths.
(iv) Increase in temperature causes decrease in m, where m is
wavelength corresponding to highest intensity. This wavelength
m is inversely pre-operational to the absolute temperature of the
emitter. m T = b
where b is a constant and this equation is known as Wein’s
displacement law. b = 0.2896 × 10–2 mk for black body and is known
as Wien’s constant.

Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark)

1. Why do spring balances show wrong readings after they have been used for
a long time ?
2. Why do we prefer steel to copper in the manufacture of spring ?
3. Draw stress-strain curve for elastomers (elastic tissue of Aorta)
4. How are we able to break a wire by repeated bending ?
5. What is the value of bulk modulus for an incompressible liquid ?

Properties Of Matter 263

 6.
7. What is elastic fatigue ?
8. Why is it easier to swim in sea water than in the river water ?
9. Railway tracks are laid on large sized wooden sleepers. Why ?
10. The dams of water reservoir are made thick near the bottom. Why ?
11.
altitude ?
12. The blood pressure in human is greater at the feet than at the brain. Why ?
13.
14.
15.
16. Antiseptics have low surface tension. Why ?
17.
surface tension ?
18. For solids with elastic modulus of rigidity, the shearing force is proportional

19.
liquids ?
20. Explain why detergents should have small angle of contact ?
21.
22.
23.
24. Why two ships moving in parallel directions close to each other get
attracted ?
25. Why the molecules of a liquid lying near the free surface possess extra
energy ?
26. Why is it easier to wash clothes in hot water soap solution ?

264 Physics Class XI

27. Why does mercury not wet glass ?
28. Why ends of a glass tube become rounded on heating ?
29. What makes rain coats water proof ?
30.
liquid ?
31. Does it matter if one uses gauge pressure instead of absolute pressure in
applying Bernoulli’s equation ?
32. State Wein’s displacement law for black body radiation.
33. State Stefan Boltzmann law.
34. Name two physical changes that occur on heating a body.
35. Distinguish between heat and temperature.
36. Which thermometer is more sensitive a mercury or gas thermometer ?
37. Metal disc has a hole in it. What happens to the size of the hole when disc
is heated ?
38. Name a substance that contracts on heating.
39.
40. Is the bulb of a thermometer made of diathermic or adiabatic wall ?
41. What is the absorptive power of a perfectly black body ?
42. At what temperature does a body stop radiating ?
43. If Kelvin temperature of an ideal black body is doubled, what will be the

44. In which method of heat transfer does gravity not play any part ?
45. Give a plot of Fahrenheit temperature versus Celsius temperature.
46. Why birds are often seen to swell their feather in winter ?
47.
system to loosen the disc from the hole.

Properties Of Matter 265

 Short Answer Type Questions (2 Marks)
48. State Hooke’s law. Deduce expression for Young’s modulus of material of a
wire of length ‘l’, radius of cross-section ‘r’ loaded with a body of mass M
producing an extension l in it.

49. A wire of length l area of cross-section A and Young’s modulus Y is

stretched by an amount x. What is the work done ?

50. Prove that the elastic potential energy per unit volume is equal to stress
× strain.

51.
bulk modulus and compressibility.

52.
can be calculated.

53. Which is more elastic steel or rubber. Explain.

54.
length of wire P is L m and its Young’s modulus is Y N/m2 while length of
wire Q is twice that of P and its material has Young’s modulus half that of P.
Compute the ratio of their elongation.

55. In case of emergency, a vacuum brake is used to stop the train. How does
this brake works ?
56.
57.
58. Using dimensional method obtain, Stoke’s law expression for viscous force
F=6 a v.
59.

266 Physics Class XI

60. –2 N.

your answer.

61. e in contact with a certain portion

common to both the bubbles. What will be the shape of the common boundary
as seen from inside the smaller bubble ? Support your answer with a neat

62. During blood transfusion the needle is inserted in a vein where gauge pressure
is pg and atmospheric pressure is p. At what height must the blood container
p.
63.
end.
64. On a hot day, a car is left in sunlight with all windows closed. Explain why
it is considerably warmer than outside, after some time ?
65.
on the capillary rise in the second case.

Properties Of Matter 267

66. If a drop of water falls on a very hot iron, it does not evaporate for a long
time. Why ?
67. The earth without its atmosphere would be inhospitably cold. Why ?
68.
heat. Why ?
69. A sphere, a cube and a disc made of same material and of equal masses
heated to same temperature of 200ºC. These bodies are then kept at same
lower temperature in the surrounding, which of these will cool (i) fastest,
(ii) slowest, explain.
70. (a) Why pendulum clocks generally go faster in winter and slow in summer.
(b) Why the brake drums of a car are heated when it moves down a hill at
constant speed.
71. The plots of intensity versus wavelength for three black bodies at temperature
T1, T2 and T3 respectively are shown.

Arrange the temperature in decreasing order. Justify your answer.

72.
Why ? Why melting point of ice or boiling point of water not used as standard

Short Answer Type Questions (3 Marks)

73. The knowledge of elasticity useful in selecting metal ropes show its use,
in cranes for lifting heavy loads, when rope of steel is used (Elastic limit
30 × 107 Nm–2) if load of 105 kg is to be lifted.

What should be the radius of steel rope ? What should we do to increase

268 Physics Class XI

74. Stress-strain curve for two wires of material A and B are as shown in Fig.

(a) which material in more ductile ?

(b) which material has greater value of young modulus ?
(c) which of the two is stronger material ?
(d) which material is more brittle ?
75.
the principle and working of hydraulic brakes.
76. A manometer reads the pressure of a gas in an enclosure as shown in the

pressure is 76 cm of mercury, (i) Give absolute and gauge pressure of the

gas in the enclosure for cases (a) and (b).

77. How would the levels change in (b) if 13.6 cm of H2O (immersible with
mercury) are poured into the right limb of the manometer in the above
numerical.

78.
of a liquid in a capillary tube.

79. The terminal velocity of a tiny droplet is v. N number of such identical

Properties Of Matter 269

 droplets combine together forming a bigger drop. Find the terminal velocity
of the bigger drop.

80. Two spherical soap bubble coalesce. If v be the change in volume of the
contained air, A is the change in total surface area then show that 3PV + 4AT
= 0 where T is the surface tension and P is atmospheric pressure.

81. Give the principle of working of venturi-meter. Obtain an expression for

82. A big size balloon of mass M is held stationary in air with the help of a

air. Describe the motion of the balloon and the block when the string is cut.
Support your answer with calculations.

83.

a particular common height. Is the force exerted by the water on the base of

reading on weighing scale.

84. A liquid drop of diameter D breaks up into 27 tiny drops. Find the resulting
change in energy. Take surface tension of liquid as .

85.

86.

mercury in a thermometer.
87. 1 and 2 and
initial length l1 and l2 respectively are heated to the same temperature. Find
relation in 1, 2, l1 and l2
constant.
88. Explain why :
(a) a body with lar
(b) a brass tumbler feels much colder than a wooden tray on a chilly day.
89. Draw a graph to show the anomalous behaviour of water. Explain its
importance for sustaining life under water.

270 Physics Class XI

90. A brass wire 1.8 m long at 27ºC is held taut with little tension between
two rigid supports. If the wire is cooled to a temperature of – 39ºC, what

of linear expansion of brass = 2.0 × 10–50C–1, Young’s modulus of brass =

0.91 × 1011 Pa.
91.
capacity at constant pressure and at constant volume and write their units.
92. What is latent heat ? Give its units. With the help of a suitable graph, explain
the terms latent heat of fusion and latent heat of vaporisation.
93.
regelation. Give a practical application of it.
94.
simple experiment to demonstrate the boiling of H2O at a temperature much
lower than 100ºC. Give a practical application of this phenomenon.
95. State and explains the three modes of transfer of heat. Explains how the loss

96.
cross-section, thickness d1 and d2 having thermal conductivities K1 and K2
respectively are kept in contact. Deduce expression for equivalent thermal
conductivity.

Long Answer Type Questions (5 Marks)

97. Draw and discuss stress versus strain graph, explaining clearly the terms
elastic limit, permanent set, proportionality limit, elastic hysteresis, tensible
strength.
98. Show that there is always an excess pressure on the concave side of the
meniscus of a liquid. Obtain an expression for the excess pressure inside
(i) a liquid drop (ii) soap bubble (iii) air bubble inside a liquid.
99. State and prove Bernoullis theorem. Give its limitation. Name any two
application of the principle.
100.
a sphere falling through a viscous liquid. Use the formula to explain the
observed rise of air bubbles in a liquid.
101. On what factors does the rate of heat conduction in a metallic rod in the steady

of thermal conductivity. Write its unit and dimensions.

Properties Of Matter 271

102. Show graphically how the energy emitted from a hot body varies with the
wavelength of radiation. Give some of salient points of the graph.
103. What is meant by a block body. Explain how a black body may be achieved
in practice. State and explain Stefan’s law ?
104.
is Pascal’s law applied in a hydraulic lift.
105. Discuss energy distribution of black body radiation spectrum and explain
Wein’s displacement law of radiation and Stefan’s law of heat radiation.
NUMERICALS
106. An aluminium wire 1 m in length and radius 1 mm is loaded with a mass
of 40 kg hanging vertically. Young’s modulus of Al is 7.0 × 10 10 N/m2.
Calculate (a) tensile stress (b) change in length (c) tensile strain and (d) the
force constant of such a wire.
107. The average depth of ocean is 2500 m. Calculate the fractional compression

of water at the bottom of ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water

is 2.3 × 109 N/m2.

108. A force of 5 × 103 N is applied tangentially to the upper face of a cubical
block of steel of side 30 cm. Find the displacement of the upper face relative
to the lower one, and the angle of shear. The shear modulus of steel is
8.3 × 1010 pa.
109. How much should the pressure on one litre of water be changed to compress
it by 0.10%.
110. Calculate the pressure at a depth of 10 m in an Ocean. The density of sea
water is 1030 kg/m3. The atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 pa.
111. In a hydraulic lift air exerts a force F on a small piston of radius 5 cm. The
pressure is transmitted to the second piston of radius 15 cm. If a car of mass
1350 kg is to be lifted, calculate force F that is to be applied.
112. How much pressure will a man of weight 80 kg f exert on the ground when
(i) he is lying and (2) he is standing on his feet. Given area of the body of
the man is 0.6 m2 and that of his feet is 80 cm2.
113.
200 k pa. (a) What is the recommended gauge pressure ? (b) What is the

272 Physics Class XI

 the car is driven to a mountain peak where the atmospheric pressure is 10%
below that at sea level, what will the tyre gauge read ?
114. Calculate excess pressure in an air bubble of radius 6 mm. Surface tension
of liquid is 0.58 N/m.
115. Terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2 mm through a tank of oil at
pcu = 8.9 ×
103 kg/m3, oil = 1.5 × 103 kg/m3.
116. Calculate the velocity with which a liquid emerges from a small hole in the
side of a tank of large cross-sectional area if the hole is 0.2 m below the
surface liquid (g = 10 ms–2).
117. A soap bubble of radius 1 cm expands into a bubble of radius 2 cm. Calculate
the increase in surface energy if the surface tension for soap is 25 dyne/cm.
118. A glass plate of 0.2 m2 in area is pulled with a velocity of 0.1 m/s over a larger
glass plate that is at rest. What force is necessary to pull the upper plate if
0.01 Ns/m2.
119. The area of cross-section of a water pipe entering the basement of a house is
4 × 10–4 m2. The pressure of water at this point is 3 × 105 N/m2, and speed
of water is 2 m/s. The pipe tapers to an area of cross section of 2 × 10–4 m2,

120.

petrol of density 0.8 cgs units. The viscosity of water and petrol are 0.01 and
0.02 cgs units respectively.
121. The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 109 Nm–2. Calculate the maximum
length of the wire made of this metal which may be suspended without
breaking. The density of the metal = 7.8 × 10–3 kg m–3. Take g = 10 N kg–1.
122. Two stars radiate maximum energy at wavelength, 3.6 × 10 –7 m and
4.8 × 10–7 m respectively. What is the ratio of their temperatures ?
123. Find the temperature of 149ºF on kelvin scale.
124.

Properties Of Matter 273

125.
5.243 m both initially at 27ºC. To what temperature should the iron ring

1.2 × 105 k–1 ?

126. 100 g of ice at 0ºC is mixed with 100 g of water at 80ºC. The resulting
temperature is 6ºC. Calculate heat of fusion of ice.

127. Calculate heat required to convert 3 kg of water at 0ºC to steam at 100ºC.

–1 –1
2O = 4186 J kg k and latent heat of steam
= 2.256 × 106 J/kg.

128. Calculate the stress developed inside a tooth cavity that filled with
copper. When hot tea at temperature 57ºC is drunk. You can take body
(tooth) temperature to be 37ºC and = 1.7 × 10–5/ºC bulk modules for
copper = 140 × 109 Nm–2.

129. A body at temperature 94ºC cools to 86ºC in 2 min. What time will it take
to cool from 82ºC to 78°C. The temperature of surrounding is 20ºC.

130. A body re-emits all the radiation it receives. Find surface temperature of
the body. Energy received per unit area per unit time is 2.835 watt/m2 and
= 5.67 × 10–8 W m–2 k–4.

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQs)

131. A spring is stretched by applying a load to its free end. The strain produced
in the spring is
(a) Volumetric (b) Shear

132. The maximum load a wire can withstand without breaking, when its length
is reduced to half of its original length, will
(a) be double (b) be half
(c) be for times (d) remain same

274 Physics Class XI

 133. A rigid bar of Mass M is supported symmetrically by three wires each of
length L. Those at each end one of Copper and the middle one is of iron.
The ratio of their diameters, if each is to have the same tension, is equal to

Ycopper Ycopper Y ironYiron Yiron

Yiron Y iron Yiron
(a) (b)
Yiron Yiron Y copper
Ycopper Ycopper Ycopper
Y copper Ycopper
Ycopper Ycopper
Yiron Y 2 Yiron
iron Y iron
Yiron Yiron
(c) (d)
Yiron Yiron
Ycopper Y Ycopper
2
copper Y copper
Ycopper Ycopper

134. A mild steel wire of Length 2L and cross sectional Area A is stretched well
within elastic limit, horizontally between two pillars. A man m is suspended
from the mid point of the wire strain in the wire is
x2 x x2 x2 x2 x x2 x2
(a) (b)
2L2 L L 2L2L L L 2L
x2 x x2 x2 x2 x x2 x2
(c) (d)
2L L L 2L 2L L L 2L
135. For an ideal liquid : (More than one option may be correct)

136.
same for both graph)
   

 




 




 


    
   

(a) Material (ii) is more elastic than material (i) and hence material
(ii) is more brittle.

(c) Material (ii) is elastic over the larger region of strain as compared
to (i)
(d) Material (ii) is more brittle than material (i)

Properties Of Matter 275

137.

one that represents the velocity (v) of the pebble as function of time (t)

(a) (b) (c) (d)

138.

two pipes is
(a) 9:4 (b) 3:2
(c) 3 : 2 2 : 3 3 : (d)2 2 : 3
139. The angle of contact at the interface of water glass is 0°, Ethylolcohal–glass

is put its a trough containing one of these for liquids. It is observed that the
meniscus is convex. The liquid in the trough is
(a) Water (b) Ethylalcohol
(c) Mercury (d) Methyl iodide
140. ( Al steel ) . On heating
the strip will
(a) remain straight
(b) get twisted
(c) will bend with aluminum on concave side
(d) will bend with steel on concave side.
141. A Uniform Metallic Rod rotates about its perpendicular bisector with constant
angular speed. If it is heated uniformly to raise its temperating slightly
(a) Its speed of rotation increases
(b) Its speed of rotation decreases
(c) Its speed of rotation remains same
(d) Its speed increases because its moment of Inertia decreases.

276 Physics Class XI

142. As the temperating is increases, the time period of pendulum

man (CM) still reaming at the centre of the bob

remains at the centre of the bob

below the centre of the bob

the centre of the bob.

143. Refer to the plot of temperating versus time showing the changes in the state
of ice on heating (not of scale)




 


 
Which of the following is correct :

(b) At B water stats boiling

(c) At C all the water gets converted into steam

144. A student records the initial length l, change in temperature T and change
in length l of a rod as follows :
S.No. l (m) T (°C) l (m)
1 2 10 4×10-4
2 1 10 4×10-4
3 2 20 2×10-4
4 3 10 6×10-4
nd, 3rd
th observations
(a) 2nd observation correct (b) 3rd observation correct
(c) 4th observation correct (b) 4th observation incorrect

Properties Of Matter 277

145. The approximate depth of an ocean is 2700 m. The compressibility of
water is 45.4×10–11 Pa–1 and density of water is 103 kg/m3. What fractional
compression of water will be obtained at the bottom of the ocean?
(a) 1.0 × 10–2 (b) 1.2 × 10–2
(c) 1.4 × 10–2 (d) 0.8 × 10–2
146. The Young's Modulus of steel is twice that of brass. Two wires of same
length and of same area of cross-section; one of steel and another of brass
are suspended from the same roof. If then the weights added to the steel and
brass wires must be in the ratio of
(a) 1:1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 2:1 (d) 4 : 2
147.
1 , 2 and Young's Moduli Y1, Y2
massive walls. The rods are heated such that they undergo the same increase
in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. If 1 : 2 = 2 : 3, the thermal
stresses developed in the two rods are equal provided Y1 : Y2 is equal to
(a) 2:3 (b) 1 : 1
(c) 3:2 (d) 4 : 9
148.






(a) More for A than B (b) More for B than A

(d) None of these
149. The two ends of a metal rod are maintained at temperatures 100°C and

will be
(a) 16.8 J/s (b) 8.0 J/s
(c) 4.0 J/s (d) 44.8 J/s

278 Physics Class XI

150. Steam at 100°C is passed into 20 g of water at 10°C, then water acquires a

of water = 1 cal g–1 °C–1 and Latent heat of steam = 540 cal g–1]
(a) 24 g (b) 31.5 g
(c) 42.5 g (d) 22.5 g

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

Direction:- In the following questions, a statement of assertion is followed
by a statement of reason. Mark the correct choice as :
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation
of assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not correct explanation
of assertion..
(c) If assertion is true, but reason is false.
(d) If both assertion and reason are false.

1. Assertion : The size of hydrogen balloon increases as it rises in the air.

Reason : The material of balloon can be easily stretched.
2. Assertion : Stress is the internal force per unit area of a body.
Reason : Rubber is more elastic than steel.
3. Assertion : A rigid body can be elastic.
Reason : If force is applied on rigid body, it's dimension may change.
4. Assertion : Transverse sound waves does not occurs in gases.
Reason : Gases can not sustain shearing strain.
5.

Reason : The distance between two particles remains constant in rigid body.

6. Assertion : A lead is more elastic than rubber.

Reason : If same load is applied on the lead and rubber wire of same cross-
sectional area, the strain of lead is very much less than that of rubber.
7. Assertion : Bulk modulus of elasticity B represents incompressibility of
the material.
PV
Reason : B where symbols have their usual meaning.
V
Properties Of Matter 279
 8. Assertion : The bridges declared unsafe after long use.
Reason : Elastic strength of bridges losses with time.
9. Assertion : Young's modulus for a perfectly plastic body is zero.
Reason : For perfectly plastic body restoring force is zero.
10. Assertion : Strain is a unit less quantity.
Reason : Strain is equivalent to force.
11. Assertion : The blood pressure in human is greater at the feet than at brain.
Reason : Pressure of liquid at any point is proportional to height, density
of liquid and acceleration due to gravity.
12.
enter a narrow pipe.
Reason : According to equation of continuity, product of area of cross-
section and velocity is constant.
13.
increases and then becomes constant.
Reason : The constant velocity of fall of man is called terminal velocity.
14.
larger and vice versa.

15. Assertion : Sudden fall of pressure at a place indicate storm.

16. Assertion : To empty an oil tank, two holes are made.

Reason : Oil will come out of two holes, so it will be emptied faster.
17. Assertion : A rain drop after falling through some height attains a constant
velocity.

18. Assertion : The water rises higher in a capillary table of small diameter
than in the capillary tube of large diameter.
Reason : Height through which liquid rises in a capillary tube is inversely
proportional to the diameter of the capillary tube.

280 Physics Class XI

 CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS
Q1.

laminar. Bernoulli's principle is applicable on those non-viscous liquids

its particles exert no force on each other i.e. the speed of all particles of
the liquid is same.

(i) Bernoulli's principle is based on the conservation of

(a) momentum (b) energy and momentum both
(c) mass (d) energy

the narrowest part of the pipe

(a) both pressure and velocity remains constant.
(b) velocity is maximum and pressure is minimum.
(c) both the pressure and velocity are maximum.
(d) both the pressure and velocity are minimum.
(iii)

(a) water wets the pipe.

(b) the pipes are not of uniform diameter.
(c) the viscosity of water is high.

(iv)
strictly applicable
(a) streamline and rotational (b) turbulent and rotational
(c) turbulent and irrotational (d) streamline and irrotational
(v) Viscosity of gases
(a) decreases with increases in temperature
(b) independent of temperature
(c) increases with increase in temperature
(d) may increase or decrease depend on nature of gas

Properties Of Matter 281

Q2.

glycerine. Find the velocity of lead shots then using Stoke's law he found
the viscosity of the glycerine. The formula used by him was
2r 2
( )g
qv

(i) Stokes force does not depend up on

(b) viscosity of the medium

(d) acceleration due to gravity.

(ii) A steel ball is dropped in glycerine tube of large length, then
(a) the ball stops after some time
(b) the speed of ball keeps on increasing
(c) the ball attains constant velocity after sometime
(d) none of the above.
(iii) A sphere of mass 'm' and radius 'r' is falling in one column of glycerine.

1 1
(a) r2 (b) (c) r (d)
r r2
R
(iv) The ratio of terminal velocities of two drops of radii R and is
2
1
(a) 2 (b) 1 (c) (d) 4
2
(v) S.I. unit of co-e
(a) poise (b) deca poise (c) dimensionless (d) erg.

Q3.
surface area possible. Intermolecular forces such as Van der Waals Force
draw the liquid particles together. The ratio of the surface force F to the
length L along which the force acts.
T = F/L Where, F is the force per unit length
L is the length in which force act
T is the surface tension of the liquid

282 Physics Class XI

(i) If T is the surface tension of the soap solution, the amount of work
done in blowing a soap bubble from diameter D to a diameter 2D is
(a) 2 D2T (b) 4 D2T
(c) 6 D2T (d) D2T
(ii) If the surface a liquid is plane, then the angle of contact of the liquid
with the walls of the container is
(a) acute angle
(b) obtuse angle
(c) 90°
(d) 0°
(iii) When a soap bubble is charged
(a) it contracts
(b) it expands
(c) it does not undergo any change in size
(d) none of these
(iv) If common salt is dissolved in water, then the surface tension of
saltwater is
(a) increased
(b) decreased
(c) not changed

(v) A drop of oil is placed on the surface of the water. Which of the
following statements is correct?
(a) it will remain on it as a sphere
(b) it will spread as a thin layer

Properties Of Matter 283

 ANSWERS
VERY SHORT ANSWERS (1 MARK)
1. This is due to elastic fatigue.
2. Because steel is more elastic than copper as its Young’s modulus is more
than that of copper.
4. Repeated bending of wire decreases elastic strength and therefore it can be
broken easily.

5. K =

6. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of lateral strain to the longitudinal strain. It has no
units.
7. It is the loss in strength of a material caused due to repeated alternating strains

8. The density of sea water is more than the density of river water, hence sea
water gives more up thrust for the same volume of water displaced.
9. This spreads force due to the weight of the train on a larger area and hence
reduces the pressure considerably and in turn prevents yielding of the ground
under the weight of the train.
10. Pressure exerted by liquid column = hpg so as ‘h’ increases p increases so
to with stand high pressure dams are made thick near the bottom.
11. The atmospheric pressure is low at high altitudes. Due to greater pressure

stop bleeding from a cut in the body.

12. The height of blood column is quite large at feet than at the brain, hence
blood pressure at feet is greater.
14. In winter i.e., at low temperature the viscosity of lubricants increases.
15. Due to zero terminal velocity.
16. They have to spread over a large area.
17. Angle of contact increases with increase of temperature while surface tension
generally decreases with increase of temperature.
18. Rate of Shear Strain.

284 Physics Class XI

19. Viscosity of gases increases while viscosity of liquid decreases.
20. Detergents should have small angle of contact so that they have low surface

tension and greater ability to wet a surface. Further as is

small cos will be large so h i.e., penetration will be high.

21. [ ] = [M1L–1T–1]
[T] = [M1L–2L0]
22. c.g.s unit of = poise
S.I. Unit of = poiseuille or deca poise
1 poise = 1 g cm–1 s–2 = 10–1 kg m–1 s–1
= 0.1 poiseuille
23. Viscous force on the parachute is large as F = 6 r v, F r, so its terminal
velocity becomes small so the person hits the ground with this small velocity

24.

As speed of water between the ships is more than outside them pressure

pushes the ships close to each other therefore they get attracted.
25. The molecules in a liquid surface have a net downward force (cohesion) on
them, so work done in bringing them from within the body of liquid to the
surface increases surface energy.
26. Hot water soap solution has small surface tension therefore can remove the

27. Mercury does not wet glass because of larger cohesive force between Hg-Hg
molecules than the adhesive forces between mercury-glass molecules.
28. When glass is heated, it melts. The surface of this liquid tends to have a
minimum area. For a given volume, the surface area is minimum for a sphere.
This is why the ends of a glass tube become rounded on heating.
29. The angle of contact between water and the material of the rain coat is obtuse.
So the rain water does not wet the rain coat.

Properties Of Matter 285

30.
curvature of the meniscus increase so that hr = constant. That is pressure on
concave side becomes equal to pressure exerted by liquid column so liquid

31. No. Unless the atmospheric pressures at the two points where Bernoulli’s

34. Volume and electrical resistance.

36.
than mercury.
37. Expansion is always outward, therefore the hole size increased on heating.
38. Ice
39.
40. The temperature above which molar heat capacity of a solid substance
becomes constant.
41. One.
42. At oK.

43. E T4

E2 = 16 E1
44. In conduction and radiation.

45.

46. When birds swell their feathers, they trap air in the feather. Air being a poor
conductor prevents loss of heat and keeps the bird warm.
47.
steel. On cooling the disc shrinks to a greater extent than the hole, and hence
brass disc gets lossened.

286 Physics Class XI

 SHORT ANSWERS (2 MARKS)

49. Restoring force in extension x = F =

Work done in stretching it by dx = dw = F.dx

Work done in stretching it from zero to x = W =

W=

50. Energy Density =

53. Ys =

Yr =

same area of cross section

Is < Ir

Ys > Yr

54. Ip =

IQ = =

Properties Of Matter 287

 =

55. Steam at high pressure is made to enter the cylinder of vacuum brake. Due
to high velocity, pressure decreases in accordance with Bernoulli’s principle.
Due to this decrease in pressure, the piston gets lifted. Consequently brake
gets lifted.
59. Fig. (a) incorrect.
At the constriction, the area of cross section is small so liquid velocity is
large, consequently pressure must be small so height of liquid must be less.
60. The weight supported by (b) and (c) are same as that in (a) and is equal to
4.5 × 10–2 N.
The weight supported = 2 l, where is surface tension and l is the length
which is same in all the three cases, hence weight supported is same.
61.

When seen from inside the smaller bubble the common surface will appear
2T concave as (1) the pressure (excess) = will be greater for concave

62. Pg = pgh

h =

63.

When air is blown into the narrow end its velocity in the region between

64. Glass transmits 50% of heat radiation coming from a hot source like sun
but does not allow the radiation from moderately hot bodies to pass
through it.

288 Physics Class XI

65. We know that h =

Surface tension of hot water is less than the surface tension of cold water.
Moreover, due to thermal expansion the radius of the capillary tube will
increase in hot water. Due to both reasons, the height of capillary rise will
be less in hot water as compared to cold water.
66.
a poor conductor of heat makes the water droplet to evaporate slowly.
67.
received by earth to go back. In the absence of atmosphere radiation will go
back at night making the temperature very low and inhospitable.
68. So, that it absorbs more heat with comparatively small change in temperature
and extracts large amount of heat.
69. Rate of energy emission is directly proportional to area of surface for a given
mass of material. Surface area of sphere is least and that of disc is largest.
Therefore cooling of (i) disc is fastest and (ii) sphere is slowest.

70. (a) Time period of pendulum = T =

In winter I becomes shorter so its time period reduces so it goes faster.

In summer I increases resulting in increase in time period so the clock
goes slower.
(b) When the car moves down hill, the decrease in gravitational potential
energy is converted into work against force of friction between brake
shoe and drum which appears as heat.
71. According to wein’s displacement law, mt = Constant
1 < 3 < 2

T1 > T3 > T2
72. The melting point of ice as well as the boiling point of water changes with
change in pressure. The presence of impurities also changes the melting and
boiling points. However the triple point of water has a unique temperature
and is independent of external factors. It is that temperatures at which water,
hat is 273. 16 K and pressure 0.46 cm of Hg.

Properties Of Matter 289

 ANSWERS FOR SHORT QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)
73. The ultimate stress should not exceed elastic limit of steel (30 × 107 N/m2)

U=

r = 3.2 cm

So to lift a bad of 104 kg, crane is designed to withstand 105 kg. To impart

74. (a) Wire with larger plastic region is more ductile material A.

(b) Young’s modulus is

YA > YB

(c) For given strain, larger stress is required for A than that for B.

A is stronger than B.

(d) Material with smaller plastic region is more brittle, therefore B is more
brittle than A.
76. (i) In case (a) Pressure head, h = + 20 cm of Hg
Absolute Pressure = P + h = 76 + 20 = 96 cm of Hg.
Gauge Pressure = h = 20 cm of Hg.
In case (b) Pressure Head h = – 18 cm of Hg
Absolute Pressure = 76 – 18 = 58 cm of Hg
Gauge Pressure = h = – 18 cm of Hg
77. as h1 p1 g = h2 p2 g
h1 × 13.6 × g = 13.6 × 1 × g
h1 = 1 cm

Therefore as 13.6 cm of H2O is poured in right limb it will displace Hg level

become 19 cm.

290 Physics Class XI

79. v =

= ...(1)

Similarly, = ...(2)
Divididng 1 by 2,

= v =
If N drops coalesce, then
Volume of one big drop = Volume of N droplets

R =N1/3r
Terminal velocity of bigger drop

= from equation (1)

=N2/3 v from equation (2)

80. Let P1 2 be the pressures inside the two bubbles, then

P1– P = P1 =

P2 – P = P2 =
When bubbles coalesce
P1V1 + P2V2 = PV ...(1)
The pressure inside the new bubble

P =
Substituting for P, P1 2 in equation (1)

Properties Of Matter 291

 or
Given change in volume,
  


 


 
  
...(3)
Change in Area

...(4)
Using equation (3) and (4) in (2), we get

= 3 PV+ 4TA = 0

82. Free block diagram of balloon and block shown below :

When the balloon is held stationary in air, the forces acting on it get balance
Up thrust = Wt. of Balloon + Tension in string
U = Mg + T

M for the small block of mass

T =

U =
When the string is cut T = 0, the small block begins to fall freely, the balloon
rises up with an acceleration ‘a’ such that
U – Mg = Ma

292 Physics Class XI

 = Ma

a = in the upward direction.

83. (i) As the two vessels have liquid to same height and the vessels have same
base area, the force exerted = pressure × base area will be same as pressure
= h p g.
(ii) Since the volume of water in vessel 1 is greater than in vessel (2) the
weight of water = volume × density × h
greater than the water in second vessel.

84. Radius of larger drop =

Radius of each small drop= r

= r=

Initial surface area of large drop

Final surface area of 27 small drop

= 27 × 4 r2 =
Change in energy = Increase in area ×
= 2 D2

87. = I1 [1+ 1 (t2 – t1)]

= I1 [1+ 2 (t2 – t1)]

= I2 – I1
I2 [1+ 2 (t1 – t1)] – I1 [1 + 1 (t2 – t1)] = I2 – I1
I2 2 = I1 1

Properties Of Matter 293

90. Here I = 1.8 m, t1 = 27ºC, t2 = – 39ºC

r = = 1.0 mm = 1.0 × 10–3 m

r = 2.0 × 10–5 ºC–1,Y = 0.91 × 1011 Pa

As I = I (t2 – t1)
Strain, = (t2 – t1)
Stress = Strain × Young’s modulus = (t2 – t1) × Y
= 2.0 × 10–5 × (– 39 – 27) × 0.91 × 1011 = 1.2 × 108 Nm–2
[Numerically]
Tension developed in the wire = Stress × Area of cross-section
= Stress × pr2 = 1.2 × 108 × 3.14 × (1.0 × 10–3)2 = 3.77 × 102 N .

96.
In steady state the heat passing in unit time through the rod remain same that
is

where k
Also T1 – T2 = (T1 – T) + (T – T2)

K =

294 Physics Class XI

 ANSWERS FOR NUMERICALS

106. (a) Stress =

(b) L=

(c) Strain =

(d) F = Kx = K L, K = Force constant

K=

107. Pressure exerted at the bottom layer by water column of height h is

P = h g = 2500 × 1000 × 10
= 2.5 × 107 N/m–2
= Stress

Bulk modulus K =

= 1.08%

108. Area A of the upper face = (0.30)2 m2

The displacement x of the upper face relative to the lower one is given by

x = , =

= 2 × 10–7 m

Properties Of Matter 295

 Angle of shear is given by

tan =

109. V = 1 litre = 10–3 m3

= 0.10% =

K = P= = 2.2 × 109 × 0.001

P = 2.2 × 106 Nm–2

110. Pressure at a depth of 10 m = h g
= 10 × 1030 × 10 = 1.03 × 105 N/m2
ATM. pressure = 1.01 × 105 pa.
Total pressure at a depth of 10 m= 1.03 × 105 + 1.01 × 105
= 2.04 × 105 pa

111. =

F1=

296 Physics Class XI

 F1 =

= 1470 N.

112. (i) When man is lying P =

(ii) When man is standing then A = 2 × 80 cm2 = 160 × 10–4 m2

P =

113. (a) Pressure Instructed by manual = Pg = 200 K Pa

(b) Absolute Pressure = 101 k Pa + 200 k Pa = 301 k Pa
(c) At mountain Peak Pa is 10% less
Pa = 90 k Pa
If we assume absolute pressure in tyre does not change during driving then
Pg = P – Pa = 301 – 30 = 211 k Pa
So the tyre will read 211 k Pa, pressure.

114. Excess pressure in soap bubble = p = =

= 387 Nm–2

115. vt =

= 1.08 kg m–1 s–1

116.

= 2 m/s

Properties Of Matter 297

117. Surface energy per unit area is equal to surface tension.
E = increase in surface area × ST
= 4 (22 – 12) × 2.5
= 4 × 3 × 2.5
= 1.02 × 103 erg

118. F =

=
119. Since A1v1 = A2v2

v2 =
Using Bernoulli’s Theorem

P2 =

v2 > v1
h2 > h1

= 3 × 105 +

= 2.16 × 105 N/m2

120. t through a capillary tube is given by

V = Qt = =

For Water, V1 =

For Petrol, V2 =

But V1 = V2

298 Physics Class XI

 or = =

121. Breaking stress = Maximum stress that the wire can withstand

= 7.8 × 109 Nm–2

When the wire is suspended vertically, it tends to break under its own weight.

Let its length be I and cross-sectional area A.

Weight of wire = mg = volume × density × g = Al g

Stress = = Al g/A = l g

For the wire not to break, l g = Breaking stress = 7.8 × 109 Nm–2

l = =

122. By Wein’s Displacement Law

mT = ’m T’

123. =

T = 286 k
124. m1c1 ( 1 – ) =m2c2 ( – 2)

c2 = 1 cal/gmºC
50 × 0.6 × (120 – ) = 1.6 × 103 × 1 × ( – 25)
= 26.8ºC

Properties Of Matter 299

125. d2 = d1 [1 + t]
5.243 = 5.231 [1 + 1.2 × 10–5 (T – 30)]

= 1.2 × 10–5 (T – 300)

T = 191 + 300 = 491 k = 218ºC

126.

m1c1 (80 – 6) = m2L + m2c2 (6 – 0)

100 × 1 × 74 = 100 L + 100 × 1 × 6
L = (1 × 74) – 6
= 68 cal/g.
127. Heat required to convert H2O at 0º to H2O at 100º = m1c1t
= 30 × 4186 × 100
= 1255800 J
Heat required to convert H2O at 100ºC to steam at 100ºC is = mL
= 3 × 2.256 × 106
= 6768000 J
Total heat = 8023800 J

128. Thermal stress = Kx strain =

Now, =

Thermal stress = K T = 3K T [ =3 ]
= 3 × 140 × 109 × 1.7 × 10–5 × 20
= 1.428 × 108 Nm2

300 Physics Class XI

 HINTS AND SOLUTION (MCQ)

132. (d) Breaking force = breaking stress × area of cross section of wire ie
it is independent of length of its wire till area of cross-section of
wire is constant.
133. (b)
F 1 4F
Y 2
D D2
2
4F 1
D or D
Y Y
D copper Y iron
Hence
D iron Y copper

134. (a) Increase in length = Bo + OC – BC 



  
or L = 2B0 – 2L
L 2(L2 x 2 )1/2 2L
1/2

L 2L 1 2L 
m

L x2 x2
So strain
2L L 2L 2L
V = 0 so . A liquid

Hence G = 0.

greater than that of material (i). Therefore the elastic behaviour

of material (ii) is over a larger region of strains as compared to
material (i).
If the fracting point E is closer to ultimate strength point, than the
material is brittle.

Properties Of Matter 301

137. (c) When a round pebble is dropped from the top of a tall cylinder,

some time. Hence option (c) correct.

138. (a) According to Equation of continuity
a1 v1 a 2 v2
or
2 2
v1 a2 d 22 / 4 d2 13.75 9
v2 a1 d12 / 4 d1 2.5 4
139. (c) Meniscus is convex upwards if angle contact is obtuse.
140. (d) Give Al steel so on heating aluminum strip will expander more
than that of steel strip. So aluminum strip will bead more on convex




141. (b) When a metallic rod is heated it expands. Its M.I about perpendicular
bisector increases. So according to Law of conservation of angular
Momentum, its angular speed (w) decrease. as I1 1 = I2 2.

) of the simple
pendulum increases even though its CM still remains at the centre
of bub. So As T 2 gl or T so T increases as temperature increase.

144. (c) From Ist observation :

4 16 4 5 1
2 10 C
T 2 10

So From 2nd observation T (2 10 5 ) 1 10 2 10 4 m (Incorrect)

From 3rd observation T (2 10 5 ) 2 20 8 10 4 m (Incorrect)

From 4th observation T (2 10 5 ) 3 10 6 10 4 m (Correct)

302 Physics Class XI

 P v P
145. (b) B or
( v / v) v B
v 1
h g K as p h g, B
v K
v
2700 103 9.8 45.4 10 11

v
2
1.2 10

YS 2
146. (c) Here YS 2YB ,
YB 1
Let WS B

S B ; AB AS A, S B

W W
Y or
A AY
as S B

WS WB
AYS AYB
WS YB 2
WB YB 1

147. (c) Expansion in the rod due to rise in temp = Compression in rod.
1 1 1

F 1
Compression in the rod 1
A Y1
or the length of the rod remains unchanged
F 1
1 1
A Y1
or
F
1 (i)
A Y1
Similarly for second rod
F
2 (ii)
A Y2

1 Y2 Y 3
or 1 2

2 Y1 Y2 1 2
Properties Of Matter 303
148. (a) As slope of the graph Young's Modules
d d
149. (c) As we know (T2 T1 ) or K (T2 T1 )
dt dt
d 1
Case (i) k (110 100) k 10 (i)
dt

d 2
Case (ii) k (210 200) k 10 (ii)
dt
d 1 d 2
4.0 J / s
dt dt

150. (d) Heat gain by water = heat loss by steam

20 × 1 × (80 –100) = m × 540 + m × 1 × (100 – 80)
1400 = 560 m
1400
m 2.5 g
560
Total mass of water = 20 + 2.5 = 22.5 g

ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (a)

7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (a)

13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (a)

SOLUTION
1. (b) The size of balloon increase because outside pressure is extremely
low at high attitudes. So volume increases, but reason is not the
correct explanation of assertion.
2. (b) Both are true but reason is not correct explanation of the assertion.

4. (b) In gases, sound waves are always longitudinal because gases cannot
sustain shearing strain.
5. (a) In rigid body size and shape of the body remains same.

304 Physics Class XI

6. (a) both statements are true.
7. (a) both statements are true.
8. (a) due to alternating strains, it losses it's elastic strength. Due to which
the amount of strain in the bridge for given strain becomes large
and ultimately, the bridge may collapse.
stress restoring force
9. (a) y , stress
strain area
As restoring force is zero. i.e. y = 0
10. (c) Strain is the ratio of change in dimensions of the body to the original
dimensions. Because this is a ratio, therefore it is dimensionless
quantity.
11. (a) Height of the blood column in the human body is more at feet than
the brain as p = heg, therefore the blood exerts more pressure at
the feet than at the brain.

av = constant, where 'a' is area of cross-section and 'v' is velocity.

So, as area of cross-section decreases, therefore the velocity 'u' of
water increases.

buoyancy of air which opposes the motion. As the velocity increases,

the viscous drag of air also increases and soon a stage is reached
where viscous drag and buoyancy of air balances the gravity pull.
Then the man with a parachute falls with constant velocity called
terminal velocity.
1 2
14. (a) According to Bernoulli's theorem, P evv = constant.
2

15. (a)
16. (c) When two holes are made in the tin, air keeps on entering through
the other hole. Due tot this pressure inside the tin does not become
less than atmospheric pressure which happens if only one hole is
made.
17. (a)

Properties Of Matter 305

18. (a) The height of capillary rise is inversely proportional to radius of
1
capillary tube i.e. h
r
So for smaller 'r' the value of 'h' is higher.

CASE STUDY BASED ANSWERS

1. i. (d)
ii. (b)
iii. (d)
iv. (d)
v. (c)

2. i. (d)
ii. (c)
iii. (a)
iv. (d)
v. (b)

3. i. (c)
ii. (d)
iii. (b)
iv. (a)
v. (b)

****

306 Physics Class XI

 THERMOMETRY, THERMAL EXPANSION AND
CALORIEMETRY
8.1 Heat

8.2 Temperature

8.3 Scales of Temperature

Thermodynamics 307
 scale

8.4 Thermal Expansion

and
]a

T and T

T)

T)

308 Physics Class XI

 T)

and

8.5 Anomalous Expansion of Water

i.e.,

8.6 Expansion of Gases

8.7 Thermal Capacity and Water Equivalent

mc
2T

m c
mc gm

8.8 Specific Heat

Thermodynamics 309
 gm
2T ]

K
2T ]

8.9 Specific Heat of Solids

v

8.10 Latent Heat

(3) m
2T ]

ice g

310 Physics Class XI

 v

8.11 Principle of Caloriemetry

i.e.,

8.12 Heating Curve

Thermodynamics 311
8.13 Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics

8.14 Quantities Involved in First Law of Thermodynamics

2T

m mc

( C stan p Cp

2T ]
(ii) f > Vi i.e.,

f < Vi i.e.,

312 Physics Class XI

  
  
    
   
 
 
    
     
 
    
 
 

Uk
energy Up

i.e., k p

(iii) Change in i

f i

8.15 First Law of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics 313
8.16 Isothermal Process
i.e.,

314 Physics Class XI

 e

i.e.,

8.17 Adiabatic Process

i.e.,

i.e.,

TV

and

Thermodynamics 315
 tan

8.18 Reversible and Irreversible Process

316 Physics Class XI

8.19 Cyclic and Non-cyclic Process

8.20 Graphical Representation of Various Processes

Thermodynamics 317
8.21 Refrigerator or Heat Pump.

i.e.,

1 2 and hence

where T1 2

318 Physics Class XI

8.22 Second Law of Thermodynamics

8.23 Carnot Engine

Thermodynamics 319
 1 and T2

i.e.,

TRANSMISSION OF HEAT
8.24 Introduction

There is no change in

8.25 Conduction

320 Physics Class XI

 decreases as the distance x

1 and 2

t KA ( 1 2 )t .
L

k k
K ]

8.26 Combination of Conductors

Let n

i.e., 1 2 3 n

1 2 3 n

Thermodynamics 321
 s

Ks
then

Let n

8.27 Convection

i.e.,

322 Physics Class XI

8.28 Radiation

QUESTIONS

other ?

Thermodynamics 323
 v and Cp
where

p v

324 Physics Class XI

1 and T2
1 2

Thermodynamics 325
 i.e., Cp and Cv which one is greater and
why ?

p v and Cp v

326 Physics Class XI

Thermodynamics 327
 K

1 and T2
1
2

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (MCQs)





 

(c) 2 (d) 1



 

 



 

328 Physics Class XI

 1
1 1 1
(a) 2 1
2 1 1
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
2(c) 1 1 2 1
(d)
1

1
2

(c) d

 








Thermodynamics 329
 the transition is 3
5



 

 

 



is 5
Take
3

330 Physics Class XI

 




(a) He and O2 2 and He

2 and N2

1 2?






2 1 2 1

2 1 (d) Cannot say

Thermodynamics 331
 2 3


 
 



 


Cp
Cv
3 4 5 3 4 5
(a) 2 3 3
2 3 3
3 4 5
(c) 2 (d)
2 3 3
2

K ]

1 at T1 2 2 at
T1 2
1
2

332 Physics Class XI

 1
10

   

  


   
   

(c) (d)

Thermodynamics 333
 V

334 Physics Class XI

Thermodynamics 335
 (d) generates heat energy
(iii)

1 and K2

K1K 2 2K1K 2
(a) K1 2 (c) (d) K1 K 2
K1 K 2 K1 K 2

T1 2 and (iii) a

336 Physics Class XI

 1
2


  
   


W Q1 Q 2 Q2
1 1
Q1 Q1 Q1

(iii)

Thermodynamics 337
 T
l
T
l

l
kA
l

K K
(d) Js

(iii)

   


 

1 2

T1 T2 K1l1T1 K 2l2T2
(a) T K1l1 K 2l2
2

K1l2T2 K 2l1T1 K1l2T2 K 2l1T1

(c) (d)
K1l2 K 2l1 K1l1 K 2l2

338 Physics Class XI

 4K 2K
(a) (c) 2K (d) 3K
3 3

2 1

nRT
T

Thermodynamics 339
 2 1

p v

Cp v

Cp Cv

( v v

Cp

dq du dw
du dq pdv

340 Physics Class XI

m1 m2
c1 c2
Let T1 > T2

m1c1 (T1 m2c2 2)

m1c1T1 m1c1 m2c2 m2c2T2
m1c1T1 m2c2T2 m1c1 m2c2) T

m1 m2 m 1 2

(a) dw

du du
d

dw
du du
d du dw

(c) U D

du
dw
dw d
d

Thermodynamics 341
 n Cv
Cv v k

1 1
n Cv

DE

T1V1 2V2

T2

Here T1
T2

342 Physics Class XI

T1 2

2 1

(c) w 1 2 2 1

1 2 1)

Thermodynamics 343
 T2

T1 2

adia

du dw J

(i) T1
T1
T2 2

(ii) T1
T1
T2 i.e.,
T2

2 > 1

344 Physics Class XI

 2 V2 1 V1
P1V1 V1
P2 P1 2 P1
V2 V1 / 2

P2 V2 P1 V1
V1 V1
P2 P1 P1 2 P1
V2 V1 / 2
P2 2 P1
So 2 1

P1 2 P1

2
V1 V P
P2 V2 P1V1 ; P2 P1 P
V2 2V 2

Thermodynamics 345
 P2 V2 P3 V3
5/3 5/3
V2 P 2V P 1
P3 P2
V3 2 16 2 8
5/3
P 1 P 1 P
2 23 2 25 64

PV
U nC v T and T
nR
P2 V2 P1V1 R
T T2 – T1 , Cv
nR 1
nR P2 V2 P1V1 P2 V2 P1V1
U
1 nR 1
5 4 2 6 20 12 8
20 KJ
3 2/5 2/5
1
5

1 1
T2 V2 T1V1

1
V1
or T2 T1
V2
v 53 1
T2 300 300 (0.5)3/2
2v
T2 189.03 K.

U nC v T
R nR
Cv U T
1 1
2 8.31 (189 300)
U 2767.23 J
5
1
3
dP P
dv V

346 Physics Class XI

 2 1 2 1

2 (
He (
3J

T2 1 K
3 K
R (T2 T1 )
W
1
8.3 103 7
146. 103
1
8.3 103 7
1 0.40
146 103

T
nR
V T or V
P
1
P

2 1
P2 P1

PV
P1 T constant
1
P1 or P T
T 1
3
P T3 3 or
1 2
CP 3
Hence
CV 2

Thermodynamics 347
 As Q e T 4 At
Q 300
So e
T 4 At (5 67 10 ) (1001) 4 (5 1004 ) 60
8

0.18

273 0 200
1 1
200 273 473
200 273 200
2 1
0 273 273
Hence 2 / 1 0.577
1
, W 10 J 2 ?
10
1 1 1
10 9
1
10
2
or 2 90J
W

Q2 T2
W T1 T2
2 T1

Q
C .
m T

348 Physics Class XI

Thermodynamics 349
 

 





Q
S .
T

W T2
1 2
Q1 T1

****

350 Physics Class XI

9.1 Kinetic Theory of Gases : Assumption
(1) The molecules of a gas are identical, spherical and perfectly elastic point
masses.
(2) The volume of molecules is negligible in comparison to the volume of gas.
(3) Molecules of a gas moves randomly in all direction.

(5) Their collisions are perfectly elastic.

(6) The number of collisions per unit volume in a gas remains constant.
(7) No attractive or repulsive force acts between gas molecules.

9.2 Pressure of an ideal Gas

P =

Relation between pressure and kinetic energy

K.E. per unit volume (E) =

9.3 Ideal Gas Equation
The equation which relates the pressure (P), volume (V) and temperature
(T) of the given state of an ideal gas is known as gas equation.

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 351

 Pv = nrT

(1) Universal gas constant (R) : Dimension [ML2T–2 –1]

mole per kelvin.

S.T.P value : 8.31

(2) Boltzman’s constant (k) : Dimension [ML2T–2 –1]

k = 1.38 × 10–23 Joule/kelvin

9.4 Various Speeds of Gas Molecules

(1) Root wean square speed Vrms =

(2) Most probable speed Vmp =

(3) Average speed Vav =

Vrms > Vav > Vmp (remembering trick) (RAM)

9.5 Kinetic Energy of Ideal Gas

Molecules of ideal gases possess only translational motion. So they possess

only translational kinetic energy.

352 Physics Class XI

 Here m = mass of each molecule, M = Molecular weight of gas and
NA – Avogadro number = 6.023 × 1023.

9.6 Degree of Freedom

The total number of independent modes (ways) in which a system can possess
energy is called the degree of freedom (f).

The degree of freedom are of three types :

(i) Translational degree of freedom

(ii) Rotational degree of freedom

(iii) Vibrational degree of freedom

General expression for degree of freedom

f = 3N – R, where N = Number of independent particles, R = Number of

independent restriction

(1) Monoatomic gas : It can have 3 degrees of freedom (all translational).

(2) Diatomic gas : A diatomic molecule has 5 degree of freedom : 3

translational and 2 rotational.

(3) Triatomic gas (Non-linear) : It has 6 degrees of freedom : 3 translational

and 3 rotational.

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 353

 (4) Tabular display of degree of freedom

The above degrees of freedom are shown at room temperature. Further

at high temperature the molecule will have an additional degrees of
freedom, due to vibrational motion.
9.7 Law of Equipartition of Energy
For any system in thermal equilibrium, the total energy is equally distributed
among its various degree of freedom. And the energy associated with each

molecule of the system per degree of freedom of the system is

9.8 Mean Free Path
The average distance travelled by a gas molecule is known as mean free path.
Let 1, 2, 3 ......... n be the distance travelled by a gas molecule during n
collisions respectively, then the mean free path of a gas molecule is given
by

1= where d = Diameter of the molecule, n = Number of molecules

per unit volume.

354 Physics Class XI

9.9 Specific heat or Specific Heat Capacity

the temperature of unit gram mass of the substance by unit degree. Gram

c= .

the temperature of one gram mole of the substance by a unit degree, it

is represented by capital (C)

C =

C = Mc =

9.10 Specific Heat of Gases

(i) In adiabatic process i.e., Q = 0,

C = = 0 i.e., C = 0
(ii) In isothermal process i.e., T = 0

C = i.e., C =

v) :
quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of gas
through 1 K when its volume is kept constant.

p) :
quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of unit mass of gas
through 1 K when its pressure is kept constant.

9.11 Mayer’s Formula

Cp – Cv = R

This relation is called Mayer’s formula and shows that Cp > Cv i.e., molar
ater than that at constant volume.

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 355

9.12 Specific Heat in Terms of Degree of Freedom

Monoatomic Diatomic Triatomic Triatomic

non-linear linear
Atomicity A 1 2 3 3

Restriction B 0 1 3 2

Degree of f = 3A – B 3 5 6 7
freedom
Molar

heat at
3R
constant
volume
Molar Cp =
heat at
constant 4R
pressure
Ratio of Cp
and Cv

Kinetic
energy of 3RT
1 mole
Kinetic
energy of 1 3kT
molecule
Kinetic 3rT
energy of
1 gm
QUESTIONS
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (1 MARK)
1. Write two conditions when real gases obey the ideal gas equation (PV =
nRT).n number of mole.

356 Physics Class XI

 2.
on the rms speed of the molecules ?
3. Draw the graph between P and 1/V (reciprocal of volume) for a perfect gas
at constant temperature.
4. Name the factors on which the degree of freedom of gas depends.
5. What is the volume of a gas at absolute zero of temperature ?
6. How much volume does one mole of a gas occupy at STP ?
7. What is an ideal gas ?
8.
the root mean square velocity of the molecules ?
9. What is the Kinetic energy per unit volume of a gas whose pressure is P ?
10. A container has equal number of molecules of hydrogen and carbon dioxide.

out rapidly ?
11. What is the mean translational Kinetic energy of a perfect gas molecule at T
temperature ?
12. Why it is not possible to increase the temperature of a gas while keeping its
volume and pressure constant.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)

13. When an automobile travels for a long distance the air pressure in the tyres
increases. Why ?
14. A gas storage tank has a small leak. The pressure in the tank drop more
quickly if the gas is hydrogen than if it is oxygen. Why ?
15. Why the land has a higher temperature than the ocean during the day but a
lower temperature at night.
16. Helium is a mixture of two isotopes having atomic masses 3g/mol and
4g/mol. In a sample of helium gas, which atoms move faster on average ?
17. State Avogadro’s law. Deduce it on the basis of Kinetic theory of gases.
18. Although the velocity of air molecules is nearly 0.5 km/s yet the smell of
scent spreads at a much slower rate why.
19. The root mean square (rms) speed of oxygen molecule at certain temperature
‘T’ is ‘V’. If temperature is doubled and oxygen gas dissociates into atomic
oxygen what is the speed of atomic oxygen ?

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 357

20.
temperature. If the pressure of the gas in these vessels be in the ratio 1 : 2
then state
(i) The ratio of the rms speeds of the molecules.
(ii) The ratio of the number of molecules.
21. Why gases at high pressure and low temperature show large deviation from
ideal gas behaviour ?
22.
pressure. Why the pressure of the gas decreases when the piston is pulled out.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)

23. On what parameters does the (mean free path) depends.
24. Equal masses of oxygen and helium gases are supplied equal amount of heat.
Which gas will undergo a greater temperature rise and why ?
25. Why evaporation causes cooling ?
26.
(T1, T2), volume (V1, V2) at pressure (P1, P2) respectively. If the value
joining the two vessels is opened what is temperature of the vessel at equilibrium ?
27. A partition divides a container having insulated walls into two compartments

number of molecules in compartments I and II ?

28. Prove that for a perfect gas having n degree of freedom

where Cp and Cv have their usual meaning.

29.
capacity at constant volume of a diatomic gas decreases with increase in
temperature. Explain.

358 Physics Class XI

30.
temperatures T1 and T2 state whether T1 > T2 or T2 > T1 justify your answer.

31. Three vessels of equal capacity have gases at the same temperature and

Do the vessels contain equal number of respective molecules ? Is the root

mean square speed of molecules the same in the three cases ? If not in which
case is Vrms the largest ?

32.
of gases.

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

33. What are the basic assumptions of kinetic theory of gases ? On their basis
derive an expression for the pressure exerted by an ideal gas.
34. What is meant by mean free path of a gas molecule ? Derive an expression
for it.

35. Given that P = where P is the pressure, is the density and c is the
rms. Velocity of gas molecules. Deduce Boyle’s law and Charles law of gases
from it.
36. What do you understand by mean speed, root mean square speed and most
probable speed of a gas. The velocities of ten particles in m/s are 0, 2, 3, 4,
4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 9 calculate.
(i) Average speed
(ii) r.m.s. speed
37. What is law of equipartition of energy ? Find the value of =Cp/Cv for
diatomic and monatomic gas. Where symbol have usual meaning.

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 359

38. An air bubble of volume 1.0 cm3 rises from the bottom of a lake 40 m deep
at a temperature of 12ºC. To what volume does it grow when it reaches the
surface which is at a temperature of 35ºC ?
39.
temperature. The mass of the gas is increased by 50% by introducing more
gas in the vessel at the same temperature. Find out the resultant pressure of
the gas.
40. One mole of a monoatomic gas is mixed with three moles of a diatomic gas.

Take R = 8.31/mol–1 K–1.

41. An oxygen cylinder of volume 30 litre has an initial gauge pressure of 15
atmosphere and a temperature of 27ºC. After some oxygen is withdrawn from
the cylinder, the gauge pressure drops to 11 atmosphere and its temperature
drop to17ºC. Estimate the mass of oxygen taken out of the cylinder.
(R = 8.31/mol–1 K–1)
(molecular mass of O2 = 32)
42. At what temperature the rms speed of oxygen atom equal to r.m.s. speed of
helium gas atom at – 10ºC ?
Atomic mass of helium = 4
Atomic mass of oxygen = 32
43. Estimate the total number of molecules inclusive of oxygen, nitrogen, water
vapour and other constituents in a room of capacity 25.0 m3 at a temperature
of 27ºC and 1 atmospheric pressure.
44. 0.014 kg of nitrogen is enclosed in a vessel at a temperature of 27ºC. How
much heat has to be transferred to the gas to double the rms speed of its
molecules.

45. At what temperature is the rms velocity of hydrogen molecule equal to that
of an oxygen molecule at 47°C.
(a) –73K (b) 3K
(c) 20 K (d) 80 K

360 Physics Class XI

 46. The average kinetic energy of a gas molecule at 27°C is 621×10–1 J. The
average kinetic energy of gas molecule at 227°C will be
(a) 52.2×10–21 J (b) 5.22×10–21 J
(c) 10.35×10–21 J (d) 11.35×10–21 J
47. The equation of sate 5 g of oxygen at a pressure P and temperature T, when
occupying a volume V, will be
5 RT 5 RT 5 RT
5 RT 5 RT 5 RT
(a) PV PV PVPV (b) PV PV
32 16 2 32 16 2
5 RT 5 RT
(c) 5 RT (d) PV = 5 RT
PV PV PV
32 16 2
48. A gas is found to obey the law P2 V = constant. The initial temperature

temperature becomes :
To To To To
(a) (b)
3 3
(c) 3 To (d) 3 To

49. A gas behaves as an ideal gas at

(a) low pressure and high temperature

(b) low pressure and low temperature

(c) high pressure and low temperature

(d) high pressure and high temperature

50. If
freedom of a molecule of the gas is
( 1 ( 1 3 1 ( 1 ( 1 3 1 2
(a) 25 9 252(b) 9
2 2 2 1 12 2 2 1 1

( 1 ( 2( 1 ( 1 3 1 2
(c)1 3 1
(d)
2 2 2 1 12 2 2 1 1

51.
halved and their rms speed is doubled. The resultant pressure would be

(a) 2Po (b) 4 Po

Po Po Po Po
(c) (d)
4 2 4 2

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 361

 52. The translational kinetic energy of gas molecules for 1 mol of gas is
equal to
3 2 KT RT 3 KT 3 2 KT RT 3 KT
(a) RT (b)
2 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 2 KT RT 3 KT 3 2 KT RT 3 KT
(c) 2 3
(d)
2 2
2 3 2 2
53. Molecular motion shows itself as

(a) Temperature (b) Internal energy

(c) Friction (d) Viscosity

54. A sample of gas is at 0°C. To what temperature it must be raised in order

to double the rms speed of the molecule

(a) 270°C (b) 719°C

(c) 1090°C (d) 100°C

55. The work done by (or on) a gas per mole per kelvin is called

(a) Universal gas constant (b) Boltizmann's constant

(c) Gravitational constant (d) Entropy

56.
by 0.4%. What was the initial temperature of the gas?

(a) 250 K (b) 350 K

(c) 450 K (d) 500 K

57. The root mean square speed of the molecules of a gas is

(a) independent of its pressure but directly proportional to its Kelvin

temperature
(b) directly proportional to two square root of both its pressure and its
Kelvin temperature
(c) independent of its pressure but directly proportional to the square root
of its Kelvin temperature.

(d) directly proportional to its pressure and its Kelvin temperature.

362 Physics Class XI

58. The root mean square velocity of gas molecules is 10 km/s The gas is heated
till its pressure becomes four times. The velocity of gas molecules will be

(a) 10 Km/s (b) 20 Km/s

(c) 40 Km/s (d) 80 Km/s

59. According to kinetic theory of gases at absolute zero

(a) Water freezes (b) Liquid helium freezes
(c) Molecular motion stops (d) All of the above are correct

60. The quantity of heat required to raise one mole through 1 K for a monoatomic
gas at constant volume is
3 5 7 3 5 7
(a) R R R (b)R R R
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 5 7
R (c)R R (d) 4R
2 2 2
61. Dimensional formula for universal gas constant R is given by

(a) [ML2T–2K–2] (b) [ML2T–3K–1]

(c) [M°L2T–3K–1] (d) [ML2T–2K–4]

62. An ant is walking on the horizontal surface. The number of degrees of

freedom of ant will be

(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 6

63.
(a) has only two values Cp & Cv
(b) has a unique value of given temperature
(c) can have any values from O to
(d) depends upon the mass of the gas

64. 250 L of an ideal gas is heated at constant pressure from 27°C such that its

(a) 54°C (b) 300°C

(c) 327°C (d) 600°C

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 363

 ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS
Direction:- Read the assertion and reason carefully to mark the correct
option out of the options given below :
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation
of the assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the correct explanation
of the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.
1. Assertion: If a gas container in motion is suddenly stopped, the temperature
of the gas rises.
Reason: The kinetic energy of ordered mechanical motion is converted
into the kinetic energy of random motion of gas molecules.
2. Assertion: The total translational kinetic energy of all the molecules of a
given mass of an ideal gas is 1.5 times the product of its pressure and its
volume.
Reason: The molecules of a gas collide with each other and the velocities
of the molecules change due to collision.
3. Assertion: Gases do not settle to the bottom of a container.
Reason: Gases have high kinetic energy.
4.

the temperature of unit mass of the substance through unit degree.

5.
alone.
Reason: On increasing pressure the temperature of gas decreases.
6. Assertion: Equal masses of helium and oxygen gases are given equal
quantities of heat. There will be a greater rise in the temperature of helium
compared to that of oxygen .
Reason: The molecular weight of oxygen is more than the molecular weight
of helium.
7. Assertion: Absolute zero is the temperature corresponding to zero energy.
Reason: The temperature at which no molecular motion cease is called
absolute zero temperature.

364 Physics Class XI

 8.
heat at constant volume for a diatomic gas is more than that for a monatomic
gas.
Reason: The molecules of a monatomic gas have more degree of freedom
than those of a diatomic gas.
9. Assertion: At room temperature, water does not sublimate from water to
steam.
Reason: The critical point of water is much above the room temperature.
10. p) is greater than
v) .
Reason: At constant pressure, some heat is spent in expansion of the gas.
11. Assertion: The internal energy of a real gas is function of both, temperature
and volume.
Reason: Internal kinetic energy depends on temperature and internal potential
energy depends on volume.

The equipartition of kinetic energy was proposed initially in 1843 and

more correctly in 1845, by John James Waterston. In 1859, James Clerk
Maxwell argued that the kinetic heat energy of a gas is equally divided
between linear and rotational energy. In 1876, Ludwig Boltzmann expanded
on this principle by showing that the average energy was divided equally
among all the independent components of motion in a system. Boltzmann
applied the equipartition theorem to provide a theoretical explanation of

Law of Equipartition of Energy

According to this law, for any system in thermal equilibrium, the
total energy is equally distributed among its various degree of freedom.
1
And each degree of freedom is associated with energy kT (where
2
k = 1.3 × l 0–23J/K, T = absolute temperature of the system).

At a given temperature T; all ideal gas molecules no matter what their

3
mass have th same average translational kinetic energy; namely, kT.
2
When measure the temperature of a gas, we are also measuring the average

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 365

 translational kinetic energy of it's molecules.
At same temperature gases with different degrees of freedom

f
namely kT.
2

1. Relation between pressure P and average kinetic energy E per unit

volume of a gas is
E 3E
(a) P 2E (b) P (c) P (d) P = 3E
3 3 2
2. At 0 K, which of the following properties of a gas will be zero?
(a) kinetic energy (b) potential energy
(c) vibrational energy (d) density
3. The root mean square velocity of a gas molecule of mass m at a given
temperature is proportional to
(a) m0 (b) m (c) m (d) m–1/2
4. An ant is walking on the horizontal surface. The number of degrees
of freedom of ant will be
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 6
5. The number of degrees of freedom for a diatomic gas molecule is
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 6

ANSWERS
VERY SHORT ANSWERS (1 MARK)
1. (i) Low pressure (ii) High temperature.
2.
3.

4. Atomicity and temperature.

5. 0

366 Physics Class XI

 6. 22.4 litre
7. Gas in which intermolecular forces are absent.
8. increases times
9. 3P/2
10. Hydrogen (rms speed is greater)

11.

12.

P and V are constant then T is also constant.

SHORT ANSWERS (2 MARKS)

13. Work is done against friction. This work done is converted into heat.
Temperature rises. PV = nRT, As volume of tyre is const. P T.
14.
density. So hydrogen leaked out more rapidly.
15.
change in temp. of land is more than ocean (water).

19.

c’ = 2v

20. (i)
as the temperature is same rms speeds are same.

(ii)

i.e.,

21. When temperature is low and pressure is high the intermolecular forces
become appreciable thus the volume occupied by the molecular is not
negligibly small as composed to volume of gas.

22. When piston is pulled out the volume of the gas increases, Now losses number

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 367

 of molecules colliding against the wall of container per unit area decreases.
Hence pressure decreases.
ANSWERS (3 MARKS)
23. (i) diameter of molecule as

(ii) Pressure of gas as

24. Heat supplied to oxygen = Heat supplied to Helium

mc1 T1 = mc2 T2

= As , m = molecular mass

= As m1 > m2

T1 > T2
25. During evaporation fast moving molecules escape a liquid surface so the
average kinetic energy of the molecules left behind is decreased thus the
temperature of the liquid is lowered.
26. number of mole = Constant

1 + 2 =

From Boyle’s law, P (V1 + V2) = P1V1 + P2V2

27. n= , n’ =

n/n’ =

30. T P V [ R = constant]

Since PV is greater for the curve at T 2 than for the curve T1 therefore
T2 > T1.

31. Three vessels at the same pressure and temperature have same volume and
contain equal number of molecules.

368 Physics Class XI

 Vrms = , Vrms

rms speed will not same, neon has smallest mass therefore rms speed will be
largest for neon.

38. V1 = 10–6 m3
Pressure on bubble P1 = Water pressure + Atmospheric pressure
= pgh + Patm
= 4.93 × 105 Pa
T1 = 285 k, T2 = 308 k

V2 = .
39. According to kinetic theory of gases,

PV =

At constant temperature, is constant. As v is also constant, so P m.

When the mass of the gas increase by 50% pressure also increases by 50%,
Final pressure = = 114 cm of Hg.

40. For monoatomic gas, Cv = R, n = 1 mole

For diatomic gas, Cv’ = R, n’ = 3 mole

Cv’ =

or C’v = × 8.31 = 18.7 J mol–1 K–1.

41. V1 = 30 litre = 30 × 103 cm3 = 3 × 10–2 m3

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 369

 P1 = 15 × 1.013 × 105 N/m2
T1 = 300 K

1 = = 18.3

P2 = 11 × 1.013 × 105 N/m2

V2 = 3 × 10–2 m3
T2 = 290 k

2 = = 13.9

2 – 1 = 18.3 – 13.9 = 4.4

Mass of gas taken out of cylinder
= 4.4 × 32 g
= 140.8 g
=0.140 kg.

42. vrms =

Let r.m.s. speed of oxygen is (vrms)1 and of helium is (vrms)2 is equal at

temperature T1 and T2 respectively.

= 1

T1 =
43. As Boltzmann’s constant,

kB = , R = kB N

Now PV = nRT = nkB NT

The number of molecules in the room

=nN =

370 Physics Class XI

 = = 6.117 × 1026.

44. Number of mole in 0.014 kg of Nitrogen

n =

Cv =

= , T2 = 4T1

T = T2 – T1 = 4T1 – T1 = 3T1
= 3 × 300 = 900 K

Q = n cv T =

45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (d)

51. (a) 52. (a) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (a) 56. (a)

57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (a) 61. (a) 62. (b)

63. (c) 64. (c)

HINTS :-
3RT1 3RT2 M1 2
45. 1 , 2 i.e. T1 T2 320 20 k
M1 M2 M2 32
21
3 3 K T1 K1 T2 621 10 21
46. K1 kT1 , K 2 kT2 i.e. 1 K2 500 10.35 10 J
2 2 K2 T2 T1 300

RT
2 T2
48. P2 V = constant V
V = constant V
constant.

1
50. 1
f
1
51. Po C 2 As halved and C is doubled then P 2Po
3

Kinetic Theory Of Gases 371

 PV
54. C2 T 55. R
T
P
56. PV = RT here V = Constant therefore P T. i.e. = T constant
P1 P2 P P 0.4% of P
T 250 K
T1 T2 T T 1
58. P T
dU 3
60. CV and U RT
dT 2
64. V T as P is constant.
ASSERTION - REASON BASED ANSWERS
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (e) 5. (d) 6. (b)
7. (e) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (a)
HINTS :-
1. (a) The motion of the container is known as the ordered motion of the
gas and zig-zag motion of gas molecules within the container is
called disordered motion. When the container suddenly stops, ordered
kinetic energy gets converted into disordered kinetic energy which
increases the temperature of the gas.
3
2. (b) Average translational kinetic energy of a gas molecule is E kT
3 3 3 2
For all gas molecules E kT N A RT PV
2 2 2
3. (a) Gases do not settle to the bottom because of its kinetic energy. They

of gravity on them is negligible.

2E
1. (a) P
3
2. (a) At 0 K, all molecular motion stops, so kinetic energy becomes zero.
3K 3T
3. (d) Vrms i.e. Vrms m –1/2
m
4. (b) As the ant can move on a plane, it has 2 degree of freedom.
5. (c) A diatomic molecule has 3 degree of freedom due to translatory
motion and 2 degrees of freedom due to rotatory motion.
****

372 Physics Class XI

 Mechanical
10-A Waves
Oscillation & Waves

10.1 Periodic Motion

A motion, which repeat itself over and over again after a regular interval of

the motion is repeated is called period of the motion. Examples : Revolution

of earth around the sun (period one year).

10.2 Oscillatory or Vibratory Motion.

The motion in which a body moves to and fro or back and forth repeatedly

called as harmonic motion. Example : The motion of the pendulum of a wall

clock.

10.3 Harmonic and Non-harmonic Oscillation.

single harmonic function (i.e. sine or cosine function). Example : y = a sin

t or y = a cos t.

terms of single harmonic function. Example : y = a sin t + b sin 2 t.

10.4 Some Important Definitions.

(1) Time period : It is the least interval of time after which the periodic
motion of a body repeats itself. S.l. units of time period is second.
(2) Frequency :
by body per second. S.l unit of frequency is hertz (Hz).
(3) Angular Frequency : 2 n
(4) Displacement: Its deviation from the mean position.

Oscillations Waves 373

 (5) Phase :
and direction of motion, of the particle at that instant with respect to its
mean position.
Y = a sin = a sin ( t + 0) here = t+ 0 = phase of vibrating
particle.
(i) Initial phase or epoch : It is the phase of a vibrating particle
at t= 0.
(ii) Same phase: Two vibrating particle are said to be in same phase,
n or
/2) or time interval is an
even multiple of (T/2).
(iii) Opposite phase :
between the particle is an odd multiple of
is an odd multiple of or the time interval is an odd multiple of
(T/2).

If two particles performs S.H.M and their

equation are y1 = a sin ( t + 1) and y2 = a sin ( t + 2) then phase
= ( t + 2) – ( t + 1) = 2 –

10.5 Simple Harmonic Motion.

Simple harmonic motion is a special type of periodic motion, in which
Restoring force Displacement of the particle from mean position.

F = – kx

Where k is known as force constant. Its S.l. unit is Newton/meter and

dimension is [MT–2].

10.6 Displacement in S.H.M.

motion on any diameter of circle of reference

(i) y = a sin t when at t = 0 the vibrating particle is at mean position.

(ii) y = a cos t when at t

(iii) y = a sin ( t ± ) when the vibrating particle is phase leading or

lagging from the mean position.

374 Physics Class XI

10.7 Comparative Study of Displacement, Velocity and
Acceleration.
Displacement y = a sin t

Velocity v = a cos t

t=

Acceleration A=–a 2 sin t

t =a 2 sin ( t + )

(i) All the three quantities displacement, velocity and acceleration show
harmonic variation with time having same period.

(ii) The velocity amplitude is times the displacement amplitude

(iii) The acceleration amplitude is 2 times the displacement amplitude

(iv) In S.H.M. the velocity is ahead of displacement by a phase angle /2.

(v) In S.H.M. the acceleration is ahead of velocity by a phase angle /2.

(vi) The acceleration is ahead of displacement by a phase angle of

Oscillations Waves 375

Physical quantities Equilibrium position (y = 0) Extreme Position (y = ± a)

Displacement y = a sin t a)

Velocity a ) Minimum (Zero)

Acceleration A = – 2y 2a)

10.8 Energy in S.H.M.

and Kinetic energy

(1) Potential energy :

(i) when y = ± a; t = /2; t = T/4

(ii) when y = 0; t = 0; t = 0
(2) Kinetic energy :

or

(i) when y = 0; t = 0; t = 0

(ii) when y = a; t = T/4, t = /2

(3) Total energy : Total mechanical energy

Total energy is not a position function i.e. it always remains constant.

(4) Energy position graph :

376 Physics Class XI

 (5) Kinetic energy and potential energy vary periodically double the
frequency of S.H.M.

10.9 Time Period and Frequency of S.H.M.

Time period (T) = as =

Frequency (n) = =
In general m is called inertia factor and k is called spring factor.

Thus T=2

10.10 Differential Equation of S.H.M.

For S.H.M. (linear) [As

For angular S.H.M.

10.11 Simple Pendulum

Mass of the bob = m

l;T=2

(i) Time period of simple pendulum is independent of amplitude as long

as its motion is simple harmonic.
(ii) Time period of simple pendulum is also independent of mass of the
bob.
(iii) If the length of the pendulum is comparable to the radius of earth

then 2

If l >> R ( ) 1/l< 1/R so 2 84.6 minutes

Oscillations Waves 377

 (iv) The time period of simple pendulum whose point of suspension moving
horizontally with acceleration,

a 2 and = tan–1 (a/g)

vibrations is two seconds.

(vi) Work done in giving an angular displacement to the pendulum from
its mean position.
W = U = mgl (1 – cos )
(vii) Kinetic energy of the bob at mean position = work done or potential

10.12 Spring Pendulum

A point mass suspended from a mass less spring or placed on a frictionless
horizontal plane attached with spring constitutes a linear harmonic spring
pendulum

Time period 2

2 and Frequency

(i) Time of a spring pendulum is independent of acceleration due to gravity.

(ii) If the spring has a mass M and mass m

mass is given by

So that

(iii) If two masses of mass m1 and m2 are connected

by a spring and made to oscillate on horizontal
surface, the reduced mass mr is given by

378 Physics Class XI

 So that

(iv) If a spring pendulum, oscillating in a vertical plane is made to oscillate

on a horizontal surface, (or on inclined plane) time period will remain
unchanged.

(v) If the stretch in a vertically loaded spring is y0 then

Time period does not depends on ‘g’ because along with g, y0 will also
change in such a way that remains constant.

n
connected in series having force constant k1, k2, k3 ........ respectively

then

k = k1 + k2 + k3 + ........

(viii) If the spring of force constamt k is divided in to n equal parts then

spring constant of each part will become nk.

k is inversely proportional to the spring length.

As k

l is cut in two pieces of length l1 and l2 such

that l1 = nl2.

If the constant of a spring is k

Spring constant of second part k2 = (n + 1 ) k and ratio of spring constant

Oscillations Waves 379

10.13 Various Formulae of S.H.M. .
S.H.M. of a liquid in U tube :
If a liquid of density contained in
a vertical U tube performs S.H.M. in its
two limbs. Then time period

Where L = Total length of liquid

column, H = Height of undisturbed
liquid in each limb (L = 2h)
S.H.M. of ball in the neck of an air
chamber
If l is the length of cylinder dipping in
Image
liquid then time period

M = mass of the ball

V = volume of air
chamber
A = area of cross
section of neck
E = Bulk modulus
for Air
S.H.M. of a body in a tunnel dug along S.H.M. of body in the
any chord of earth tunnel dug along the
diameter of earth
minutes

T = 84.6 minutes
R = radius of the earth
= 6400 km
g = acceleration due
to gravity = 9.8 m/s2
at earth’s surface

380 Physics Class XI

10.14 Free, Damped, Forced and Maintained Oscillation.
(1) Free oscillation
(i) The oscillation of a particle with fundamental frequency under the

(ii) The amplitude, frequency and energy of oscillation remains constant

(iii) Frequency of free oscillation is called natural frequency.
(2) Damped oscillation
(i) The oscillation of a body whose amplitude goes on decreasing with

forces like frictional force, viscous force, hystersis etc.

(3) Forced oscillation

natural frequency of the oscillator. Then this state is known as

the state of resonance. And this frequency is known as resonant
frequency.

(4) Maintained oscillation : The oscillation in which the loss of oscillator

known as maintained oscillation.

10.15 Wave
A wave is a disturbance which propagates energy and momentum from one
place to the other without the transport of matter.

(1) Necessary properties of the medium for wave propagation :

(i) Elasticity : So that particles can return to their mean position, after
having been disturbed.

(ii) Inertia : So that particles can store energy and overshoot their mean
position.

Oscillations Waves 381

 (iii) Minimum friction amongst the particles of the medium.

(iv) Uniform density of the medium.

(2) Mechanical waves : The waves which require medium for their
propagation are called mechanical waves.

Example : Waves on string and spring, waves on water surface, sound

waves, seismic waves.

(3) Non-mechanical waves : The waves which do not require medium for
their propagation are called non-mechanical or electromagnetic waves.

Examples : Light, heat (Infrared), radio waves, -rays. X-rays etc.

(4) Transverse waves :

motion about their mean position in a direction perpendicular to the
direction of propagation of wave motion.
(i) It travels in the form of crests and troughs.
(ii) A crest is a portion of the medium which is raised temporarily.
(iii) A trough is a portion of the medium which is depressed temporarily.

waves on the surface of water.

(v) Transverse waves can not be transmitted into liquids and gases.

(5) Longitudinal waves: If the particles of a medium vibrate in the direction

of wave motion the wave is called longitudinal.
(i) It travels in the form of compression and rarefaction.
(ii) A compression (c) is a region of the medium in which particles are
compressed.
(iii) A rarefaction (R) is a region of the medium in which particles are

waves.
(v) These waves can be transmitted through solids, liquids and gases.

382 Physics Class XI

10.16 Important Terms
(1) Wavelength :

(i) It is the length of one wave.

(ii) Distance travelled by the wave in one time period is known as

wavelength.

= Distance between two consecutive crests or troughs.

(2) Frequency : Number of vibrations completed in one second.

(3) Time period :

taken by the particle to complete one vibration about its mean position.

(4) Relation between frequency and time period :

Time period = 1 /Frequency

T = 1/n

(5) Relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength : v = n .

10.17 Velocity of Sound (Wave motion)

(1) Speed of transverse wave motion :

(i) , T = Tension in the string;

m = Linear density of string (mass per unit length).

(ii) ( = Modulus of rigidity; = Density of

the material.)
(2) Speed of longitudinal wave motion :

(i) In a solid long bar (Y = Young’s modulus; = Density)

(ii) In a liquid medium (k = Bulk modulus)

(iii) In gases

Oscillations Waves 383

10.18 Velocity of Sound in Elastic Medium
Velocity of sound in any medium is

(E = Elasticity of the medium; = Density of the medium)

(1) vsteel > vwater > vair 5000 m/s > 1500 m/s > 330 m/s
(2) Newton’s formula : He assumed that propagation of sound is isothermal

As K = E

By calculation vair = 279 m/sec.

(3) Laplace correction :

adiabatic process.

(As k = E = = Adiabatic elasticity)

v = 331.3 m/s ( Air = 1.41)

Velocity of sound is independent of the pressure

(when T = constant)

When the temperature change is small then vt = v0 (1 + t)

Value of

With rise in humidity velocity of sound increases.

(8) Sound of any frequency or wavelength travels through a given medium

ith the same velocity.

(9) Sound of any frequency or wavelength travels through a given medium

with the same velocity.

384 Physics Class XI

10.19 Reflection of Mechanical
Medium Longitudinal Transverse Change in Phase Time Path
wave wave direction change change change

from rigid rarefaction and crest and

end/denser vice-versa Trough as
medium trough

from free as compression trough and

end/rarer and rarefaction trough as
medium as rarefaction crest

10.20 Progressive Wave

velocity.
(2) Energy and momentum are transmitted in the direction of propagation
of waves.
(3) In progressive waves, equal changes in pressure and density occurs at
all points of medium.
(4) Various forms of progressive wave function.
(i) y = A sin ( t – kx) Where y = displacement
A = amplitude
= angular frequency
n = frequency
k = propagation constant
T = time period
= wave length
v = wave velocity
t = instantaneous time
(ii)

Oscillations Waves 385

 (iii)

(iv)

(v)

(a) If the sign between t and x terms is negative the wave is propagating

(b) The Argument of sin or cos function i.e. ( t – kx

t gives angular frequency

x gives propagation constant or wave number

t to that of x gives wave or phase velocity,

i.e.
(f) When a given wave passes from one medium to another its frequency
does not change.

(g) From n = constant

(5) Some terms related to progressive waves

(i) Wave number

and

386 Physics Class XI

 (iii) Wave velocity (v

10.21 Principle of Superposition

If are the displacements at a particular time at a particular

position, due to individual waves, then the resultant displacement,

(b) Beats.

10.22 Standing Waves or Stationary Waves

When two sets of progressive wave trains of same type (both longitudinal
or both transverse) having the same amplitude and same time period/frequency/
wavelength travelling with same speed along the same straight line in opposite
directions superimpose, a new set of waves are formed. These are called stationary
waves or standing waves.

(2) There is no forward motion of the disturbance beyond this particular

region.
(3) The total energy is twice the energy of each wave.

Oscillations Waves 387

 The distance between two consecutive nodes is .

between two consecutive antinodes is also /2. The distance between a

/4.
(6) The medium splits up into a number of segments.

(8) Twice during each vibration, all the particles of the medium pass
simultaneously through their mean position.

10.23 Comparative Study of Stretched Strings, Open Organ

Pipe and Closed Organ Pipe
S. Parameter Stretched string Open organ Closed organ Pipe
No. Pipe

(1) Fundamental
frequency or
1st harmonic
(1st mode of
vibration)
(2) Frequency n2 = 2n1 n2 = 2n1 Missing
of 1st
overtone
or 2nd
harmonic
(2nd mode
of vibration)
(3) Frequency n3 = 3n1 n3 = 3n1 n3 = 3n1
of 2nd
overtone
or 3rd
harmonic
(3rd mode of
vibration)

ratio of
overtones

ratio of
harmonics

388 Physics Class XI

(6) Nature of Transverse Longitudinal Longitudinal
waves stationary stationary stationary

(7) General
formula for
wavelength

x=0,

nodes
x= x=
antinodes

(i) Harmonics are the notes/sounds of frequency equal to or an integral

multiple of fundamental frequency (n).

the fundamental frequency (n).

it is formed a little distance away from the open end outside it. The
distance of antinode from the open end of the pipe is = 0.6r (where r is
radius of organ pipe). This is known as end correction.

10.24 Vibration of a String

General formula of frequency

L = Length of string, T = Tension in the string

m = Mass per unit length (linear density), p = mode of vibration

(1) The string will be in resonance with the given body if any of its natural
frequencies concides with the body.

(2) If M is the mass of the string of length L,

So (r = Radius, = Density)

Oscillations Waves 389

10.25 Beats

medium along the same direction, superimpose on each other, the intensity of the
resultant sound at a particular position rises and falls regularly with time. This
phenomenon is called beats.
(1) Beat period : The time interval between two successive beats (i.e. two

(2) Beat frequency : The number of beats produced per second is called
beat frequency.
(3) Persistence of hearing : The impression of sound heard by our ears
persist in our mind for 1/10th of a second.
So for the formation of distinct beats, frequencies of two sources of

(4) Equation of beats : If two waves of equal amplitudes ‘a’ and slightly
n1 and n2 travelling in a medium in the same
direction then equation of beats is given by
y = A sin (n1 – n2)t where A = 2a cos (n1 – n2)t = Amplitude of
resultant wave.
Amplitude of resultant wave.
(5) Beat frequency : n = n1 – n2.

(6) Beat period:

n1 – n2

10.26 Doppler Effect

Whenever there is a relative motion between a source of sound and the

from the actual frequency of sound emitted by the source.

Apparent frequency

Here n = Actual frequency; vL = Velocity of listener; vs = Velocity of source

vm = Velocity of medium and v = Velocity of sound wave

S to L are taken as positive

and all velocities along the direction L to S are taken as negative. If the

390 Physics Class XI

 medium is stationary vm = 0 then

n = n) when relative motion between

source and listener is zero.
(2) Source and listener moves at right angle to the direction of wave
propagation. (n = n)
(i) If the velocity of source and listener is equal to or greater than the

QUESTIONS
ONE MARK QUESTIONS

1.
increased?
2.
3. At what distance from the mean position, is the kinetic energy in simple
harmonic oscillator equal to potential energy ?
4. How is the frequency of oscillation related with the frequency of change in

5. What is the frequency of total energy of a particle in S.H.M. ?

6. How is the length of seconds pendulum related with acceleration due to
gravity of any planet ?
7.

time period of the pendulum increased or decrease.

8.
to hills or in mines ?
9.
move in which direction ?
10.

Oscillations Waves 391

11. Sound waves from a point source are propagating in all directions. What
will be the ratio of amplitudes at distances of x meter and y meter from the
source ?
12. Does the direction of acceleration at various points during the oscillation of
a simple pendulum remain towards mean position ?
13. What is the time period for the function f(t) = sin t + cos t may represent
the simple harmonic motion ?
14.
SHM ?
15.
16. What is the phase relationship between displacement, velocity and
acceleration in SHM ?
17. What forces keep the simple pendulum in motion ?
18. How will the time period of a simple pendulum change when its length is
doubled ?
19. What is a harmonic wave function ?
20. If the motion of revolving particle is periodic in nature, give the nature of

21.
w1 w2 of the force.
What is the relation between w1 and w2 ?
22. Which property of the medium are responsible for propagation of waves
through it ?
23. What is the nature of the thermal change in air, when a sound wave propagates
through it ?
24. Why does sound travel faster in iron than in water or air ?
25. When will the motion of a simple pendulum be simple harmonic ?
26. A simple harmonic motion of acceleration ‘a’ and displacement ‘x’ is
represented by a + 4 2x = 0. What is the time period of S.H.M ?
27.
28.

392 Physics Class XI

29.
and displacement to describe a periodic motion ?
30. Why the pitch of an organ pipe on a hot summer day is higher ?
31.
takes place ?
32.
in support of this statement.
33.
in water be longitudinal or transverse ?
34. Frequency is the most fundamental property of wave, why ?
35.
36. If any liquid of density higher than the density of water is used in a resonance
tube, how will the frequency change ?
37.
of sound moves towards the listener ?
38. What physical change occurs when a source of sound moves and the listener
is stationary ?
39. What physical change occurs when a source of sound is stationary and the
listener moves ?
40. If two sound waves of frequencies 480 Hz and 536 Hz superpose, will they
produce beats? Would you hear the beats ?
41.

2 MARKS QUESTIONS
42.
and why ?
(i) acceleration and displacement
(ii) restoring force and displacement

43. The formula for time period T for a loaded spring, T =

Does the time period depend on length of the spring ?

Oscillations Waves 393

44.
up to the same height in the tube be lesser of greater than that in case of
water ?
45. There are two springs, one delicate and another hard or stout one. For which
spring, the frequency of the oscillator will be more ?
46. Time period of a particle in S.H.M. depends on the force constant K and

mass m of the particle A simple pendulum for small angular

of a pendulum independent of the mass of the pendulum ?

47. What is the frequency of oscillation of a simple pendulum mounted in a
cabin that is falling freely ?
48. 0. While the
v0, calculate amplitude of motion.
49.
cm of Hg is 330 ms–1. What will be its velocity, when pressure is increased
to 152 cm of mercury and temperature is kept constant ?
50. Even after the breakup of one prong of tunning fork it produces a round
of same frequency, then what is the use of having a tunning fork with two
prongs ?
51.
52. The displacement of particle in S.H.M. may be given by y = a sin ( t + )
show that if the time t is increased by 2 , the value of y remains the same.
53.

54.
55. Why does the sound travel faster in humid air ?

56. Use the formula v

(a) is independent of pressure

(b) increase with temperature

394 Physics Class XI

57.
for frequency of fundamental note and harmonics.
58. Bats can ascertain distances, directions; nature and size of the obstacle

59. In a sound wave, a displacement node is a pressure antinode and vice- versa.

60. How does the frequency of a tuning fork change, when the temperature is
increased ?

61.
62. What do you mean by reverberation? What is reverberation time ?
3 MARKS QUESTIONS
63. Show that for a particle in linear simple harmonic motion, the acceleration
is directly proportional to its displacement of the given instant.
64. Show that for a particle in linear simple harmonic motion, the average kinetic
energy over a period of oscillation, equals the average potential energy over
the same period.
65.

66.
angle equal to zero (b) velocity time graph and (c) acceleration time graph
of the particle.
67. Show that a linear combination of sine and cosine function like x(t) = a sin
t + b cos t represents a simple harmonic. Also, determine its amplitude
and phase constant.
68.
is /2, and between displacement and acceleration is .
69.
massless loaded spring.
70. Show that for small oscillations the motion of a simple pendulum is simple

71. Distinguish with an illustration among free, forced and resonant oscillations.

Oscillations Waves 395

72.
(i) amplitude
(ii) time period
(iii) frequency
(iv) angular frequency
(v) wave length and wave number.
73. What do you understand by phase of a wave? How does the phase change
with time and position.
74.
and potential energy will be equal?

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

75.
oscillator. Hence show that the total energy is conserved in S.H.M. in which
positions of the oscillator, is the energy wholly kinetic or wholly potential ?
76.

maintained between the two columns. Show that when the suction pump is

77. Discuss the Newton’s formula for velocity of sound in air. What correction
was applied to it by Laplace and why ?
78.

79. Discuss the formation of harmonics in a stretched string. Show that in case

80.
81.
person, then determine the velocity of motion of the person. Velocity of
sound = 30 ms–1.
82.
organ pipe.
83. Describe the various modes of vibrations of a closed organ pipe.

396 Physics Class XI

84.
for this phenomenon.
85. Show that the speed of sound in air increases by 61 cms–1
of temperature.
NUMERICALS
86.
its displacement be of its amplitude.

87. A particle is moving with SHM in a straight line. When the distance of the
particle from the equilibrium position has values x1 and x2, the corresponding
value of velocities are u1 and u2. Show that the time period of oscillation is
given by

88. Find the period of vibrating particle (SHM), which has acceleration of
45 cm s–2, when displacement from mean position is 5 cm.
89.

frequency of its vibration.

90. The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the moon is 1.7 ms–2. What
is the time period of a simple pendulum on the moon, if its time period on
the earth is 3.5 s? [g = 9.8 ms–2]
91.
(i) At what distance from the mean position is its kinetic energy equal to
its potential energy?

92. A set of 24 tunning forks is arranged so that each gives 4 beats per second

of Ist and last tunning forks.

93.
with a frequency of 0.5 s–1. A block of 10kg is placed on the piston. What is

remain together ?

Oscillations Waves 397

94. At what temperature will the speed of sound be double its value

95. A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The length of the
scale is 20 cm. A body suspended from this spring, when displaced and
released, oscillates with a period of 0.60 s. What is the weight of the body ?
96.
person, then determine the velocity of motion of the person. Velocity of
sound = 330 ms–1.
97. A body of mass m

from mean position.

98. A string of mass 2.5 kg is under a tension of 200N. The length of the stretched

does the disturbance take to reach the other end ?

99. Which of the following function of time represent (a) periodic and (b) non-
periodic motion? Give the period for each case of periodic motion. [w is any
positive constant].
(i) sin t + cos t
(ii) sin t + sin 2 t + sin 4 t
(iii) e– t

(iv) log ( t)

100. The equation of a plane progressive wave is given by the equation y = 10

sin 2 (t – 0.005x) where y and x are in cm and t
amplitude, frequency, wave length and velocity of the wave.
101. A tuning fork arrangement (pair) produces 4 beats s –1 with one fork of

produces 2 beats s–1. What is the frequency of the unknown fork ?

102. A pipe 20 cm long is closed at one end, which harmonic mode of the pipe

resonance with the pipe, if both ends are open? Speed of sound = 340 ms–1.
103. The length of a wire between the two ends of a sonometer is 105 cm. Where
should the two bridges be placed so that the fundamental frequencies of the

398 Physics Class XI

104. The transverse displacement of a string (clamped at its two ends) is
given by

where x, y are in m and t is in s. The length of the string is 1.5 m and its mass
is 3.0 10–2 kg. Answer the following.
(a) Does the function represent a travelling or a stationary wave?
(b) Interpret the wave as a superposition of two waves travelling in opposite
directions. What are the wavelength frequency and speed of propagation
of each wave ?
(c) Determine the tension in the string.
105. A wire stretched between two rigid supports vibrates in its fundamental
mode with a frequency 45 Hz. The mass of the wire is 3.5 × 10–2 kg and its
linear density is 4.0 10–2 kg m–1. What is (a) the speed of transverse wave
on the string and (b) the tension in the string ?
106. A steel rod 100 cm long is clamped at its middle. The fundamental frequency
of longitudinal vibrations of the rod as given to be 2.53 kHz. What is the
speed of sound in steel ?
107. A progressive wave of frequency 500 Hz is travelling with velocity 360 m/s.

108. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound with a velocity one

ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS

ad the assertion and reason carefully to mark the correct

of the assertion.

of the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.
1.
periodic motions are not oscillatory.

Oscillations Waves 399

 2. nic motion is a uniform motion.

motion.
3.

considered.
4.

time.
5.
oscillator is a parabola.

motion.
6.
moon, its time period Increases.

7.
natural frequency of vibration of the body is the same as the impressed

8.
is a straight line with zero slope.

motion.
9.

10.
with an acceleration half the acceleration due to gravity is 0.612 Hz .

acceleration due to gravity.

11.

resistance etc.

400 Physics Class XI

 HINTS AND ANSWERS
1. (b) Both assertion and reason are correct but reason is not the correct

2. (e) simple harmonic motion, v a 2 y 2 as y changes,velocity v will also

change. So simple hanllonic motion is not uniform motion. But simple

motion along one of the diameter of the circle.

3. (a) In SHM, the acceleratio n is always in a direction opposite to that of the
displacement i.e., proportional to (–y).
4. (a) A periodic function is one whose value repeats after a dehnite interval
of time. sin and cos are periodic functions because they repeat itself
after 2 interval of time.

 
 

 
It is also true that moon is smaller than the earth, but this statement is

5. (e) In SHM, v a2 y2 or v2 = 2y2.

2
v y2
Dividing both sides by 2a2 , 2 2
1. This is the equation of an
a a2
ellipse. Hence the graph between v and y is an ellipse not a parabola.
1
6. (b) T 2 .
g
Therefore, T increases.
7. (c) Amplitude of oscillation for a forced, damped oscillator is
F0 / m
A , where b is constant related to the strength
2 2 2
0 b /m
of the resistive force, 0 k / m is natural frequency of undamped
oscillator (b = 0).
When the Frequency of driving force 0, then amplitude A is
very larger.
For < or > , the amplitude decrease.
Oscillations Waves 401
8. (a) The total energy of S.H.M. = Kinetic energy of particle +
potential energy of particle.
The variation of total energy of the particle in SHM with time is shown
in a graph.

9. (c) Time period of simple pendulum of length is,

l T 1 l
T 2 T l
g T 2 l
T 1
T 2

10. (c) Frequency of second pendulum n = (1 / 2)s –1. When elevator is

to gravity is
g = g + a = g +g / 2 = 3g / 2.
1 g
As n so n 2 g.
2 l
n12 g1 3g / 2 3 n1 3
or 1.225
n 22 g g 2 n 2

or, nl = 1.225n = 1.225 × (l / 2) = 0.612s–1.

11. (b) Energy of damped oscillator at an any instant t is given by

1 2
E = E0e–bt/m [where E0 =
2
Due to damping forces the amplitude of oscillator will go on decreasing

402 Physics Class XI

 CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

Simple Pendulum
An ideal simple pendulum consists of a heavy point mass body (bob)

a rigid support about which it is free to oscillate.

Suppose simple pendulum of length l is displaced through a small

angle

Answer the following questions :-

1. The period of a simple pendulum is doubled, when
(a) Its length is doubled
(b) The mass of the bob is doubled
(c) Its length is made four times
(d) The mass of the bob and the length of the pendulum are doubled

2. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of constant length at

earth surface is T. Its period inside a mine is
(a) Greater than T
(b) Less than T
(c) Equal to T

Oscillations Waves 403

 3. A pendulum suspended from the ceiling of a train has a period T,
when the train is at rest. When the train is accelerating with a uniform
acceleration a, the period of oscillation will
(a) Increase (b) Decrease

4. Which of the following statements is not true? In the case of a simple

pendulum for small amplitudes the period of oscillation is
(a) Directly proportional to square root of the length of the pendulum
(b) Inversely proportional to the square root of the acceleration due
to gravity
(c) Dependent on the mass, size and material of the bob
(d) Independent of the amplitude

5. The time period of a second's pendulum is 2 sec. The spherical bob

which is empty from inside has a mass of 50 gm. This is now replaced

100 gm. The new time period will be

(a) 4 sec (b) l sec (c) 2sec (d) 8sec

HINTS AND ANSWERS

l
1. (c) T 2 T l
g
2. (a) Inside the mine g decreases
l
Hence from T 2 ; T increases
g
l
3. (b) Initially time period was T 2 .
g

value of g becomes g 2 a 2 which

is greater than g.
Hence, new time period, becomes
less than the initial time period.
4. (c)
l
5. (c) T 2 (independent of mass)
g

404 Physics Class XI

 WAVES
ASSERTION - REASON BASED QUESTIONS
ad the assertion and reason carefully to mark the correct

of the assertion.

of the assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(e) If assertion is false but reason is true.

1.

2.

3.
can.

4.

5.
normal to the shore.

6.
pressure.

7.

8.
winter day.

absolute temperature.

Oscillations Waves 405

 9.
between the region of compression and rarefaction in air is not possible.

10.
time.

properties of elasticity and inertia.

11.
sound produced goes on decreasing.

12.

HINTS AND ANSWERS

1. (a) Sound waves require material medium to travel. As there is no atmosphere
(vacuum) on the surface of moon, therefore the sound waves cannot reach
from one person to another.
2. (b) Transverse waves travel in the form of crests and troughs involving
change in shape of the medium. As liquids and gases do not possess the
elasticity of shape, therefore, transverse waves cannot be produced in

3. (b) Sound waves cannot propagate through vacuum because sound waves
are mechanical waves. Light waves can propagate through vacuum
because light waves are electromagnetic waves. Since sound waves are
longitudinal waves, the particles move in the direction of propagation,
therefore these waves cannot be polarised.
K
4. (c) Velocity of sound in gas medium is v is ratio of its principal

heat capacities p v For moist air is less than that for dry air and

is slightly greater.
velocity of sound increases with increase in humidity.
5.
ever-increasing radius. When they hit the shore, their radius of curvature
is so large that they can be treated as plane waves. Hence, they hit the
shore nearly normal to the shore.

406 Physics Class XI

6. (a) A compression is a region of medium in which particles come closer i.e.,
distance between the particles becomes less than the normal distance
between them. Thus, there is a temporary decrease in volume and a
consequent increase in density of medium. Similarly in rarefaction,
particle get farther apart and a consequent decrease in density.
7. (e) Since transverse wave can propagate through medium which possess
elasticity of shape. Air posses only volume elasticity therefore transverse
wave cannot propagate through air.
8. (c) The velocity of sound in a gas is directly proportional to the square root
RT
of its absolute temperature as v = . Since temperature of a hot
M
day is more than cold winter day, therefore sound would travel faster
on a hot summer day than on a cold winter day.
9. (c) According to Laplace, the changes in pressure and volume of a gas, when
sound waves propagated through it, are not isothermal, but adiabatic.

10.

is always constant i.e., particle velocity vary with respect to time, while
the wave velocity is independent of time.
Also for wave propagation medium must have the properties of elasticity
and inertia.
11. (d) A bucket can be treated as a pipe closed at one end. The frequency of
v
the note produced l , here L equal to depth of water level from the
4L
open e
increases. Therefore, frequency or pitch of sound produced goes on
increasing. Also, the frequency of woman voice is usually higher than
that of man.
12. (b) A tuning fork is made of a material for which elasticity does not change.
Since the alloy of nickel, steel and chromium (elinvar) has constant
elasticity, therefore it is used for the preparation of tuning fork.

Oscillations Waves 407

 CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS
I. oppler Shift is the change in frequency of a wave
in relation to an observer who is moving relative to the wave source. It is

phenomenon in 1842.
Whenever there is a relative motion between a source of sound and the

from the actual frequency of sound emitted by the source. The frequency
observed by the observer is called the apparent frequency. It may be less
than or greater than the actual frequency emitted by the sound source. The

a vehicle sounding a horn approaches and recedes from an observer.

the approach, identical at the instant of passing by, and lower during the
recession.
Answer the following questions :-
1. Doppler shift in frequency does not depend upon
(a) The frequency of the wave produced
(b) The velocity of the source
(c) The velocity of the observer
(d) Distance from the source to the listener
2. A source of sound of frequency 450 cycles/sec is moving towards
a stationary observer with 34 m/sec speed. If the speed of sound is
340 m/sec, then the apparent frequency will be
(a) 410 cycles/sec (b) 500 cycles/sec
(c) 550 cycles/sec (d) 450 cycles/sec
3. The wavelength is 120 cm when the source is stationary. If the source
is moving with relative velocity of 60 m/sec towards the observer,
then the wavelength of the sound wave reaching to the observer will
be (velocity of sound = 330 m/s)
(a) 98 cm (b) 140 cm (c) 120 cm (d) 144 cm
4. The frequency of a whistle of an engine is 600 cycles/sec is moving
with the speed of 30 m/sec towards an observer. The apparent frequency
will be (velocity of sound = 330 m/s)
(a) 600 cps (b) 660 cps (c) 990 cps (d) 330 cps

408 Physics Class XI

 5. A source of sound emits waves with frequency f Hz and speed
V m/sec. Two observers move away from this source in opposite
directions each with a speed 0.2 V relative to the source. The ratio
of frequencies heard by the two observers will be
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3 (c) 1 : 1 (d) 4 : 10

II. Standing Wave in a Organ Pipe

Organ pipes are the musical instrument which are used for producing
musical sound by blowing air into the pipe. Longitudinal stationary

longitudinal waves.
Equation of standing wave y
2 vt 2 x
2a cos sin
v
Frequency or vibration n



  
    




    
  
  




  
Answer the following questions :-
1. A tube closed at one end and containing air is excited. It produces
the fundamental note of frequency 512 Hz. If the same tube is open
at both the ends the fundamental frequency that can be produced is
(a) 1024 Hz (b) 512 Hz (c) 256 Hz (d) 128 Hz

Oscillations Waves 409

 in frequency. Their lengths are in the ratio

(a) Same as the fundamental frequency of an open tube of same length

(b) Twice the fundamental frequency of an open tube of same length

(d) None of the above

vibration of air column in the vessel

(a) Remains same (b) Decreases
(c) Increases (d) First increases then decreases
5. It is desired to increase the fundamental resonance frequency in a
tube which is closed at one end. This can be achieved by
(a) Replacing the air in the tube by hydrogen gas
(b) Increasing the length of the tube
(c) Decreasing the length of the tube

HINTS AND ANSWERS

I. 1. (d)
v 340
2. (b) n' n 450 500 cycles / sec.
v v 340 34

3. (a)
v v vs
n' n '
v vs v
330 60
' 120 98 cm.
330
v 330
4. (b) n' n 600 660 cps.
v vS 300
5. (c) Both listeners, hears the same frequencies.

410 Physics Class XI

II. 1. (a) Fundamental frequency of open pipe is double that of the closed
pipe.
2. (c) If is given that
First over tone of closed pipe = First over tone of open pipe
v v
3 2 ;
4l1 2l2

where l and l are the lengths of closed and open organ pipes hence
l1 3
l2 4
3v
3. (d) First overtone for closed pipe =
4l
v
Fundamental frequency for open pipe =
2v 2l
First overtone for open pipe = .
2l
v 1
4. (c) For closed pipe in general n (2N 1) n
4l l
i.e. if length of air column decreases frequency increases.
5.
v
(a,c,d) Fundamental frequency for closed pipe n
4l
RT 1
where v = v
M M

MH M air vH v air
2 2

Hence, fundamental frequency with H will be more as compared

to air. So option (a) is correct.
1
Aslo n , hence if l decrease n increases so option (c) is
correct. l
It is well known that (n) = 2(n) hence option (d) is correct.

Oscillations Waves 411

 SOLUTIONS
ANSWERS OF ONE MARK QUESTIONS
1.
decreased.
2.
K = f/x)

3. At x = a/
4.
completes one vibration or the frequency of R.E. or K.E is double than that
of S.H.M.
5. The frequency of total energy of particle is S.H.M. is zero because it remains
constant.
6. Length of the seconds pendulum proportional to (acceleration due to gravity)
7. Increased
1
8. As T , T will increase.
g
9. In the y-z plane or in plane perpendicular to x
10. It is the angle covered per unit time or it is the quantity obtained by
multiplying frequency by a factor of 2 .
= 2 n, S.I. unit is rad s–1.

11. Intensity = amplitude2

Required ratio = y/x

12. No, the resultant of Tension in the string and weight of bob is not always
towards the mean position.
13. T =2
14. Swinging through small angles.
15. No, it is a circular and periodic motion but not SHM.
16. In SHM, The velocity leads the displacement by a phase 2 radians and
acceleration leads the velocity by a phase /2 radians.

412 Physics Class XI

17. The component of weight (mg sin ).

18. times, as
19. A harmonic wave function is a periodic function whose functional form is
sine or cosine.
20. S.H.M.
21.
of resonance, for resonance to occur 1 = 2.

22.
23. When the sound wave travel through air adiabatic changes take place in the
medium.
24. Sound travel faster in iron or solids because iron or solid is highly elastic as
compared to water (liquids) or air (gases).
25. When the displacement of bob from the mean position is so small that
sin .
26.

27.
frequency of the oscillator in case of forced oscillation but in resonance two
frequencies are equal.
28.
position is called its amplitude.
29. T.
So, y(t) = y(t + T) = y(t + 2T) etc.
30.
to velocity) the frequency of sound increases and hence its pitch increases.
31.
32.
all these sounds are heard at the same time.

Oscillations Waves 413

33.
of medium (water). A shock wave is thus a longitudinal wave travelling at
a speed which is greater than that of ordinary wave.
34.
but frequency does not change.
35. Wave velocity is constant for a given medium and is given by V = n . But

36. The frequency of vibration depends on the length of the air column and not

37.
the listener with a velocity greater than the velocity of sound. Same is also
true if listener moves with velocity greater than the velocity of sound towards
the source of sound.
38. Wave length of sound changes.
39. The number of sound waves received by the listener changes.
40. Yes, the sound waves will produce 56 beats every second. But due to
persistence of hearing, we would not be able to hear these beats.
41. A medium in which speed of wave motion is independent of frequency of
wave is called non-dispersive medium. For sound, air is non dispersive
medium.
ANSWERS OF TWO MARKS QUESTIONS

42. because direction of acceleration is not

mentioned. In SHM, the acceleration is always in a direction opposite to
that of the displacement.

43.
period, yet the time period depends on the length of the spring. It is because,
force constant of the spring depends on the length of the spring.

44.
upon density of the liquid, therefore time period will be same, when the
eight in place of water in the U-tube.

414 Physics Class XI

45. We have,

So, when a hard spring is loaded with a mass m

lesser w.r.t. delicate one. So frequency of the oscillation of the hard spring
will be more and if time period is asked it will be lesser.
46. Restoring force in case of simple pendulum is given by

So force constant itself proportional to m as the value of k is substituted in

the formula, m is cancelled out.
47. The pendulum is in a state of weightlessness i.e. g = 0. The frequency of
pendulum

48. A = 2a = A0, U = a = v0

49. At a given temperature, the velocity of sound is independent of pressure, so

velocity of sound in tube will remain 330 ms–1.

50. Two prongs of a tunning fork set each other in resonant vitorations and help
to maintain the vibrations for a longer time.

51. When the stem of the a tunning fork gently pressed against the top of

intensity of sound. The holes bring the inside air incontact with the outside

Oscillations Waves 415

52. The displacement at any time t is

y = a sin ( t + )

displacement at any time (t + 2 / ) will be

y = a sin [ (t + 2 ) + ] = [sin { t + ) + 2 }]

y = a sin ( t + ) [ sin (2 + ) = sin ]

Hence, the displacement at time t and (t + 2 ) are same.

53. When a number of waves travel through the same region at the same time,
each wave travels independently as if all other waves were absent.

This characteristic of wave is known as independent behaviour of waves.

54. Wave number is the number of waves present in a unit distance of medium.
S.I. unit of k is rad m–1.
Angular wave number or propagation constant is 2 . It represents phase
k = 2 . S.I. unit of k is
–1
rad m .
55. Because the density of water vapour is less than that of the dry air hence
density of air decreases with the increase of water vapours or humidity and
velocity of sound inversely proportional to square root of density.

56. Given,

(a) Let V be the volume of 1 mole of air, then

or

or

....(i)
So at constant temperature v is constant as , R and M are constant.

416 Physics Class XI

 (b) From equation (i) we know that so with the increase in
temperature velocity of sound increases.
57. (i) In a pipe open at both ends, the frequency of fundamental note produced
is twice as that produced by a closed pipe of same length.
(ii) An open pipe produces all the harmonics, while in a closed pipe, the
even harmonics are absent,
58. Bats emit ultrasonic waves of very small wavelength (high frequencies) and

idea about the distance, direction, nature and size of the obstacle.
59. At the point, where a compression and a rarefaction meet, the displacement is

i.e.
hand, at the mid point of compression or a rarefaction, the displacement

is minimum at such point.

60. As the temperature increases, the length of the prong of the tunning fork
increases. This increases the wavelength of the stationary waves set up in

the tunning fork. As frequency, so frequency of the tunning fork

decreases.
61. For an echo of a simple sound to be heard, the minimum distance between
the speaker and the walls should be 17 m, so in any room having length less
than 17 m, our ears can not distinguish between sound received directly and

62. The phenomenon of persistence or prolongation of sound after the source

has stopped emitting sound is called reverberation. The time for which the
sound persists until it becomes inaudible is called the reverberation time.
SOLUTION / HINTS OF NUMERICALS

86. y = r sin t = r sin

Here and T = 1s

Oscillations Waves 417

87. When

When

As

or ....(i)

and or ....(ii)
Subtracting (ii) from (i), we get

or =

T=

88. Here y = 5 cm and acceleration a = 45 cm s–2

We know a = 2y

or rad s–1

and T =
89. Here mg = 40 g = 40 980 dyne ; l = 4 cm.
say k is the force constant of spring, then
mg = kl or k = mg/l

k= dyne cm–1
when the spring is loaded with mass m = 200 g

v=

= 1.113 s–1.

418 Physics Class XI

90. Here on earth, T = 3.5 s; g = 9.8 ms–2

For simple pendulum

....(i)
on moon, g = 1.7 ms–2 and if T is time period

then ....(ii)
Dividing eqn. (ii) by eqn. (i), we get

or

91. (i)

(ii)
92. Let frequency of Ist tunning fork = x
frequency of IInd tunning fork = x + 4
frequency of IIIrd tunning fork = x + 2 (4)
frequency of IVth tunning fork = x + 3 (4)
Let frequency of 24th tunning fork = x + 23 (4)
octave means, (twice in freq.)
freq. of 24th = 2 freq. of Ist = 2x
2x = x + 23 (4) x = 92
freq. of 24th = 2 92 = 184 H3.
93. Given, v = 0.5 s–1, g = 9.8 ms–1

a i.e., r = y
a = 4 2v2r and a = g to remain in contact.

Oscillations Waves 419

 or

94. Say v1 in the velocity of sound at T1 v2 = 2v1 at temperature T2

Now

or T2 = 4
95. Here m = 50 kg, l = 0.2 m

we know mg = kl or Nm–1

T = 0.60 s and M is the mass of the body, then using

T= kg

Weight of body Mg = 22.34 9.8 = 218.93 N.

96. Apparent freq.

or

v = 330 ms–1

v0 = 330 – 297 = 33 m/s.

97. KE

at

KE =

420 Physics Class XI

98. Given T = 200 N, length of string l = 20 m
total mass of the string = 2.5 kg
mass per unit length of the string

kg m–1

Now v = ms–1
Hence time taken by the transverse wave to reach other end

t=

99. (i) sin t + cos t =

It is simple harmonic function with period

(ii) sin t + sin 2 t + sin 4 t is a periodic but not simple harmonic function.

Its time period is .

(iii) e– t
periodic function.
(iv) log t is also non-periodic function.
100. Here y =

y = ....(i)

Oscillations Waves 421

 The equation of a travelling wave is given by

y = ....(ii)

= 10 cm, = 200 cm and v = 200 ms–1

Now v =

101. Unknown freq. = Known freq. I Beat freq.

= 288 ± 4 = 292 or 284 Hz

unknown freq. = 292 Hz (higher one)

102. The frequency of nth mode of vibration of a pipe closed at one end is given
by

vn =
river v = 340 ms–1, L = 20 cm = 0.2 m; vn = 430 Hz

430 =

n must be an integer, the same source can not be in resonance with the pipe
with both ends open.

103. Total length of the wire, L = 105 cm

v1 v2 v3

Let L1, L2 and L3 be the length of the three parts. As v

L1 L2 L3 =
Sum of the ratios = 15 + 5 + 1 = 21

L1 = cm; L2 = cm;

422 Physics Class XI

 L3 = cm
Hence the bridges should be placed at 75 cm and (75 + 25) = 100 cm from
one end.

104. ....(i)

(a) The displacement which involves harmonic functions of x and t separately

represents a stationary wave and the displacement, which is harmonic
function of the form (vt ± x), represents a travelling wave. Hence, the
equation given above represents a stationary wave.

(b) When a wave pulse travelling along x

from the other end, a stationary wave is formed and

is given by

y= ....(ii)

or = 3m

= 120 or v = 60 = 60 3 = 180 ms–1

Now frequency = Hz
(c) Velocity of transverse wave in a string is given by

Here m= kgm–1

Also v = 180 ms–1

T = v2 m = (180)2 2 10–2 = 648N.

Oscillations Waves 423

105. Frequency of fundamental mode, v = 45Hz
Mass of wire M = 3.5 10–2 kg; mass per unit length, m = 4.0 10–2 kgm1

Length of wire L =

(a) For fundamental mode L = or = 2L = 0.875 2 = 1.75 m

velocity v = v = 45 1.75 = 78.75 ms–1
(b) The velocity of transverse wave

v=

106. u = 2.53 kHz = 2.53 103 Hz

(L) Length of steel rod = 100 cm = 1 m.

its fundamental frequency, then

L= or = 2L = 2 1=2m
The speed of sound in steel
v = n = 2.53 103 2 = 5.06 103 ms–1.

107. rad.

v= m

As =

x=
= 0.12 m.

108. v0 =

Apparent freq. =

424 Physics Class XI

 =

OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
109.
how much interval from t = 0, its displacement will be half of its amplitude?
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) s s s s (b) s s s s
8 6 4 3 8 6 4 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s(c) s s s s s (d)s s
8 6 4 3 8 6 4 3
110. Two equations of two SHM y = a Sin ( t– ) and y = a os ( t– ). The

111. If a simple pendulum oscillates with an amplitude of 50 mm and time period

(a) 0.10 m/s (b) 0.15 m/s

(c) 0.8 m/s (d) 0.26 m/s
112. The equation of simple harmonic motion y = a sin (2 t + ) then its phase
at time t is
(a) 2 nt (b)
(c) 2 t+ (d) 2 t
113. The equation of simple harmonic motion y = a sin (2 t + ) then its phase
at time t = 0s is
(a) 2 n t (b)
(c) 2 t+ (d) 2 t
114. t), where t

displacement in time
(a) 4s (b) 2s
(c) 1s (d) 0.5s

Oscillations Waves 425

115. The instantaneous displacement of a simple pendulum oscillator is given
t
4
(a) (b)
4 2 4 2
2
(c) (d)
116. The velocity of particle in SHM at displacement y from mean position is
(a) w (a 2 y2 ) w (a 2 wy 2 ) (a w(b)
2 2 2
) 2 wy 2 )(a 2
y (a y2 ) w 2 (a 2 y2 )

(c) wy (d) w2 a2 y2

117.
a
meter. The shortest time it takes to reach a point 2
m from its mean position
in seconds is
T T T
(a) T (b)
4 8 16
T T T
(c) T T T (d)
4 8 16 4 8 16
118.

(a) –a (b) +a
a
(c) a (d)
4
119. If tension in the string is increased from 1 KN to 4 KN, other factors
remaining unchanged, the frequency of the second harmonic will
(a) be halved (b) main changed
(c) be doubled (d) becomes four times
120.
overtone identical. What is the ratio of their lengths?
1 4 3 1 4 3
(a) (b)
2 3 4 2 3 4
1 4 3
(c) (d) 1
2 3 4
121. The fundamental frequency of a stretched string is v0. If the length is reduced

(a) 0.2 v0 (b) 0.5 v0

(c) 2.0 v0 (d) 1.6 v0

426 Physics Class XI

122. Two waves of same frequency traveling in the same medium in opposite
direction when super imposed give rise to
(a) beats (b) harmonics
(c) standing waves (d) resonance
123. Equation of a progressive wave is given by 6
The

/2?
(a) 4 cm (b) 8 cm
(c) 25 cm (d) 12.5 cm
124. For two systems to be in resonance, which of the following properties should
be equal?
(a) Wavelength (b) Frequency
(c) Amplitude (d) Wave velocity
125. Fundamental frequency of a sonometer wire is n. If the length, diameter
and tension are doubled, the new fundamental frequency will be

(a) n (b) 2n
n n n n
(c) (d)
2 2 2 2 2 2
126. The frequency of an open organ pipe is v. If half part of organ pipe is dipped
in water then its frequency is

(a) v (b)
4 2
(c) (d)
4 2
127. Two tuning forks when sounded together given one beat every 0.2 s. What

(a) 0.2 (b) 2

(c) 5 (d) 10
128. Angle between wave velocity and particle velocity of a longitudinal
wave is

Oscillations Waves 427

Answer : (Objective Type Questions)

109. (c) 110. (c) 111. (b) 112. (c) 113. (b) 114. (c)

115. (a) 116. (b) 117. (c) 118. (c) 119. (c) 120. (c)

121. (c) 122. (c) 123. (c) 124. (b) 125. (d) 126. (a)

127. (c) 128. (c)

HINTS :

a 1
109. y a sin wt as y we get t s (Given T 3s)
2 4
5 2
111. V aw
100 2
m/s

T
114. wt 0.5 t w 0.5 T 4s req. time 1s
4
1
117. y a sin wt y
2
119. T

120. For open pipe, frequency of I overtone, 1

1

For closed organ pipe, frequency of I overtone, 2

2

1 T
121. 0 Frequency in new cond.
2L M

123. Req. distance = 4

****

428 Physics Class XI

 CLASS: XI
SESSION: 2023-24
SOLVED PRACTICE PAPER
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)

Maximum Marks: 70 Time Allowed: 3 hours.

General Instructions:
1. There are 33 questions in all. All questions are compulsory.
2.

3. All the sections are compulsory.

4.

5.

6. not allowed.

SECTION-A

1.

5 3 8 4 dyne
2.

Oscillations Waves 429

3.

(a) decreases with time (b) increases with time

(c) remains constant (d) zero
4. 3 collides with a
3

5.

6.

mass

7.

8.


 




430 Physics Class XI

 9.

10.

11.

will be
(a) 5
12.

(a) m m (b) m m (c) m m2 (d) m2 m

below
(a) beth Accertion and Reason are true and Reason is correct explanation

13. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):

14. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):

15. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):
Oscillations Waves 431
16. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):

SECTION-B

17.
–2

that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 –2 2

18.

19.

20.

21.

SECTION-C

22.
this phenomenon.

23.
massless loaded spring.
24.

432 Physics Class XI

25.

26.

27.

.
28.

other.

SECTION-D

(Case Study Based Questions)

29.
Force of Friction on Connected Bodies
When

in contact is called normal reaction. The

the pulley. 



Oscillations Waves 433

(ii) The normal reaction acting on the system is

30.
HEAT TRANSFER
The

to the lower system.

434 Physics Class XI

(iii)
(a) increase (b) decrease

Mass

SECTION-E

31.

What

32.

Deduce

33.

OR

Oscillations Waves 435

 its limations.

436 Physics Class XI

 CLASS: XI
SESSION: 2023-24
MARKING SCHEME
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)
SECTION-A
1. Option (b)
–2]

n M L T
n2 M2 L T2

i.e. n2

n2 n

3 dyne
2. Option (c)

3. Option (c)

Oscillations Waves 437

 4. Option (a)
3 g

m2 3 kg
V

5. Option (a)

6.

Option (a)
7.

thickness) or wire.
8.

PA

438 Physics Class XI

 9.
As Volume (radius)3 and Area (radius) so percentage increase will
temperatuer.
10.

V)mix

11.
t

 

12.

13.
m

md dt
dt md m and dv

Oscillations Waves 439

14.

gh

15.
When

atmospheric pressure which happen only one hole is made

16.
When

SECTION-E

17.

n 2
M 2 kg
   
   
2 T–2]

a b Tc

440 Physics Class XI

 2 b–2 2.

18.

–2

19. Rotational kinetic energy remains same.

i.e.

or

20.

Oscillations Waves 441

 sin

cos

sin 2
cos 3
P 2
P 3 cd (eq 2)

P 2 and P 3
P 2 3
21.

SECTION-C

22.

442 Physics Class XI

can be used.

To

Piano

Oscillations Waves 443

 As

this case:
The
where

444 Physics Class XI

 2
where 2

2
n2 2 2
n2 2

n2
This
: n2

23.

At initial equilibrium

mg – k (y0

mg – ky0

Oscillations Waves 445

 0

where 2

where

24.

23.

The root mean square speed (Vrms

Vrms

rms .

25.

Work

Total

446 Physics Class XI

 e

26. An elastic collision is a collision in which there is no net loss in kinetic

Oscillations Waves 447

 m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
or m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v2 – u2) ...(1)
By conservation of kinetic energy

or m1(u12 – v12) = m2(v22 – u22) ...(2)

Dividing (2) by (1), we get,
(u1 + v1) = (v2 + u2)
or v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 ...(3)
Substituting (3) by (1), we get
m1(u1 – v1) = m2(u1 – u2 + v1 – u2)
or m1u1 – m1v1 = m2u1 – m2u1 – 2m2u2 + m2u1

  

  

27.

From

N cos = mg + f sin
mg = N cos – f sin ...(1)
, f cos

= N sin + f cos ...(2)

448 Physics Class XI

 s

where tan s
28.

cos

and sin

2 2 2

R2 2 2

Oscillations Waves 449

 

R make an angle a with P

tan

Graphical method:

velocity-time

450 Physics Class XI

 ...(ii)

(iii)
t is

  

     

Oscillations Waves 451

 2 – u2
2

SECTION-D (Case Study Based Questions)

29.
(ii)

2
T m

T – T2

–2)

(
30.

452 Physics Class XI

(iii) (a) increase

(c) radiation

...(i)

...(ii)

Oscillations Waves 453

 Practise Paper XI
Subject Physics (Theory)
Session 2023-24

General Instructions:
(i)
(ii)

(iii) All the sections are compulsory.

SECTION–A

1.

(a) (b) (c) 2 (d) 4

2
2.

3.

454 Physics Class XI

4. There is no atmosphere on the moon because
(a) it is closer to the earth

square relocity.
5.

6.
due to

7. 




 
8.

(a) beats (b) harmonics

9.

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Oscillations Waves 455

10.
(a)
11.

12. 



hand is 
(a)

(d) 

13. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):
14. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):

15. Is Assertion (A):

456 Physics Class XI

 Reason (R):
position. potential.
16. Assertion (A):

Reason (R):

SECTION–B
17.

plane to keep the mass in equilibrium.

18.

19.

20.

21. 




An ideal monoatomic gas is taken round the

 
 


 
 

Oscillations Waves 457

 SECTION–C
22. The Identical springs of spring   
amstemt K are attached to a

Supports as shown below. Show

that when the mass is diplaced from its equilibrium positon on the other

OR
Show
velocity is II between displacement and acceleration is p.
23. There are few forces acting at a point P produced by strings as shown,
which is at rest.

 

 


24.
the Principle and work of hydraulic brakes.
25.
(i) a horse cannot pull a cart and run in empty space.
(ii) It is easier to pull a lawn mover than to push it.
(iii) porcelain objects wrapped in paper or straw before backing for
transportation.
26. Show that in an elastic callision in me dimension, the relative velocity of approach
before callision is equal to the relative velocity of seperation after collision.
27. Distinguish with an illustration among free, fered and resonant oscillations.

28.

3
 2
1

 

458 Physics Class XI

 OR

SECTION-D

29.

(ii)
(a) straight line parallel to time axis

(c) circular
(d) parabolic

2
u 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2

2 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2
30.

Oscillations Waves 459

 2 2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2

(a) poise
(b) deca poise (dimensioner)
(c) dimensionless

31.
(i) Range is same

tan (4)
OR

460 Physics Class XI

32.

(b)

OR

OR

–2

Oscillations Waves 461

 Practise Paper XI
Subject Physics (Theory)
Session 2023-24

General Instructions:
(i)
(ii)

(iii) All the sections are compulsory.

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

SECTION–A

1.

2.

3. and with the horizontal.

(a) u cos (b) u cos (c) u cos (d) u2 cos

462 Physics Class XI

 4.

5.

6.

7.

(a) 5 : 7 (b) 3 : 5 (c) (d) 3 : 7

8.

9.

10.
(a) Very low pressure and high temperature

Oscillations Waves 463

11.
molecules is
(a) (b)

12.

13. A:

R:
quantity remains
14. A: Work done by a gas in isothermal expansion is more than the work done
by the gas in the same expansion adiabatically.
R: Temperature remains constant in isothermal expansion and not in
adiabatic expansion.
15. A:
displacement is minimum.
R:
16. A:
R:
acceleration.
464 Physics Class XI
 SECTION B
17.
x is the distance and t is the time.
18.

19.

OR

20.

21.

SECTION C
22.

graphical method.
23.

OR

24.
to
2.
25.

Oscillations Waves 465

26.

OR
What

27.

28.

SECTION D (Case Based Questions)

29.

466 Physics Class XI

 reaction.

(a) g sin – g cos (b) g sin g cos

(c) g cos – g sin (d) g cos g sin

(a) g sin – g cos (b) g sin g cos

(c) g cos – g sin (d) g cos g sin

(a) t t2 (b) t t2
(c) t 2
OR

30.

Oscillations Waves 467

 heats y is
(a) 5/3 (b) 7/5 (c) 9/7 (d) None of these
4. The value of Cp for diatomic molecules is
(a) (5/2) R (b) (7/2) R (c) (6/2) R (d) (9/2) R
OR
Relation between pressure P and average Kinetic energy E per unit volume
of gas is

(a) (b) (c) (d) P = 3E

3

SECTION-E
31. (a) What is projectile? Obtain an expression for the maximum height and
with the horizontal.
(b) Prove that the maximum horizontal range is four times the maximum

direction
OR
(a) Why are circular roads banked? Deduce an expression for the angle of
banking.

14 ms–1
friction is 0.60? Justify.
32.
a tube of variable cross sectional area.

(b) A fully loaded Boeing aircraft has a mass of 3.3 × 105 kg. Its total wing
area is 500 m2
the fractional increase in the speed of the air on the upper surface of
the wing relative to the lower surface. (density of air: = 1.2 kg m3)

OR

468 Physics Class XI

 excess pressure inside a soap bubble.

33.

OR

Oscillations Waves 469